Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Resolution - 6238 - Contract - Lubbock Building Services - LWUOS Addition - 03/25/1999
Resolution No. 6238 Item No. 26 March 25, 1999 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a contract for the City of Lubbock Water Utilities Office/Shop Addition, by and between the City of Lubbock and Lubbock Building Services of Lubbock, Texas and related documents. Said contract is attached hereto and incorporated in this resolution as if fully set forth herein and shall be included in the minutes of the City Council. Passed by the City Council this 25th day of March , 19 99 . WINDY SIT ON, YOR ATTEST: 1 461 i AAAa Kayt I arnell, City Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: Victor Kilman, Puikhasing Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: William de Haas Competition and Contracts Manager/Attorney gs:ccdocs/Water Util Shop Addn.res March 16, 1999 P" to CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR CITY OF LUBBOCK WATER UTILITIES OFFICE/SHOP ADDITION BID #99043 tir (i0 (j t ♦ K Y:� O G CITY OF LUBBOCK Lubbock, Texas P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock. Texas 79457 (806) 775-2167 • Fax (806) 775-2164 ITB #99043, Addendum #2 Office of Purchasing ADDENDUM! #2 ITB #99043 CITY OF LUBBOCK WATER UTILITIES OFFICEISHOP ADDITION MAILED TO VENDOR: CLOSE DATE: March 8, 1999 March 11, 1999 @ 2:00 PM The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Section 08710 — Existing door hardware is Sargent. Keyway new hardware to match existing. 2. Clarification of toilet accessories — Grab bars at accessible toilets shall be Bobrick B-5507 or equivalent. Grab bars adjacent to water closets shall be 42" long mounted 12" from the back wall. Grab bars behind water closets shall be 36" long mounted 6" from the adjacent wall. Mirrors shall be 18" x 36" as called out on the drawings. Omit the 5" x 18" stainless steel shelf called out in the specifications. 3. Clarification — Garage 116 shall have sealed concrete floors. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Questions may be faxed to or Email to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 (806) 775-2164 RShuffieid@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YO Ron Shuffield Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID 99043ad2.doc 44 b P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock. Texas 79467 (806) 775-2167 • Fax (806) 775-2164 ITB #99043, Addendum #1 Office of Purchasing ADDENDUM #9 ITB #99043 CITY OF LUBBOCK WATER UTILITIES OFFICE/SHOP ADDITION MAILED TO VENDOR: CLOSE DATE: March 4, 1999 March 11, 1999 @ 2:00 PM The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Please find enclosed the revised Bid Submittal Form which includes Alternate #1 for your bid submittal. 2. Omit specification sections 10105 Visual Display Boards, 12512 Horizontal Louver Blinds, and 13121 Pre -Engineered Buildings. 3. Sheet 1.1 - There is a light pole with a concrete base approximately 100 feet north of the existing water utilities building that is not shown on the drawings. This light pole and its base are to be removed and turned over to the owner. 4. Sheet 1.1 - All concrete shown to be removed and disposed of shall be assumed to be 6" thick. All asphalt paving shown to be removed and disposed of shall be assumed to be 6" of asphalt. Paving to be removed shall be saw cut prior to removal. 5. Sheet 4.1 - Elevation reference 10110.1 should read 9110.1. Elevation reference 11110.1 should read 10/10.1. Elevation reference 13110.1 should read 12/10.1. 6. Sheet 4.1 - Rooms numbered 104, 108, 109, 110 shall have carpet in lieu of VCT indicated. Carpet shall be Patcraft Intelligence Commercial Carpet or equivalent. All areas noted to receive sealed concrete as floor finish shall receive VCT as specified instead. 7. Sheet 4.1 - Omit all reference to dry erase marker boards, tack boards and miniblinds. 8. Sheet 10.1 - Omit upper cabinet at detail 18/10.1. 9. Sheet 15.1 - At new water supply and waste water service to the building, necessary paving demolition shall be saw cut for removal as required and then patched to match existing once the new lines are finished. Please note that parking areas are 6" thick concrete (3 being crossed) and that drives are 6" asphalt (3 being crossed). Contractor shall verify necessary quantities of demolition and patching necessary to complete the work required by the contract. 10. No sprinkler system is required. 99043ad1.doc ITB #99043, Addendum #1 All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to : (806) 775-21$4 or Email to: RShuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, 4AFel Ron Shuffield Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID 99043adlAm BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT PLACE: DATE: PROJECT NUMBER: #99043 -CITY OF LUBBOCK WATER UTILITIES OFFICE/SHOP ADDITION Bid of (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. MATERIALS: ($. SERVICES: ($. +� TOTAL BID: ($ ALTERNATE #1 Exterior painting of buildings F and C. = MATERIALS: ($ SERVICES: ($ im TOTAL ALTERNATE #1 (ADD): (Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 210 (TWO HUNDRED AND TEN) consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $500 (FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 21 of the General Instructions to Bidders. 1 Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within (ten) 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Dollars ($ _) or a Bid Bond in the sum of Dollars ($ ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. Authorized Signature (Printed or Typed Name) Company Address City, County State Telephone: Fax: (Seal if Bidder is a Corporation) ATTEST: ISecretary Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: 1 Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date Zip Code 1 i 1 l t t f 1 CITY OF LUBBOCK INVITATION TO BID FOR TITLE: CITY OF LUBBOCK WATER UTILITIES OFFICE/SHOP ADDITION ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS BID NUMBER: 99043 PROJECT NUMBER: 9545.9211 CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT 1 7 INDEX NOTICE TO BIDDERS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS BID SUBMITTAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS PAYMENT BOND PERFORMANCE BOND CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE CONTRACT GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS SPECIFICATIONS 1 NOTICE TO BIDDERS 11 4p Lm I'l bb fA NOTICE TO BIDDERS BID #99043 Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 11th day of March, 1999, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planhotders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: "CITY OF LUBBOCK WATER UTILITIES OFFICE/SHOP ADDITION" After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written. The City of Lubbock will consider the bids on the 25th day of March, 1999, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th 04 Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a pre-bid conference on 2nd day of March, at 10:00 o'clock a.m., in the Purchasing Conference Room L04, Lubbock, Texas Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre-bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock Human Relations Office at (806) 775-2281 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. CITY OF LUBBOCK V6L_bfl VICTOR KIL AN PURCHASING MANAGER Bid documents may be obtained upon request from the Purchasing Department at 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas 79401; Telephone (806) 775-21671Fax (806) 775-2164. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. SCOPE OF WORK The contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to complete this project in accordance with contract documents for the CITY OF LUBBOCK WATER UTILITIES OFFICEISHOP ADDITION. ar 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by �P said contract documents. 3. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge of forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. 4. BIDDER INQUIRIES No bidder shall request any information verbally. All written requests for additional information or clarification concerning this bid must be addressed to: 5. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within 210 (TWO HUNDRED AND TEN) consecutive calendar days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to insure completion of the project within the time specified. 6. PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. 1 RON SHUFFIELD SENIOR BUYER CITY OF LUBBOCK P.O. BOX 2000 LUBBOCK, TX 79457 FAX (806) 775-2164 5. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within 210 (TWO HUNDRED AND TEN) consecutive calendar days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to insure completion of the project within the time specified. 6. PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. 1 u AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the 4 Contractor has been notified. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. GUARANTEES 1 All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents and warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data (including, but not limited to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software and firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, as the case may be from the effective date of this Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants the year 2000 calculations will be recognized and accommodated and will not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the procedures it intends to follow in order to comply with all the obligations contained herein. The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub -contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and services to be delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its rights under the law and under this Contract including, but not limited to, its right pertaining to termination or default. The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this Contract, and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or limitation to the Contractor's liability which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its schedules, its annexes or any document incorporated in this Contract by reference. 10. PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. I i C 1 1 11 11. PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed.. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. 12. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. 13. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 14. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 15. EXPLOSIVES The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given 16 17 J sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverage's shall be submitted prior to contract execution. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. 18. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: (1) The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. (2) Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. t 19. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. 20. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder without being considered. 21. PREPARATION FOR BID The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The bid shall be executed in ink. Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: (a) Bidder's name (b) Bid for (description of the project). Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 22. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the following: (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Submittal. (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates. Q) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. 23. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy the City of Lubbock in regard to the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include.. 1. The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required. 2. The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified, without delay or interference. 3. The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder. 4. The quality of performance of previous contracts or services. BID SUBMITTAL BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT PLACE: 1625 13th; Lubbock, TX DATE: March 11, 1999 PROJECT NUMBER: #99043 - CITY OF LUBBOCK WATER UTILITIES OFFICE/SHOP ADDITION Bid of Lubbock Building Services Inc. (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation forbids for the construction of a City of Lubbock Water Untilities Office / Shop Addition having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of ithe intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. f f MATERIALS: /L e- ��� _� l• SERVICES: G .: � -,..- , ($ TOTAL BID:r�je 7� /7, z fiUCJ ) ALTERNATE #1 Exterior painting of buildings F and C. MATERIALS:-w � `W SERVICES: J S7, x duG6 ($ �S ) TOTAL ALTERNATE #1 (ADD):i*�t= : '�✓ �" >y = - �t/C ($ 9 ' ) (Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern-) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 210 (TWO HUNDRED AND TEN) consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $500 (FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 21 of the General Instructions to Bidders. 1 W Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the o plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid, as provided in the contract documents. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance gond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within (ten) 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Dollars ($ )ora Bid Bond in the sum of Five Percent Dollars ($ 5% , which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be execu by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance the Notice to ' ders. �th�oriz Signature r Smith (printed or Typed Name) Lubbock Building Services, Tnc. Company P.O. Box 65600-194 Address LMbbock T,rahhnr-k City, County Texas , 79464-5600 State Zip Code _ Telephone: 806 -798-7005 Fax: 806 -798-8256 (Seal if Bidder is a Corporation) A ST: retary ' Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addenda No. �� date .3 Addenda No. w Date 3 - a 5 - Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date z=� 1 V, 61�0-tl-lo Bond # INMAJAINITY CORP011P (a Stock Company, organized under the laws of Wisconsin) BID BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That we, Lubbock Building Services, Inc. (hereinafter called the "Principal"), as Principal, and the Capitol Indemnity Corporation of Madison, Wisconsin a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (hereinafter called the "Surety"), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the "Obligee"), in the sum of FIVE PERCENT OF AMOUNT BID BY PRINCIPAL------- Dollars ($ 5% of Bid ), for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind I`' ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these W presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for City of Lubbock Water Utilities Office / Shop Addition NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this 11th day of March 4 Witness L iux,,3�, Witness CIC -C-422-80146/891 A.D. 19 99 Lubbock`Building Services, Inc. (SEAL) . (SEAL) (Principal) ie ry Smith President (Title) CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION A Wisdonsin Corporation, (Surety) , (SEAL) Staci GrosAtjQrne-�L-in-Fact (Title) C rala� INDEMNITY CORPORATION 4610 UNIVERSITY AVENUE, SUITE 1400, MADISON, WISCONSIN 53705-0900 PLEASE ADDPESS REPLY TO PO. BOX 5900, MADISON, WI 53705-0900 PHONE (608) 231-4450 - FAX (608) 231-2029 POWER OF ATTORNEY No: 504415 Know all men by these Presents, That the CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION, a corporation of the State of Wisconsin, having its principal offices in the City of Madison, Wisconsin, does make, constitute and appoint -------- STACI J. GROSS, LAURA A. ESPINOZA, STEVE DEAL OR DONAL BOLEY------------ its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver for and on its behalf, as surety, and as its act ' and deed, any and all bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship, provided that no bond or undertaking or contract under this author of of suretyshiRex9�f19�---�----------y------------- This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION at a meeting duly called and held on the 5th day of May 1960: RESOLVED, that the President, nt by na Power rofiAttorney forSecretary the purposes only ofCeixecutindividually att sting bondseand and undertakings. anre d other ranted the power and authorization tr app writings obligatory in the nature thereof, one or more resident Oce -presidents, assistant secretaries and attorneys) -in -fact, each appointee to have the powers and duties usual to such offices to the business of this company; the signature of such officers and seal of the Company may be affixed to any such power of attorney onto any certificate relating thereto by facsknile, and any such power of attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company, and any such power so executed and certified by facsimile signatures and r facsimile seal shall it valid and binding upon the Company in the future with respect to any bond or undertaking or other writing obligatory in the nature thereof to which it is attached. Any such appointment may be revoked, for cause, or without cause, by any of said officers, at any time.' IN 'WITNESS WHEREOF, the CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION has caused these presents to be signed by its officer undersigned and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed duly attested by its Secretary, this 1 st day of June, 1993. CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION Attest:ttutrrrrrui jCe,; \01�EOV41TY CC 1% Virgiiine M. Schulte, Secretary CURPQRATE s Fait, C'residcnt < SEAL 2R U .yS�SN STATE OF WISCONSIN ,mt�►a!` COUNTY OF DANE On the 1 st day of June, A.D., 1993, before me personally came George A Fait, to me known,. who beings by me duly sworn. did depose and say: that he resides in the County of Dane, State of Wisconsin; that he is the President of CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION, the corporation described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of the said corporation; that the seal affixed to said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation and that he signed his name thereto by like order. ttttuwrin, STATE OF WISCONSIN ;0 PETFR += 1�/ r ; 'r e a Peter E. Hans COUNTY OF DANEt rtArus Notary Public, Dane Co., WI 1' o4RYFO My Commission is permanent CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned, duly elected to the office stated below, now the incumbent in CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION, a Wisconsin Corporation, authorized to make this certificate, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the foregoing attached Power of Attorney remains In full force and has not been revoked; and furthermore that the Resolution of the Board of Directors, set forth in the Power of Attorney is now in force. 19 99 Signed and sealed at the City of Madison, Dated the 11th day of Aarch �,Wirrco qo,�- coRponATe a Paul J. Bre er, Treasurer U sEAL i ON This power is valid only if the power of attorney number prtnted in the upper right hand corner appears in red. Photocopies. carbon copies or other reproductions are not binding on the company. Inquiries concerning this power of attorney may be directed to the Bond Manager at the Home Office of the Capital Indemnity corporation. PAYMENT BOND _ At Bond # 746359 STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO CHAPTER 2253 OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (PUBLIC WORKS) (penalty of this Bond oust be 100% of Contract Amount) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That Lubbock Building Services, Inc. (hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and Capitol Indemnity Corporation (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the obligee), in the amount of TWO HUNDRED NINETY TWO THOUSAND EIGHT HUNDRED 'DOLLARS AND NO/100----- DOLLAR ($ 292,800.00 for the payment whereof the said Principal and Surety bind themselves and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 25th day of March , 1999 to City of Lubbock Water Utilities Office/Shop Addition which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION I5 SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and Material to him or a subcontractor in the Frosecutior. of the work provided for in said contract, then this obligation shall be void -' otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government code and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions, conditions and limitations of said chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed this instrument this .. 30th day of • March , 1999 (Principal) B y (Surety) - By Staci Gross Attaraey-=�-Fact l INDEMNITY CORPORATION 4610 UNIVERSITY AVENUE, SUITE 1400, MADISON, WISCONSIN 53705-0900 PLEASE ADDRESS REPLY TO P.O. BOX 5900, MADISON, wl 53705-0900 PHONE (608) 231.4450 • FAX (608) 231-2029 POWER OF ATTORNEY No: 506206 Know all men by these Presents, That the CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION, a corporation of the State of Wisconsin, having its principal offices in the City of Madison, Wisconsin, does make, constitute and appoint -------------- STACI J. GROSS, LAURA A. ESPINOZA, STEVE DEAL OR DONAL BOLEY------------------ its ----------------its true and lawful Attorneys) -in -fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver for and on its behalf, as surety, and as its act and deed, any and all bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship, provided that no bond or undertaking or contract of suretyship executed under this authority $h II'exceed in amount the sum of - ----------------- NOT TO EXCEED $4,000,000.00 -- -------------- ------------------------------------ This -----_------------------------- This 'Power of Attorney is granted and is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following ResoVion adopted by the Board of Directors of CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION at a meeting duly called and held on the 5th day of May 1960: "RESOLVED, that the President, and Vice -President, the Secretary or Treasurer, acting individually or otherwise, be and they hereby are granted y a Power of Attorney for the purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakincis, and other the power and authorization to appoint b writings obligatory in the nature thereof, one or more resident vice presidents, assistant secretaries and attorney(s)-in-fact, each appointee to have the powers and duties usual to such offices to the business of this company; the signature of such officers and seal of the Company may be affixed to any such power of attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such power of attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal sha€I be valid and binding upon the Company, and any such power so executed and certified by facsimile signatures and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company in the future with respect to any bond or undertaking or other writing obligatory in the nature thereof to which it is attached. Any such appointment may be revoked, for cause, or without cause, by any of said officers, at any time.'. N IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION has caused these presents to be signed by its officer undersigned and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed duly attested by its Secretary, this 1st day of June, 1993. N ■ilk ; CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION Attest: 0,4111 A1111111t111rlpF///j 'n 1 Virgiline M. Schulte, Secretary L coRPORAre Geor Fait, President SEAL STATE OF WISCONSIN COUNTY OF DANE On the 1 st day of June, A.D., 1993, before me personally came George A Fait, to me known, who being by me duly sworn, did depose and say: that he resides in the County of Dane, State of Wisconsin; that he is the President of CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION, the corporation described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of the said corporation; that the seal affixed to said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation and that he signed his name thereto by like order. .. 1�h\Ps�llotfl11 r1511c/1 1//i/er ' STATE OF WISCONSIN 2' PETER J`r Peter E Flans COUNTY OF DANE ))JNA r Notary Public, Dane Co., wl my Commission is Permanent CERTIFICATE i, the undersigned, duly elected to the office stated below, now the incumbent in CAPITOL INDEMNITY 'CORPORATION, a Wisconsin Corporation, authorized to. make this certificate, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the foregoing attached Power of Attorney remains in full force and has not been revoked; and furthermore that the Resolution of the Board of Directors, set forth. in the Power of Attorney is now "in. force. Signed and sealed at the City of Madison. Dated the 30th day of March 1999 "Ult4t1111N! o f J 3 CORPORATEp� ._ Yy SEAL x° Pauli Bre er,Treasurer y � �/Y/lllllitiillll�" This power is valid only if the power of attorney number printed in the upper right hand corner appears in red. Photocopies,carbon copies or other reproductions are not binding on the company. Inquiries concerning this power of attorney may be directed to the Bond Manager at the Home Office of the Capitol Indemnity Corporation. PERFORMANCE BOND i� C FOND CHECK BEST RATING LICENCtn IN TEXAS DATE BY STATU i ORY PERFORKANCE BOND PURSUANT TO CHAPTER 2233 Bond # 746359 OF THE TEXAS G©YEPNIMENT CODE (PUBLIC *WORKS) (Penalty of this Bond must be 1007, of Contract 1.=ount) YN OW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That Lubbock Building Services, Inc. (hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and Capitol Indemnity Corporation (hereinafter called the Surety) , as Surety, are held and firmly botmn unto City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the a=ount of - TWO HUNDRED NINETY.TWO THOUSAND EIGHT HUNDRED DOLLARS AND NO/100-.---- DOLLAR (S 292,800.00 for the pa+r,ent whereof the said principal and Surety bind themselves and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly zed severally, fir-ly by these presents. r WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obiig- dated the 25th daj -of - March , 19 99 to City of Lubbock Water -Utilities Office/Shop Addition which contract is hereby referred to and trade a part hereof as fully and to the same e:ctenc as if copied ac length herein., i'O'A, THEREFORETXE CON DITION OF THIS OBLIGATIONIS .SUCH, that if the said _' Shall zalth:ully pe`fo _h Ce'vorl- i1 accordance cr. iaccordace wi. the; pla•s, specifications a-. .c documents) then this oblioatlo:l shall 'be void, otherwz_se to remain 1r. - - a^ k^iieCt . his bond is executed parson^t to c', e provisions c= PROVIDED, P,OWEVEP,, that t Chanter 2253 of the . exas Government Code ac,d all liabilities cc this bond s;.ail deter_iaed ;r, accorca`;ce -vith the provisions; Co eitiohs ane li—;t.tions ,Qf Sc�� Chan�.er to the same extent as ] s at ere copied ac length hereic' IN WITNESS WH P,EO , the said Principal and Surety have sigced this iastr�emt t 30th day of March 3 19 99 (-.)_4-C: B 5taci Gross Attocy' c c c c c CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 6 an Am A w in I 1 0 1 APP -13-1999 10:58 BUTLER CARS -OH I NSURAP ICE 806 798 7888 P.01/01 ALi+,�ry V,,, VGIx I i {itrA i L %i1 Ll-iLa16.1 1 1 1wV "+a v i■ � v— U3:'L7; : - PRODUCER (806) 798-7979 FAx (806) 798-78$8 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE 3utl er-Carson InSuranC2 Agency 9 HOLDER, THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR 450S 82nd St, Suite 10 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED 8Y THE POLICIES BELOW. Lubbock, TX 79424 COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE Maryland Casul aty Company COMPANY Attn: Ext: A Maryland Insurance Company I IJr� Lubbock Building Services, InC. COMPAW B P.O. Box 65600-194 Sierra Insurance Co. of Texas Lubbock, TX 79464 ODMPANt' G COMPANY D COVERAGES.. _ �: k' ..«'z _.:,_... �_�_�.Y ,.:� .. - _ ._•). -"�. 4w__ .::....' THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED 9 ELOVV HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD THIS IS TO CERTIFY INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR C0,140 ITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTIHER DOCUMENT WIiFI RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY 6E ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THF_ POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN fS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS Or SUCH POI-SCIES LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. CO TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER LTR POUCY EFFECTfVE POLCY EXPIKATION LIMITS DATE (MWOD/YY) DATE(MIwDolYY) GENERAL LIABILrrY GENERALACCREGATE X COMMERCIAL GZKERAL LIABILITY . PRODUCTS - COMPIOP AUG S .. ,.. . - CLAIMS MADE X OCCUR A EPA32131667 - PEMNAL & ADV INJURY S 1, 000 , 000 09/03/1998 09/03/1999 _....._ OWNER'S& CONTRACTbR'S PROT EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000i FIRE DAMAGE IAny one lire) S 50(), ODU MED EYP(WrywePecan) S 5.D'D�1 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE uMIT s 5OQ OCO l ANY AUTO , ALL CVLNE'O AUTOS BODILY INJURY $ Pe+son) SCHEDULED AUTOSP 8 WAA22761986 09/03/1998 09/03/1999 _ X HIRED:iU7103 BODILY INJURY $ X NON.pwNEC AUTOS (Per aDoden)) PROPERTY DAMAGE S GARAGELSABILITY :AUTO ONLY -EAAGGIDENT 5 ANY AUTO ; OTHER THAN AI -ro ONLY - EACH ACCIDENT S AGGREGATE S EXCESS UAJULITY EACH OC, FMNCE I UI.IBR_^LLA FO'RAI AGGREGATE S OTHER TKA.N UMBRELLA FORIV 5 WORKERS WrAPEMSATION AND WC .5 3 ATLI- TORYLIMITS ER•�' EMPLDYrKi LIABILITY C 3�.Q f]Q6i3C EL EACH ACCIDIENT i 09/29/1998 09/29/1.999 `FLDLSEAS.E THE PROPRIETOR' INCL - POLICY WAIT S 5DO,000 PARTNERS XECIJTiVE OFFICERS ARD=: EXE. _ ..... ................... . EL DISEASE - EA EAAPLOYEE S 50C,000 OTN BFI DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS;LDCAnON8IVERCLESlSPECLAL ITEMS dditional Insured & Waiver of Subrogation on GI_ & Auto in favor of certificate holder as pertains to their interest. waiver of Subrogation on Workers' Compensation in favor Of Certificate holder as pertains to their interest in Sob: E1d #99043 Lubbock Water Utilities Office/Shop Addition CERTIFI TE`H LDER s�`a. ... _C.A._._._� �..�:�,�..........�.,w,_.�'.:.:_�_....,�...,�. , ,�!r, - � .,�,;.,a•�.,� .., , - $HOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCIUVED POLICIF9 BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRAT70N DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN NO'nCE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, City of Lubbock BUT FAtLURETO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABIUTY P. 0. Box 2000 OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES_ aUTHURIZEDREP SENTATNE John Carson Luhbock TX 79408 ACCORD 2sS;Tf ��E R,���� TOTAL P.01 04-1S-99 19:42 RECEIVED FROM:896 798 7888 P -0I aC©Roo INSURANCE BINDER DATE (MMl0PiYY)03/29/1999 ..TS BINDER IS A TEMPORARY INSURANCE CONTRACT, SUBJECT TO THE CONDITIONS SHOWN ON THE REVERSE SIDE OF THIS FORM. PRODUCER (,41C°NNo,Extj: ($06}795-7979 .,. COMPANY BINDER # Maryland Casualty Small Const. B990300236 FAX ($06)798-7888 EXPIRATION ,,Itl er-Carson Insurance Agency DATE EFFECTIVE TIME DATETIME 4505 82nd St, Suite 10 X AM X 12:11 AM 4+abbock, TX 79424 03/29/1999 12:01 04/28/1499 PM NOON THIS BINDER IS ISSUED TO EXTEND COVERAGE IN THE ABOVE NAMED COMPANY IM, ODE: 02255701 SUB CODE: PER EXPIRING POLICY #: AGENCY 00000429 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONSIVEHICLESIPROPERTY (Including Location) STOMER ID. SURED City of Lubbock P.O. Box 65600-194 Lubbock, TX 79464 COVERAGES TYPE OF INSURANCE tOPERTY CAUSES OF LOSS BASIC BROAD SPEC '_NERAL LIABILITY COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS MADE X OCCUR OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PROT 1TOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS HIRED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS MJTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE DEDUCTIBLE COLLISION: OTHER THAN COL: WARAGE LIABILITY ANY AUTO EXCESS LIABILITY UMBRELLA FORM OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM WORKER'S COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY COVERAGEIFORMS LIMITS AMOUNT DEDUCTIBLE COINS % GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 1, 000, 000 PRODUCTS - COMPIOPAGO $ PERSONAL $ ADV INJURY $ EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 FIRE DAMAGE (Any one Fre) $ RETRO DATE FOR CLAIMS MADE: MED EXP (Any one person) $ COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $ BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE $ MEDICAL PAYMENTS $ PERSONAL INJURY PROT $ UNINSURED MOTORIST $ $ ALL VEHICLES SCHEDULED VEHICLES ACTUAL CASH VALUE STATED AMOUNT $ OTHER AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY: EACH ACCIDENT $ AGGREGATE= $ EACH OCCURRENCE $ AGGREGATE $ RETRO DATE FOR CLAIMS MADE: SELF-INSURED RETENTION $ STATUTORY LIMITS EACH ACCIDENT $ DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ DISEASE - EACH EMPLOYEE $ SPECIAL r�HER1°IlNg #99043 Lubbock Water Utilities Office/Shop addition ?VERAGES NAME & ADDRESS Lubbock Building Services, Inc. MORTGAGEE ADDJTIONAL INSURED P. 0. Box 65600-194 LOSS PAYEE X Contractor Lubbock, TX 79464 LOAN# City of Lubbock AUTHORIZED REPRE TATIV i John Carso -CORD 75-S (12193) NOTE: IMPORTANT STATE INFORMATION ON VERSE SIDE ©ACORD CORPORATION 1993 ,ACORD CERTIFICATE OF PROPERTY INSURANCE DATE RODUCER (806)798-7979 FAX (806) 798-7888 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION sutler -Carson Insurance Agency ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR 14505 82nd St, Suite 10 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. ubbock, TX 79424 COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE COMPANY Assurance Co. Of America (HB) Attn Ext A '- ISURED COMPANY Lubbock Building Services, Inc. B P. 0. Box 65600-194 Lubbock, TX 79464 COMPANY C COMPANY D COVERAGES THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, it EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. '0 TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION TR DATE (MWDDIYY) DATE (MMIDDIYY) COVERED PROPERTY LIMITS PROPERTY BUILDING $ CAUSES OF LOSS PERSONAL PROPERTY $ BASIC BUSINESS INCOME S BROAD EXTRA EXPENSE S SPECIAL BLANKET BUILDING S ON EARTHQUAKE BLANKET PERS PROP $ in FLOOD BLANKET BLDG & PP S S S X Building S 292,800 X INLAND MARINE TYPE OF POLICY S A Inst/Builders Risk BR94802544 03/01/1999 Continuous CAUSES OF LOSS 5 NAMED PERILS X OTHER Special $ CRIME 5 TYPE OF POLICY S S BOILER & MACHINERY S $ od OTHER LOCATION OF PREMISESIDESCRIPTION OF PROPERTY :IAL CONDITIONSIOTHER COVERAGES Bld #99043, Lubbock Water Utilities Office/Shop TE HOLDER City of Lubbock P. 0. Box 2000 Lubbock, TX 79408 ArnRn 24 M1951 CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. AUTHORIZED REPR NTAT VE r. John Carso{,i @ACORD CORPORATION 1 _y '. I FM 1 1 1 CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST A CONTRACTOR SHALL: (1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will 'have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: 4 REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see = reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance, This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the " identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512)440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and (8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (t3) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; (D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. W. CONTRACT CONTRACT STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 25`h day of March, 1999 by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and Lubbock Building Services Inc. of the City of Lubbock County of Lubbock and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: BID #99043 - CITY OF LUBBOCK WRITER UTILITIES OFFICE/SHOP ADDITION - $292,800.00 and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. "-A Secretary AP,PpROVED AS TO CO 0voef's5 1presentative APPROVED AS TO FORM: City Attorney ATTEST: Cor orate Secretary err CONTRACTOR: IB B CK BUI VICES, INC. ` I '.TED NAME: .J !e- TITLE: / E"✓, Gc C_.,4 -4-- COMPLETE ADDRESS: Lubbock Building Services, Inc. P. O. Box 65600-194 Lubbock, Texas 79464-5600 C 10 C C C GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT C C C I C C L C C GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 1 1. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co- partnership or corporation, to wit LUBBOCK BUILDING SERVICES. INC. who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or their legal representative. 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative GARY SMITH, FACILITIES MANAGER, so designated who will inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or inspectors as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed ' Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. The above described materials are sometimes referred to herein as the "contract" or "contract documents". 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. ' 7. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to the party who gives the notice. r M CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative, The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. Owner's Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever Owner's Representative deems said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the contract. The Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall �" furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for its decision. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE rThe Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. s1 The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. ' The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. ' 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's Representative and Contractor. C 18 19 Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent men, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it ' is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 20. SANITATION rl Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be I approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation which may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any such work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any such work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective, and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS �• The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either �' before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. 6 If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in ' said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK The term extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) _ By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been charged by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for performance of the extra work. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by _, 5 25 them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C)(1). if Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative prior to the commencement any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the bid, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative prior to bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. P— bo 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages, expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an Independent Contractor, inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the 1� General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self-insurance, rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver.. The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance PR protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. A. General Liability Insurance The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1,000,000.00 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations Explosion & Collapse Hazard Underground Damage Hazard i Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury Advertising Injury B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance. For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, $1,000,000.00 Combined Single Limit. This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; 0 Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $500,000.00 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and nonowned cars including: Employers Nonownership Liability Hired and Nonowned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. D. Builder's Risk Insurance/installation Floater Insurance The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 100% of the total contract price (100%0 of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. E. Umbrella Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $D.00 on all contracts with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000.00. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC- 83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 406.096, Texas Labor Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner - operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to 8 provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. 5. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entities the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity.. G. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder an the date borne by such certificate, (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. ,o 10 1 H N ✓, 1 I t 1 CI 1 t 1 i If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. A Contractor shall: (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: 11 REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee. " "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 5121440-3789 to receive information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage;" and (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language: "By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this contract is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the person signing this contract who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the ` Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions."; (iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; 12 0 (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (i) -(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. ri 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS, MATERIALMEN, AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees, harmless against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way, manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of +�. machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five (5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain unpaid, in addition to any statutory retainage rights it may have, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof. Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is o pecified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all f its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's Representative prior to bidding. I 1 1 13 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner, and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing prior to bidding and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 33. SUBCONTRACTING The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as provided by the contract documents. 34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date o€ beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $500 FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach. IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT. 1 14 1 35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall _H be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative - may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several ,parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 36. TIME OF PERFORMANCE The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial, and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived. 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their bids offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. 15 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY L 40 41 42 The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner, and any of its officers, agents and employees, against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising from or growing out of the performance of this contract. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the bid proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative shall determine the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment if submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of the contract documents. Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said partial payment is attributable. 16 is to J r ' 44 i dw 45 t b r.� SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31) working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete the work within the time provided in this contract. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion, Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st working day after the date of certification of final completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or warranties implied by law or otherwise. CORRECTION OF WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's Representative. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor. (d) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 17 47 CLAIM OR DISPUTE It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor, and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and Owner's Representative, by Contractor. 48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required. After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 2.4 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the contract documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. 18 r 1 1 1 1 i r 1 49 f 50. P ww P In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners. The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted by law. it is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the project which is the subject matter of this contract. BONDS The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. All bonds, if required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. 19 1 1 51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. 52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 54. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. 55. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5) days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied. In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage, disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos. 20 1 CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS 1 1 1 h 4W Resolution No. 6138 Item No. 23 December 16, 1998 RESOLUTION WHEREAS, the City Council of the City of Lubbock has heretofore established the general prevailing rate of per diem wages on public works projects in Lubbock as required by Section 2258.022 of the Government Code; and WHEREAS, such wage rates were established by Resolution No. 512 1,enacted on March 14, 1996; and WHEREAS, said schedule of per diem wage rates requires a clarification with regard to Exhibit D; NOW THEREFORE: BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for public works contracts shall be as set forth in Resolution No. 5121 enacted on March 14, 1996, except that Exhibit D to said Resolution entitled "Weekend and Holiday Rate" shall be entitled "Legal Holiday Rate" and shall read as follows: "The rate for legal holidays shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act." Passed by the City Council this 16th day e AT,T ST: K ythie 'ham ell, City Secretary 7 APPROVED AS 0 CONTENT: —W�ux, a-d� Mary And ws, Director of Human Resources APPROVED AS TO FORM: J V %- G. Vandiver, First Assistant City Attorney DG V ladocslwagerate.res December 7, 1998 A Resuiutiti,n No. r March 14, 1996 Item #19 WHEREAS, the City Council has heretofore established the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for each craft or type of workmen or mechanics needed to execute public works contracts for the City of Lubbock in accordance with the provisions of Vernon's Ann.Civ.St., Art. 5159a; and _ WHEREAS, such wage rates were established by Resolution No. 719 enacted Februar% 12, 1981, updated by Resolution No. 1590 enacted February 23, 1984, and further updated b% Resolution No. 2502 enacted January 8. 1987; and WHEREAS, such rates need to be updated at the present time in order to reflect the current prevailing rate of per diem wages; NOW THEREFORE: BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for public works contracts shall be ras set forth in the following named exhibits. which exhibits shall be attached hereto and made a part hereof for all intents and purposes: Exhibit A: Building Construction Trades Exhibit B: Paving and Highway Construction 17 Exhibit C. Overtime Rate Exhibit D: Weekend and Holiday Rate Such wage rates are hereby found and declared to be the general prevailing rate of per diem wages in all localities where public works are undertaken on behalf of the City of Lubbock and such wage rates shall be included in all public works contracts as provided by law. [j i L7 r 1 .i I�A �I 14th ' Passed by the City Council this I� �I i4 I 4 I ATTEST: I• ,IaJ Betty M. J on, City Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: Mary And ws, Managing Director of Human Resources APPROVED AS TO FORM: i i' E! a old �Willar�d.Ass�istant City Attorney H W:dalccdocs/pubworks. res February 14. 1996 2 rch ,1996. ls' k 7-,&-, R. LA STON. MOU :11: �r11 City of Lubbock Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates Craft Houriv Rate Acoustical Ceiling installer 10.00 11.00 Air Conditioner installer 5.508.00 Air Conditioner installer -Helper Asbestos Worker 11.00 Asbestos Supervisor 11.00 Bricklayer 6.00 Bricklayer -Helper 11.00 Carpenter 6.00 Carpenter -Helper 7.50 Cement Finisher 10.00 Drywall Hanger 13.00 Electrician 6.00 Electrician -Helper 8.50 Equipment Operator -Heavy 7.50 Equipment Operator -Light 8.50 Floor Installer 800 Glazier 9.00 Insulator-Pipinooiler 5.50 Insulator -Helper 800 Iron Worker 5.50 Laborer -General 5.50 Mortar Mixer 9.50 Painter 10.50 Plumber 6.00 Plumber -Helper 8.00 Roofer 5.50 Roofer -Helper 8.75 Sheet Metal Worker 5.50 Sheet Metal Worker -Helper 10.00 Welder -Certified 1 1 Paving and Highway Construction Prevailing Wage Rates Power Equipment Operators Asphalt Paving Machine 7.00 7.00 raft Houri,.y_l Concrete Paving Machine 6.50 6.00 700 Asphalt Heaterman 5.50 Light Equipment Operator Asphalt Shoveler 7.35 6.00 Concrete Finisher 5.75 Scraper Concrete Finisher -Helper Tractor 6.00 Truck Driver -Light 10.50 Truck Driver -Heavy Electrician 5.50 Fiagger 6.50 Form Setter 5.50 Form Setter -Helper 6.25 en Laborer -Geral Laborer -Utility 7.25 7.25 Mechanic 5.50 Mechanic -Helper Power Equipment Operators Asphalt Paving Machine 7.00 7.00 Bulldozer 700 Concrete Paving Machine 6.50 Front End Loader 700 Heavy Equipment Operator 6.50 Light Equipment Operator 8.50 Motor Grader Operator 6.00 Roller 6.50 Scraper 6.50 Tractor 6.00 Truck Driver -Light 6.50 Truck Driver -Heavy a:r1: Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) is 1 1/2 times base rate. EXEEEBTT D prevailing Wage Rates Weekend and Holiday Rate The rate for weekend and holiday is 1 112 times base rate. SPECIFICATIONS PROJECT MANUAL WATER UTILITIES OFFICE/SHOP ADDITION FOR MUNICIPAL HILL Lubbock, Texas City of Lubbock LUBBOCK , TEXAS MBA Architects, Inc. Architecture + Planning + Interiors 1919 Broadway Lubbock, Texas 79401 Set Number: PROJECT MANUAL TABLE CONTENTS PROJECT Water Utilities Office/Shop addition for Municipal Hill for the City of Lubbock Lubbock. Texas OWNER City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock. Texas 79457 806.775.3078 ARCHITECT MBA Architects, Inc. 1919 Broadway Lubbock. Texas 79401 806.763.5046 ENGINEERS Mechanical Engineer Leon Biddy. P.E. 309 E. Cash Iowa Park, TX 76367 940.851.9344 Electrical Engineer I-lulsdy Engineering Clint Hulsey. P.E. 300 Thomas Lane Lillian, Texas 76061 817.790.7740 Structural Engineer CL Engineering, Inc. Charlie Lusher, P.E. 3806 62ad Drive Lubbock. TX 79413 806.799.5378 DATE December 21, 1998 TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1 OF i DIVISION 7: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTEC71ON 07110 TABLE OF CONTENTS 07115 Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing The following is the enumeration of the Specifications, Drawings and Addenda which form a part of this Contract as set forth in "Contract Definitions" 07212 of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. 07213 Batt Insulation BOUND HEREIN Sound Attenuation Blanket Insulation Cover Sheet Table of Contents SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 0: BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS NUMBER OF PAGES 1� NOT USED DIVISION 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1010 Summary of Work 2 r 1019 Contract Considerations 1 1027 Applications for Payment 1 1028 Change order Procedures 2 1039 Coordination and Meetings 2 1090 Reference Standards 4 1300 Submittals 3 1310 Progress Schedules 2 1400 Quality Control 2 1500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 3 1560 Temporary Controls 1 1600 Material and Equipment 2 1650 Starting of Systems 2 1700 Contract Closeout 3 1710 Final Cleaning 1 1730 Operation and Maintenance Data 3 1740 Warranties and Bonds I DIVISION 2: SITEWORK 02072 Minor Demolition for Remodeling 2 02110 Site Clearing 2 02211 Rough Grading 2 02222 Excavation 2 02223 Backfilling 3 02225 Trenching 3 02231 Aggregate Base Course 2 02281 Termite Control 2 02510 Asphaltic Concrete Paving 3 02520 Portland Cement Concrete Paving 4 DIVISION 3: CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Formwork 4 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 2 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete 5 03370 Concrete Curing 2 DIVISION 4: MASONRY 04100 Mortar 3 04300 Concrete Unit Masonry 6 DIVISION 5: METALS 05120 Structural Steel 3 05210 Steel Joists 3 05500 Metal Fabrications 2 DIVISION 6: WOOD AND PLASTIC 06112 Miscellaneous Framing and Sheathing 2 06114 Wood Blocking and Curbing 2 06200 Finish Carpentry 3 064I0 Custom Casework 4 DIVISION 7: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTEC71ON 07110 Sheet Membrane Vapor Barrier 07115 Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing 07160 Bituminous Darnpproofmg 07212 Board Insulation 07213 Batt Insulation 07214 Sound Attenuation Blanket Insulation TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 2 07610 Standing Seam Roof 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07631 Gutters and Downspouts 07900 Caulking and Sealants DIVISION 8: DOORS AND WINDOWS 08111 Standard Steel Doors 08112 Standard Steel Frames 082I1 Flush Wood Doors 08360 Sectional Doors 08411 Aluminum Window Framing System 08710 Door Hardware 08800 Glazing DIVISION 9: FINISHES 09111 Metal Stud Framing System 09260 Gypsum Wallboard 09311 Ceramic Tile Finish 09312 Ceramic Tile Wall Finish 09511 Suspended Acoustical Tile Ceilings 09650 Rubber Base 09660 Resilient Tile Flooring 09900 Painting DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES I0105 Visual Display Boards 10160 Metal Toilet Compartments 10260 Corner and Wall Guards 10441 Signage 10522 Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets & Accessories 10800 Toilet Accessories DIVISION 11: EQUIPMENT TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 3 2 2 4 3 3 2 3 7 3 2 2 1 4 7 3 4 4 4 3 4 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 1 NOT USED DIVISION 12: FURNISHINGS 12512 Horizontal Lover Blinds DIVISION 13: SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13121 Pre -Engineered Buildings DIVISION 1.4: CONVEYING SYSTEMS NOT USED DIVISION 1S: MECHANICAL 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 15100 Valves 15145 Hangers and Supports 15170 Motors 15250 Mechanical Insulation 15330 Fire -Suppression Sprinklers 15411 Water Distribution Piping 15420 Drainage and Vent Piping 15430 Plumbing Specialties 1� 15440 Plumbing Fixtures 15462 Fuel -Fired Water Heaters �. 15496 Natural Gas Piping 15530 Refrigerant Piping 15575 Breechings, Chimneys and Stacks 15610 Furnaces 15620 Fuel -Fired Heaters 15671 Condensing Units 15815 Metal Ducts 15820 Duct Accessories 15853 Power Ventilators 15855 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 15990 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing DIVISION 16: ELECTRICAL 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements 16110 Raceways and Fittings 16123 Conductors 16130 Boxes and Fittings 16133 Cabinets and Enclosures TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 3 2 2 4 3 3 2 3 7 3 2 2 1 4 7 3 4 4 4 3 4 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 1 16141 Wiring Devices 2 16160 Panelboards 2 16170 Grounding and Bonding 2 16441 Enclosed Switches 1 16444 Fuses 2 16480 Motor Controls 1 16500 Lighting 2 16721 Fire Alarm and Detection System 4 16741 Telephone System 1 16902 Electrical Controls I BOUND SEPARATELY HEREIN: INDEX OF DRAWINGS Cover Sheet Drawing Section 1 1.1 Site Demolition Plan b ADDENDA: 1� END OF SPECIFICATIONS Drawing Section 2 2.1 Site Plan Drawing Section 3 3.1 Framing and Foundation Plans 3.2 Structural Details Drawing Section 4 4.1 Reference and Dimension Floor Plans Drawing Section 5 5.1 Exterior Elevations and Building Sections Drawing Section 7 7.1 Wall Sections 7,2 Wall Sections 7.3 Wall Sections and Details 7.4 Wall Section Details Drawing Section 8 8.1 Roof Plan and Details Drawing Section 9 9.1 Door and Window Schedules and Details Drawing Section 10 10.1 Enlarged Plan and Interior Elevations Drawing Section 11 11.1 Reflected Ceiling Plan Drawing Section 15 15.1 Plumbing Site Plan 15.2 Plumbing Plan 15.3 HVAC Plan Drawing Section 16 16.1 Power and Lighting Plans 16.2 Electrical Schedules and Details Number: Date Issued: Number: Date Issued: I END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 4 SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK FARTt GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project Scope. B. Referenced Specifications and Standards (Applicable Publications). C. Work by Owner. D. Contractor use of site and premises. E. Work Sequence. F. Owner occupancy. 1.02 PROJECT SCOPE A. All work shall be in confomnance with the drawings and specifications including the furnishing of all materials, labor, plant, tools, equipment, and services necessary and incidental thereto. The work required to be performed by the Contractor consists of, but is not limited to the following description: B. The project is for the City of Lubbock, Lubbock, Texas. The Work consists of minor demolition, minor remodeling, and new construction which intails precast concrete exterior panels, concrete slab on grade, steel stud and gypsum board interior partitions, built-up roofing, standing seam metal roofing, special glass, special structural elements, normal plumbing, HVAC, and electrical requirements for outpatient type services. This project is an expansion of the existing Water Utilities Shop. C. Referenced Specifications and Standards (Applicable Publications): D. The specifications and standards of issues listed in the beginning of each section, including the amendments, addenda and errata, but referred thereafter by basic designation only, form a part of these specifications and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herein in full text. Obtain copies of standards when required by Contract Documents. Maintain copy at job site during progress of specific work. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: The Owner's legal representative, solely authorized to make permanent and binding administrative or technical contract changes involving increases or decreases in contract cost or performance time, or to make interpretations or rulings on contract documents. 1.04 WORK BY OWNER A Items noted "NIC" (Not in Contract), moveable cabinets, furnishings, minor equipment and communications equipment will be furnished and installed by Owner atter construction is complete. 1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Access to Site: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. B. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. C. Time Restrictions for Performing Interior Work: Work shall be performed between 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. unless approved in writing by the Owner's Representative 72 hours in advance. D. Utility Outages and Shutdown: Coordinate work schedule in such a manner that there shall be only One utility outage during the course of the Project. All work requiring utility outages shall be performed during this One outage. The Owners Representative is to be notified Fourteen (14) days in advance of the outage and shall be given the time and length of proposed outage. Outage shall occur over a one weekend period. 1.06 WORK SEQUENCE A. Construct Work in phases, as required, to accommodate Owner's occupancy requirements during the construction period, coordinate construction schedule and operations with the Owner's Representative. 1.07 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. The Owner will occupy the entire premises during the entire period of construction for the conduct of normal operations. SUMMARY OF WORK SECTION 01010 - 1 B. Cooperate with Owner to enirei a conflict and to facilitate Government's operations. C. Schedule the Work to accommodate this requiremerit. 1 1.08 SECURITY A_ Comply with all appropriate security procedures identified by the Owner's Representative. PART PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION t SUMMARY OF WORK SECTION 01010 - 2 I r i '1t SECTION 01019 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Contingency allowance. B. Inspection and testing allowances. C. Schedule of Values. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01027 - Application For Payment. B. Section 01028 - Change Order Procedures. C. Section 01030 - Alternates. D. Section 01300 - Submittals: Schedule of Values. F. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Product substitutions and alternates. 1.03 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE A- Include in the Contract„ a stipulated sum/price of $ -0- for use upon Owner's instruction. B. Contractor's casts for products, delivery, installation, labor, insurance, payroll, taxes, bonding, equipment rental, overhead and profit will be included in Change Orders authorizing expenditure of funds from this Allowance. C. Funds will be drawn from Contingency Allowance only by Change Order. D. At closeout of Contract, funds remaining in Contingency Allowance will be credited to Owner by Change Order. 1.04 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit typed schedule on AIA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date of Owner—Contractor Agreer-tent or as established in a Notice to Proceed. C. Format: Utilize the Table ofContents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title ofthe major specification Section. Identify site mobilization, bonds and insurance. D. Include separately from each line item, a directly proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. E. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment- PART2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS SECTION 01019 - 1 SECTION 01027 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT END OF SECTION APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT SECTION 01027 - 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of Applications for Payment. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Owner/Contractor Agreement: Contract Sum/Price and time schedule for submittals. B. General Conditions: Progress Payments and Final Payment. C. 01028 - Change Order Procedures: Procedures for changes to the Work. D. Section 01019 - Contract Considerations: Contingency Allowance when applicable and Schedule of Values. E. Section 01300 - Submittals: Submittal procedures. F. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Final Payment. FORMAT 1.03 A. AIA G702 - Application and Certificate for Payment including continuation sheets when required. B. For each item, provide a column for listing: Item Number, Description of work; Scheduled Value, Previous Applications: Work in Place under this Application: Authorized Change Orders; Total Completed to Date of Application; Percentage of Completion; Balance to Finish; and Retainage. 1.04 PREPARATION OF APPLICATIONS A Present required information in typewritten form or on electronic media printout. B. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. C. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed D. List each authorized Change Order as an extension on continuation sheet, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of Work- orkE. E. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified in Section 01700. 1.05 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Submit three copies of each Application for Payment. B. Submit an updated construction schedule with each Application for Payment. C. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement. D. Submit under transmittal letter specified in Section 01300. 1.06 SUBSTANTIATING DATA A. When Architect/Engineer requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. iB. Provide one copy ofdata with cover letter for each copy ofsubtnittal. Show Application number and date, and line item by number and description. PART2 Not Used PRODUCTS PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT SECTION 01027 - 1 I I � I SECTION 01028 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittals. B. Documentation of change in Contract Sum/Prioe and Contract Time. C. Change procedures. D. Construction Change Authorization. E. Stipulated Sum change order. F. Time and material change order. G. Execution of change orders. H. Correlation of Contractor submittals. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Agreement Forms: Monetary values of established Unit Prices and percentage allowances for Contractors overhead and profit. B. General Conditions: Governing requirements for changes in the Work, in Contract Sum/Price, and Contract Time. C. Supplementary Conditions: Percentage allowances for Contractor's overhead and profit. D. Section 0 10 19 - Contract Considerations: Contingency allowance. E. Section 01019 - Contract Considerations: Schedule of Values. F. Section 01027 - Applications for Payment: Payment applications. G. Section 01300 - Submittals: Work schedule. H. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: product options and substitutions. J. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Project Record Documents. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A- Submit name of the individual authorized to receive change documents, and be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ or Subcontractors of changes to the Work. B. Change Order Forms: AIA G701 Change Order. 1.04 DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGE IN CONTRACT SUM/PRICE AND CONTRACT TIME A. Maintain detailed records ofwork done on a time and material basis. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs of changes in the Work. B. Document each quotation for a change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow evaluation of the quotation. C. On request, provide additional data to support computations: 1. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment. 2. Taxes, insurance and bonds. 3. Overhead and profit 4. Justification for any change in Contract Time. 5. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented. D. Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on a time and material basis, with additional information: 1. Origin and date of claim. 2. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. 3. Time records and wage rates paid 4. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented. 1.05 CHANGE PROCEDURES A. The Architect/Engineer will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum(Price or Contract Time as authorized by the General Conditions by issuing supplemental instructions on AIA Form G710. CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES SECTION 01028 - 1 1.06 1.07 1.08 1.04 1.10 Im 1.12 PART 2 PART 3 B. The ArchitectiEngineer may issue a Proposal Request which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change Contractor will prepare and submit an estimate within seven days. C. The Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to the Architect/Engineer, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time with full documentation Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01600. CONSTRUCTION CHANGE AUTHORIZATION A. Architect/Engineer may issue a document, signed by the Owner, instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. B. The document will describe changes in the Work, and will designate method ofdetermining any change in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time. C. Promptly execute the change in Work. STIPULATED SUM CHANGE ORDER A Based on Proposal Request and Contractor's fixed price quotation. UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER A For pre -determined unit prices and quantities, the Change Order will be executed on a fixed unit price basis. B. For unit costs or quantities of units of work which are not pre -determined, execute Work under a Construction Change Authorization. C. Changes in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time will be computed as specified for Time and Material Change Order. TIME AND MATERIAL CHANGE ORDER A. Submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. B. Architect/Engineer will determine the change allowable in Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents. C. Maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material basis. D. Provide full information required for evaluation ofproposed changes, and to substantiate costs for changes in the Work. EXECUTION OF CHANGE ORDERS A. Execution of Change Orders: Architect/Engineer will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions ofthe Contract. CORRELATION OF CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment fortes to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum/Price. B. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub schedules to adjust time for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit C. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. MARK-UP LIMITATION A. Contractor's mark-up for Overhead and Profit shall be limited to the allowables described in Article 7 - Changes In The Work.. PRODUCTS Not Used EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES SECTION 01028 - 2 SECTION 01039 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Coordination B. Preconstruction conference. C. Site mobilization conference. D. Progress meetings. E. Pre -installation conferences. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A Section 01045 - Cutting and Patching. 1.03 COORDINATION A Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Sections of specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Verify that utility requirement characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to and placing in service, such equipment. C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. D. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. E. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion and for portions of Work designated for Owner's partial occupancy. F. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. 1.04 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. ArchitoWEngineer will schedule a conference after Notice of Award. B. Attendance Required: Architect/Engmeer, Owner's Representative, User and Contractor. C. Agenda I. Execution of Owner -Contractor Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products, Schedule of Values, and progress schedule. 5. Designation of personnel representing the parties in ContracL 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, maintaining record documents, testing, and Contract closeout procedures. D. Scheduling 1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. 2. Owner's requirements and partial occupancy. 3. Construction facilities and controls provided by Contractor. 4. Temporary utilities provided by Contractor. 5. Security and housekeeping procedures. 1.05 SITE MOBILIZATION CONFERENCE A. Architect/Engineer will schedule a conference at the Project site prior to Contractor beginning work- B. orkB. Attendance required: Archited/Engineer, Owner's Representative, Contractor, Contractors Superintendent and major Subcontractors. C. Agenda: � I ICOORDINATION AND MEETINGS SECTION 01039 - 1 1.06 I1t7N D. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. E. Owner's requirements and partial occupancy. F. Constrtrction facilities and controls provided by Contractor. G. Temporary utilities provided by Contractor. H. Survey and building layout. I. Security and housekeeping procedures. J. Schedules. K Procedures for testing. L. Procedures for maintaining record documents. M. Requirements for start-up of equipment. N. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum bi-montlily intervals. B. Contractor is to make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings, record minutes and distribute copies within two days to Owner's Representative and Architect/Engineer, participants and those effected by decisions made. C. Attendance required: Job Superintendent, major Subcontractors and ArchitectfEngineer as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. S. Review of submittals, schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance and progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period L0. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business related to work- PRF-INSTALLATION orkPRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES A. When required in individual specification Section, the Contractor shall convene a pre -installation conference at work site prior to commencing work of the Section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific Section. C. Notify Architect/Engineer Officer four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda, preside at conference, record minutes, and distribute copies within two days after conference to participants, with two copies to the Architect/Engineer. E. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures, and coordination with related work PART 2 Not Used PART 3 Not Used PRODUCTS EXECUTION END OF SECTION COORDINATION AND MEETINGS SECTION 01039 - 2 SECTION 01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality assurance. B. Schedule of references. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Technical Sections: This Project Manual. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Forproducts or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal Standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable cozies. B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents unless other dates specified in individual sections. C. Obtain copies of standards when required by Contract Documents. D. Where indicated in various sections, maintain copy at jobsite during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion. E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Contracting Officer before proceeding. F. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document 1.04 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES AA Aluminum Association 818 Connecticut Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20006 AABC Associated Air Balance Council 1000 Vermont Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20005 ACI American Concrete Institute Box 19150 Reford Station Detroit, MI 48219 ADC Air Diffusion Council 230 North Michigan Avenue Chicago, IL 60601 AGC Associated General Contractors of America 1957 E Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20006 AIA American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20006 AISC American institute of Steel Construction 400 North Michigan Avenue Eighth Floor Chicago, IL 60611. AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 1000 16th Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 REFERENCE STANDARDS SECTION 01090 - 1 RITC American Institute of Timber Construdion 333 W. Hampden Avenue Englewood, CO 80110 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association 30 West University Drive Arlington Heights, IL 60004 ANSI American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018 APA American Plywood Association Boz 11700 Tacoma, WA 98411 ARI Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 1501 Wilson Boulevard Arlington, VA 22209 ASHRAE American Society of Beating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers 1791 Tullie Circle, N.E. Atlanta, GA 30329 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 ASPA American Sod Producers Association 4415 West Harrison Street Hillside, IL 60162 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race Street Philadelphia, PA 19103 AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 2310 South Walter Reed Drive Arlington, VA 22206 AWPA American wood -Preservers' Association 7735 Old Georgetown Road Bethesda, MD 20014 AWS American Welding Society 550 Lejeune Road, N.W. Miami, FL 33135 AWWA American Water Works Association 6666 West Quincy Avenue Denver, CO 80235 BIA Brick Institute of America 11490 Commerce Park Drive Reston, VA 22091 CDA Copper Development Association 57th Floor, Chrysler Building_ 405 Lexington Avenue New York, NY 10174 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 Plum Grove Road Schaumburg, IL 60195 DHI Door and Hardware Institute 7711 Old Springhouse Road McLean, VA 22102 REFERENCE STANDARDS SECTION 01090 - 2 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association 25 North Broadway Tarrytown, NY 1059] FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association 3310 Harrison White Lakes Professional Building Topeka, KS 66611 FM Factory Mutual System 1151 Boston—Providence Turnpike P.O. Box 688 Norwood, MA 02062 FS Federal Specification General Services Administration Specifications and Consumer Information Distribution Section (WFSIS) Washington Navy Yard, Bldg. 197 Washington, DC 20407 GA Gypsum Association 1603 Orrington Avenue Evanston, IL 60201 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 IMIAC International Masonry Industry All-WeatherCouncil International Masonry Institute 815 15th Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20005 MIL Military Specification Naval Publications and Forms Center 5801 Tabor Avenue Philadelphia, PA 19120 MLISFA Metal I.athlSteel Framing Association 221 North LaSalle Stmt: Chicago, IL 60601 NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association P.O. Box 781 Herndon, VA 22070 NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau 8224 Old Courthouse Road Vienna, VA 22180 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers" Association 2 101 Z' Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20037 NFPA National Fire Protection Association Battery March Park Quincy, MA 02269 NFPA National Forest Products Association 1619 Massachusetts Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Association 205 W. Touhy Avenue Park Ridge, IL 60068 PCA Portland Cement Association 5420 Old Orchard Road Skokie, IL 60077 REFERENCE STANDARDS SECTION 01090 - 3 PS Product Standard U. S. Department of Commerce Washington, DC 20203 SDI Steel Door Institute 712 Lakewood Center North 14600 Detroit Avenue Cleveland, OH 44107 SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association 111 East Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60601 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association 8224 Old Court House Road Vienna, VA 22180 TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. Box 326 Princeton, N7 08540 UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingston Road Northbrook, IL 60062 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau 6980 S.W. Varus Road Box 23145 Portland, OR 97223 W WPA Western Wood Products Association 1500 Yeon Building Portland, OR 97204 PART PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION REFERENCE STANDARDS SECTION 01090 - 4 SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PARTI. GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittal procedures. B. Construction progress schedules. C. Proposed products list. D. Shop drawings.. E. Product data. F. Samples. G. Manufacturers' instructions. H. Manufacturers" certificates. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01010 — Summary of Work. B. Section 01400 — Quality Control: Manufacturers' field services and reports. C. Section 01700 — Contract Closeout: Contract vra anty, manufacturers certificates and closeout submittals. 1.03 SUBMITTAL. PROCEDURES A. Transmit each submittal as follows: Identify Project, Contractor, Sub -contractor and major supplier. Identify pertinent drawing sheet and detail number and specification section. B. Unless otherwise directed in Technical Sections, or by the Architect -Engineer, deliver submittals to the Architect/Engineer at 1919 Broadway, Lubbock, Texas 79401, at the Pre -construction Conference or as promptly after the conference as possible. C. After Architect/Engineer's review of Submittals, revise and resubmit as required, identifying changes made since last submittal. D. Sequentially number the transmittal forms. Resubmittals to have original number with an alphabetic suffix. E. Apply Contractors stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. F. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which maybe detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. G. Provide space for Contractor and Architect/Engineers review stamps. 1.04 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST A. Within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit complete list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards. 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit in the form of one reproducible transparency and two blueline reproductions. 1.06 PRODUCT DATA A. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project B. Submit three (3) copies which will be retained by the Architect/Engineer. 1.07 SAMPLES SUBMITTALS SECTION 01300 - 1 1.08 1.09 1.10 A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work B. Submit samples offmishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors, textures, and patterns for Architect/Engineer's selection. C. include identification on each sample, with full Project information. D. Submit the number or samples specified in individual specification Sections; one ofwhich will be retained bythe Archited/Engineer. E. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in individual specification Sections. MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers' printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start—up, adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents. MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. Whenspecified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers! certificateto ArchitecIVErigineer for review, inquantities specified for Product Data. B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference date, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. SUBMITTALS REQUIRED A. Section 01045 - Cutting and Patching 1. Cutting Requests. B. Section 02050 - Demolition 1. Salvage and Demolition Procedures. C. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry 1. Samples D. Section 072 t2 - Board Insulation 1. Product Data. 2. Manufacturer's Certificate, 3. Sample. E. Section 07600 - Sheet Metalwork, General 1. Shop Drawings. 2. Manufacturer's Certificate. F. Section 07920 - Caulking and Sealants 1. Product Data, 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions, 3. Samples. 4. Certificate of Compliance. G. Section 08110 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames 1. Product Data. 2. Manufacturer's Certificate. 3. Shop Drawings. H. Section 08201 - Wood Doors 1. Product Data - 2. Manufacturer's Certificate. 3, Shop Drawings, I. Section 08700 - Door Hardware 1. Product Data. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Certificate of Compliance. 4. Hardware Schedule, 5. Keying Schedule. 6. Spare Parts Data. 7. Maintenance instructions. SUBMITTALS SECTION 01300 - 2 J. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems 1. Product Data. 2. Product Certificate. 3. Detail Drawings. K. Section 09682 - Carpet 1. Product Data. 2. Manufacturer's Certificate. 3. Samples. 4. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions 5. Maintenance Instructions. L. Section 09900 - Painting 1. Product Data 2. Paint and/or Slain Samples. 3. Certificate of Lead Compliance. 4. Paint Schedule M. Section 10440 - Signs 1. Product Data. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Samples. 4. Shop Drawings. N. Section 10522 - Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Accessories 1. Product Data. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Manufacturer's Certificate. O. Section 15250 - Thermal Insulation For Mechanical Systems. 1. Shop Drawings. 2. Display Sample Cut Away Sections. P. Section 15051 - Sprinkler System & Fire Protection 1. Shop Drawings.. 2. Product Data. 3. Operating Instructions. 4. Maintenance Instructions. 5. Testing Data. 6. Performance Test Reports. 7. Manufacturer's Certificates. 8. Manufacturers installation instructions. Q. Section 15805 - Air Supply & Distribution System 1. Product Data. 2. Product Descriptions. 3. Shop Drawings. 4. Operating Instructions. 5. Maintenance Instructions. 6. Spare Parts Data. 7. Performance Test Reports. R. Section 16415 - Electrical Work: Interior 1. Catalog Cuts. 1 Manufacturer's Technical information. 3. Shop Drawings. 1.11 SPECIAL NOTE - COMMENCEMENT OF WORK A. No Work in any Technical Section shall be commenced until all related submittals are approved by the Architect/Engineer. PART PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used 11 END OF SECTION ISUBMITTALS SECTION 01300 - 3 SECTION 01310 PROGRESS SCHEDULES IPROGRESS SCHEDULES SECTION 01310 - 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Format. B. Content. C. Revisions to schedules. D. Submittals. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A Section 01010 - Summary of Work 01011 - Summary of Project: Work sequence. B. Section 01019 - Contract Considerations: Schedule of Values. C. Section 01019 - Contract Considerations - Applications for Payment: Application for payment. D. Section 01300 - Submittals: Shop drawings, product data, and samples. 1.03 FORMAT A Prepare network analysis system using the critical path method, as outlined in The Associated General Contractors of America (AGC) publication "The Use of CPM in Construction - A Manual for General Contractors". B. Sequence of Listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of Work- orkC. C. Scale and Spacing: To provide space for notations and revisions. D. Sheet Size: Minimum 22 x 17 inches and/or Multiples of 8-112 x 11 inches. 1.04 CONTENT A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction. B. Identify each item by specification Section number. C. Identify work of separate stages and/or separate floors and other logically grouped activities. D. Provide sub -schedules for each stage of Work identified in Section 0 10 10. E. Provide sub -schedules to define critical portions of the entire Schedule. F. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of Work completed, as of the fust day of each month- onthProvide Provideseparate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and samples, including Owner furnished products and Products identified under Allowances, if any, and dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect/Engmeer. Indicate decision data for selection of finishes. H. Indicate delivery dates for Owner furnished products and Products identified under Allowances, if any. I. Coordinate content with Schedule of Values specified in Section 0 10 19, 1.05 REVISIONS TO SCHEDULES A Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal, and projected completion date of each activity. 1 B. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope, and other identifiable changes. C. Provide narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on Schedule. Report corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect including the effect of changes on schedules of separate contractors. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A Submit preliminary outline Schedules within 15 days after date of Owner -Contractor Agreement or as established by a Notice to 1 IPROGRESS SCHEDULES SECTION 01310 - 1 Proceed for coordination with Owner's requirements and/or work of separate contracts. After review, submit detailed Schedules within 15 days, modified to accommodate revisions recommended by Architect: Engineer. B. Submit revised Progress Schedules with each Application for Payment. C. Submit the number of opaque reproductions which Contractor requires, plus two copies which will be retained by Architect/Engineer. 1.07 DISTRIBUTION A- Distribute copies of reviewed Schedules to project site file, Subcontractors, suppliers, and other concerned parties. B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections indicated in Schedules. PART PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES SECTION 01310 - 2 I a SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality assurance and control of installation. B. References. C. Field samples. D. Mock—up E. Inspection and testing laboratory services. F. Manufacturers' field services and reports. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01090 — Reference Standards. B. Section 01300 — Submittals: Submission of Manufacturers' Instructions and Certificates. C. Section 01600 — Material and Equipment: Requirements for material and product quality. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, Products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. Persons shall have a minimum of three years experience. F. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfiguremcnt 1.04 REFERENCES A, Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, unless other dates specified in individual sections. B. Obtain copies of standards when required by Contract Documents. C. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Arcbiteet/Engineer before proceeding. D. The contractual relationship ofthe parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.05 FIELD SAMPLES A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifications Sections for review. B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work. C. Where field sample is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area after field sample has been accepted by Architecl/Engineer. 1.06 MOCK—UP A. Tests as required by individual sections will be performed under provisions identified in this section. B. Assemble and erect specified items, with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. QUALITY CONTROL SECTION 1400 - 1 C. Where mock-up is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area after mock-up has been accepted by Architect/Engineer. 1.07 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES A. Contractor shall pay for services of an independent firm to perform inspection and testing. B. The independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and other services specified in individual specification Sections and as required by the Architect/Engineer. C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Architect/Engineer, in triplicate, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. D. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage and assistance as requested. E. Notify Architect/Engineer and independent firm 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. F. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's use. G. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same independent firm on instructions by the Architect/Engineer. Payment for retesting will be paid by the Contractor. 1.08 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS A. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect/Engineer 30 days in advance ofrequired observations. Observer subject to approval of Contracting Officer. B. When specked in individual specification Sections, require material or Product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality ofworkmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary, C. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. D. Submit report in triplicate within 30 days ofobservation to ArchitecVEngineer for review. PART PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION QUALITY CONTROL SECTION 1400 - 2 SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, telephone service, water, and sanitary facilities. B. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures and fencing, protection ofthe Work, and water control. C. Construction Facilities: Parking, progress cleaning and temporary buildings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01560 — Temporary Controls. B. Section 01700 — Contract Closeout: Final cleaning. 1.03 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Connect to existing power service. All electricity required for the Work in this Contract will be made available to the Contractor at no charge. Power consumption shall not disrupt Owner's need for continuous service.. B. Power Outage: If a power outage is anticipated for this project. Contractor shall coordinate this outage with the Owner's Representative as stated elsewhere in these Specifications. Power outage shall occur over one weekend period only. If needed, the Contractor shall make all necessary connections required to obtain power during this outage. C. Contractor shall at his own expense, and in a manner acceptable to the Architect(Engineer, install and maintain any connections necessaryto utilize utilities. This includes Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) plugs and any other appurtenances necessary to complete the Work Connections shall be left at the end of construction in the same condition as at the beginning. D. In return for free use of electricity, Contractor agrees to insure that all electricity is carefully conserved. 1.04 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level required by OSHA- SHAB. B. Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq ft lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after dark for security purposes. C. Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq ft lighting to interior work areas after dark for security purposes. D. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. E. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. 1.05 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide and pay for heat devices and heat as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. B. Maintain miniruum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications. 1.06 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. B. Extend and supplement equipment with temporary fan units as required to maintain clean air for construction operations. C. Protect non -construction areas from fumes and odor of curing materials, construction dust, and vapors. 1.07 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Connect to existing water source for construction operations. B. Contractor will pay cost of water used. Exercise measures to conserve water. C. Provide accessible potable water for drinking purposes at the job site. 1.08 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES &c TEMPORARY CONTROLS SECTION 01500 - 1 A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Existing facilities shall not be used 1.09 BARRIERS A Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B. Provide protection for plant life designated to remain. Replace damaged plant life. C. Protect non—owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structures from damage. 1.10 FENCING A. Construction; Commercial grade chain link fence. B. Provide 6 foot high fence around storage site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks as needed. 1.11 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary weather -tight closure of exterior openings as required to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification Sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self—closing hardware and locks. L12 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as required to separate work areas from Owner occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. B. Construction. Framing and plywood sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces; insulated to R 19; STC rating of 35 in accordance with ASTM E90; maximum Flame Spread Rating of 75 in accordance with ASTM E84. C. Paint surfaces exposed to view from {honer occupied areas. 1.13 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification Sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits ofopenings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from tragic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement ofheavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Prohibit traffic Isom landscaped areas. 1.14 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities as required to protect Work, and existing facilities, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft_ B. Coordinate with Owner's security program. 1.15 ACCESS ROADS A. Designated existing on—site roads may be used for construction traffic. 1.16 PARKING A. Limited parking shall be made available to the Contractor and workers at the project site. 1.17 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site periodically and dispose off—site. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROLS SECTION 01500 - 2 1.18 PART 2 PART 3 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS A. Office: Verify requirements of field offices and sheds with the Archited/Engineer prior to beginningthe Work. When required, field office shall be weathertight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling and ventilating equipment, and equipped with shady furniture drawing rack and drawing display table. 13. Locate offices and sheds a minimum distance of 30 feet from existing structures. PRODUCTS Not Used Not Used EXECUTION END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROLS SECTION 01500 - 3 SECTION 01560 TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Dust Control. B. Erosion and Sediment Control. C. Noise Control. D. Pollution Control. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A Section 01010 — Summary of Work. B. Section 01039 — Coordination and Meetings. C. Section 01500 — Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Constmclion cleaning: Traffic regulation. L03 DUST CONTROL A. Execute Work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. B. Provide positive means to prevent air—borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere. C. Limit dust infiltration as needed to protect the office equipment (computers, etc.) within the building. 1.04 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL A. Plan and execute construction by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation. B. Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at one time. C. Limit amount of sod removal to that required for placing concrete foundations/footings, conduit and piping and to prevent unnecessary erosion of topsoil. 1.05 NOISE CONTROL A Plan and execute construction by methods which control noise levels. B. Noise levels shall not exceed those recommended by OSHA for occupied areas during construction. 1.06 POLLUTION CONTROL A Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. PART2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION TEMPORARY CONTROLS SECTION 01560 - 1 SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A_ Products. B. Transportation and handling. C. Storage and protection. D. Product options. E. Substitutions. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A, Instructions to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures. B. Section 01300 - Submittals: Submittal procedures C. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Product quality monitoring. 1.03 PRODUCTS A. Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the 'Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation., fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. B. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents. C. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components. 1.04 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 1.05 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A_ Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather—tight, climate controlled enclosures. B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground. C. Provide off—site storage and protection when site does not permit on—site storage or protection. D. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation. E. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well rained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. F. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. G. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions. 1.06 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specked by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 0 t600 - 1 1.0'7 PART 2 PART 3 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The Architect will consider requests for Substitutions only within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. B. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault ofthe Contractor. C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution with Contract Documents. D. A request constitutes a representation that the Bidder: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may he required forthe Work to be complete with no additional cost to the Owner. E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, WITHOUT SEPARATE WRITTEN REQUEST, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. F. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit three (3) copies ofrequest for Substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed Substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. 3. The Architect/Engineer will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject request. PRODUCTS Not Used EXECUTION Not used END OF SECTION MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 01600 - 2 SECTION 01650 STARTING OF SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL Lot 1 SECTION INCLUDES A Starting systems. B. Demonstration and instructions. C. Testing, adjusting, and balancing. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturers field reports. B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: System operation and maintenance data and extra materials. 1.03 STARTING SYSTEMS A Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Architect/Engineer seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verifythat each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage. D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible manufacturer's representative or Contractors' personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01400 that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 1.04 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owners personnel two weeks prior to date of Substantial Completion. B. Demonstrate Project equipment and Instruct in a classroom environment located at the Site and instructed by a qualified manufacturers' representative who is knowledgeable about the Project. C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months. D. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with tuners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. E. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled times, at equipment location F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. G. The amount of time required for instruction on each item of equipment and system is that specified in individual sections. 1.05 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING A Owner will appoint and employ services of an independent firm to perform testing, adjusting and balancing. Contractor shall pay for services. B. The independent firm will perform services as required to teat and balance systems, STARTING OF SYSTEMS SECTION 01650 - 1 C Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Architect/Erigineer indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with specified requirements and with the requirements of the Contract Documents. PART PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION STARTING OF SYSTEMS SECTION 01650 - 2 SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Closeout procedures. B. Final cleaning. C. Adjusting. D. Project record documents. E. Operation and maintenance data. F. Warranties. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SECTION 1700 -1 G. Spare parts and maintenance materials. L02 RELATED SECTIONS A_ Section 01500 — Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Progress cleaning. B. Section 0 1650 — Starting of Systems: System start—up, testing, adjusting, and balancing. C. Section 01730 — Operation and Maintenance Data. D. Section 01740 — Warranties and Bonds. 1.03 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for ArchitectfEngineer's inspection. B. Provide submittals to Architect/Engineer that are required by governing or other authorities. C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. 1.04 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. B. Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition D. Clean permanent type filters and replace disposable type filters of operating equipment. E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site. 1.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site, one set ofthe following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: I. Contract Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SECTION 1700 -1 1.07 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. C. Record information concurrent with construction progress. D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturces name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications. E. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations ofunderground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract Drawings. F. Delete Architecangineer title block and seal fi-orn all documents. G. Submit documents to Architect/Engineer with claim for final Application for Payment. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit two sets prior to final inspection, bound in 8-1l2 x I I inch text pages, three D side ring capacity expansion binders with durable plastic covers. B. Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. C. internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. D. Contents: Prepare a Table ofContents for each volume, with each Product or system description identified, type on 24 pound white paper. E. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of ArchitediEngineer, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. F. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: 1. Significant design criteria, 2. List of equipment. 3. Parts list for each component. 4. Operating instructions. 5. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 6. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. G. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: I. Shop drawings and product data. 2. Air and water balance reports. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SECTION 1700 - 2 3. Certificates. 4. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. H. Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be returned after final inspection, with Architect/Engineer oomments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal. 1. Submit final volumes revised, within ten days after final inspection_ 1.08 WARRANTIES A. Provide duplicate notarized copies. B. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in three D side ring binder with durable plastic cover. D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. 1.09 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification Sections. B. Deliver to Project site and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment 1.10 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A At final inspection, Contractor shall provide a red-marked set of blue line drawings in accordance with the latest as-built conditions. PART PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 EXECUTION Not used END OF SECTION CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SECTION 1700 - 3 SECTION 01710 FILIAL CLEANING PART] GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Final cleaning. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Progress cleaning. 1.03 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. B. Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. D. Replace filters of operating equipment E. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. F. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site. PART2 PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 EXECUTION Not used END OF SECTION FINAL CLEANING SECTION 01710 -1 L-1 SECTION 0 173 0 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Format and content of manuals. B. Instruction of Owner's personnel. C. Schedule ofsubmittals. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturer's instructions. C. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Test and balance reports. D. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Systems demonstration. E. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Contract Closeout Procedures and Project Record Documents. F. Section 01740 - Warranties and Bonds. G. Individual Specifications Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. 1.04 FORMAT A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. B. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 x 11 inch three-ring binders with hardback, cleanable, plastic covers; one inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. C. Cover: Identify each binderwith typed orprinted title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; listtitle of'Project and separate building, identify subject matter of contents. D, Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project Manual. E. Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 20 pound paper. G. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. 1.05 CONTENTS, EACH VOLUME A. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect(Engineer, subconsultants, and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume. B. For Each Product or System: Ilk names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source ofsupplies and replacement parts. C. Product Data: [Nark each sheetto clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicableto installation. Delete inapplicable information. D. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. E. Type Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions specified in Section 01400. F. Warranties and Bonds: As specified in Section 01740. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SECTION 01730 - 1 1.06 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. Provide information for re -ordering custom manufactured products. B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products: Include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and detaits of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair. D. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification Sections. E, Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data. 1.07 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of unit or system, and component parts. Identify fiuution, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. B. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls and communications. C. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed. D. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. E. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for trouble -shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. G. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. if. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. 1. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. J. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. K. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams as installed. L. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. M. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. N. Include test and balancing reports as specified in Section 01400. O. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification Sections. P. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data. 1.08 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER PERSONNEL A Before final inspection, instruct Owner's designated personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems, at agreed upon times. B. For equipment requiring seasonal operation, perform instructions for other seasons within six months. C. Use operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. D. Prepare and insert additional data in Operation and Maintenance Manual when need for such data becomes apparent during instruction. 1,09 SUBMITTALS A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect/Engineer will review draft and return one copy with comments. B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SECTION 01730 - 2 C. Submit one copy of oompleted volumes in fiinal form 15 days prior to final inspection. Copy will be returned after final inspection, with ArclidectfEngincer comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal. D. Submit two copies of revised volumes of data in final form within ten days after final inspection. 1.10 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS A- Section 01300 - Submittals. PART PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SECTION 01730 - 3 SECTION 01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS I r - END OF SECTION WARRANTIES AND BONDS SECTION 01740 1 PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Preparation and submittal. B. Time and schedule of submittals. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A Section 00100 - Invitation to Bid and Document AIA A701 - Instructions to Bidders: Bid Bonds. B. Document AIA A201 - General Conditions: Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bonds, Warranty, and Correction of Work - C. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Contract closeout procedures. D. Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data. E. Individual Specifications Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A Bind in commercial quality, 8-1/2 x 11 inch three-ring side binders with hardback, cleanable, plastic covers. B. Label cover of each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier, and name of responsible principal. C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification Section in which specified, and the name of the product or work item. D. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal. 1.04 PREPARATION OF SUBMITTALS A Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item or work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial Completion is determined. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co -execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. 1.05 TIME OF A SUBMITTALS For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. B. Make other submittals within ten days after Dale of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. C. For items of Work when acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within ten days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. 1.06 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS A Section 01300 - Submittals. PART2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION P Not Used I r - END OF SECTION WARRANTIES AND BONDS SECTION 01740 1 ,«r SECTION 02072 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Removal of designated building equipment and fixtures. B. Removal of designated construction. C. Identification of utilities. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01010 -Summary of Work: Work sequence and Owner's continued occupancy. B. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings C. Section 01120 - Alternation Project Procedures: Re -installation of removed and stored equipment and materials. D. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Temporary enclosures, Security at Owner occupied areas and cleanup during construction. E. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Project record documents. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate demolition and removal sequence and location of salvageable items; location and construction of temporary work. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate areas for demolition, removal sequence and location of salvageable items. 1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities, and subsurface obstructions. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for demolition work, safety of structure, and dust control. B. Obtain required permits from authorities. C, Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. D. Do not close or obstruct egress width to exits. E. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without 7 day prior written notice to the Owner. F. Conform to procedures applicable when discovering hazardous or contaminated materials. 1.06 SEQUENCING A. Sequence work under the provisions of Section 01010. 1.07 SCHEDULING A. Schedule work under the provisions of Section 01300. B. Schedule Work to coincide with renovation. C. Describe demolition removal procedures and schedule. D. Schedule any Masonry Demolition to coincide with laying of New Masonry and/or laying of Infill Masonry. E. Perform the Work between the hours of 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING SECTION 02072 - 1 PART PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers at locations as required. B. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings. C. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odors and noise to permit continued Owner occupancy, as specified in Section 01010. D. Protect existing materials and which are not to be demolished. E. Prevent movement of structure; provide required bracing and shoring. F. Mark location of utilities. 3.02 DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas. B. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger. Notify Architect/Engineer. Do not resume operations until directed. C. Maintain protected egress and access to the Work. 3.03 DEMOLITION A. Disconnect and cap and identify designated utilities within demolition areas. B. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting structural members. C. Except where noted otherwise, remove demolished materials from site. Do not burn or bury materials on site. D. Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses. Upon completion of work, leave areas in clean condition. E. Remove temporary Work. F. Any existing masonry to be demolished, any new opening(s) to be cut into existing masonry construction, or any existing opening(s) to be infilled with new masonry shall be "toothed in " as required to maintain the joint appearance of the existing/new masonry. 3.04 SCHEDULES A. Verify Owner requirements for removal, storing and protecting salvageable materials and equipment. B. Verify Owner requirements for retainage of materials and equipment. C. Verify Owner requirements for Owner removal and retainage of any material and equipment. D. Protect all existing materials and equipment. END OF SECTION , MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING SECTION 02072 - 2 1 PART 1 1.01 WIN 1.03 PART 2 PART 3 3.01 3.02 3.03 3.04 3.05 SECTION 02110 SITE CLEARING GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A Remove surface debris. B. Remove paving, curbs, and Pre -cast walls C. Clear site of plant life and grass. D. Remove tress and shrubs. E. Remove root system of trees and shrubs. F. Topsoil excavation. RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01019 - Contract Considerations: Requirements applicable to unit prices for the worst of this Section. B. Section 02072 - Minor Demolition for Remodeling. C. Section 02211 - Rough Grading, REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for disposal of debris, use of herbicides and pesticides. B. Coordinate clearing Work with utility companies. PRODUCTS Not Used. EXECUTION PREPARATION A. Verify that existing plant life designated to remain, is tagged or identified. PROTECTION A. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain, from damage. B. Protect trees, plana growth, and features designated to remain, as final landscaping. C. Protect bench marks and existing structures from damage or displacement. CLEARING A. Clear areas required for access to site and execution of Work. B. Remove paving, curbs, and Pre -cast walls as indicated. C. Remove trees and shrubs within new paving areas. Remove stumps, main root ball, root system to a depth of 24 inches. D. Clear undergrowth and deadwood, without disturbing subsoil. E. Apply herbicide to remaining stumps to inhibit growth. REMOVAL A. Remove debris, rock, and extracted plant life from site. TOPSOIL EXCAVATION A. Excavate topsoil from areas to be paved. SITE CLEARING SECTION 02110 - x B. Remove excess topsoil not being reuscd, from site. C. Do not excavate wet topsoil. END OF SECTION SITE CLEARING SECTION 02110 - 2 PART I 1.01 1.02 1.03 [T 1,05 PART 2 2.01 PART 3 3.01 3.02 SECTION 02211 ROUGH GRADING GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. Removal of topsoil and subsoil. B. Cutting, grading, filling and rough contouring the site. RELATED SECTIONS tl Document 00200 - Information Available to Bidders: Soil investigation report; bore hole locations and findings of subsurface materials. B. Section 01400 - Quality Contmi: Testing fill compaction. C. Section 02110 - Site Clearing, D. Section 02222 - Excavation: Building excavation. E. Section 02223 - Backfilling: General building area backfilling. REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM 1>698 - Test Methods for Moisture -Density Relations of Soils and Soil -Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5 Ib Rammer and 12 inch Drop. B. ANSI/ASTM D1556 - Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand -Cone Method. C. ANSUASTM D1557 - Test Methods for Moisture -Density Rclations of Soils and Soil -Aggregate Mixtures Using 10 lb Rammer and 18 inch Drop. SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Samples: Submit 10 lb. sample of each type of fill to testing laboratory, in air -tight containers. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Accurately record actual locations of utilities remaining, by horizontal dimensions, elevations or inverts, and slope gradients. PRODUCTS MATERIALS A_ Topsoil: Excavated material, graded, free of roots, rocks larger than I inch, subsoil, debris, and large weeds. B. Subsoil: Excavated material, graded, free of lumps larger than 6 inches, rocks larger than 3 inches, and debris. C. Granular Fill: Type B specified in Section 02223 - Backfilling. EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that survey benchmark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. B. Identify known underground, above ground, and aerial utilities. Stake and flag locations. C. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities as required. ROUGH GRADING SECTION 02211 -1 D. Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain. E. Protect plant life, lawns, rock outcroppings and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping. F. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavation equipment and vehicular traffic. 3.03 TOPSOIL EXCAVATION A. Excavate topsoil from areas to be further excavated, re -landscaped, or re -graded as required. B- Stockpile in area designated on site. Remove excess topsoil not being reused, from site. C. Do not excavate wet topsoil. D. Stockpile topsoil to depth not exceeding 8 feet. 3.04 SUBSOIL EXCAVATION A. Excavate subsoil from areas to be further excavated, rc-landscaped, or re -graded as required. B. Stockpile in area designated on site. Remove excess subsoil not being reused, from site. C. Do not excavate wet subsoil. D. Stockpile subsoil to depth not exceeding 8 feet. E. When excavation through roots is necessary, perform work by hand and cut roots with sharp axe. 3.05 FILLING A. Fill areas to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials. B. GranularFill: Place and compact materials in continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches compacted depth, compacted to 95 percent. C. Subsoil and Topsoil Fill: Place and compact material in continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches compacted depth, compacted to 95 percent - D. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. E. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 f , unless noted otherwise. F. Make grade changes gradual. Blend slope into level areas. G. Remove surplus fill materials from site. 3.06 TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of Subgrade: Plus or minus 1110 foot. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. B. Tests and analysis of fill material will be performed in accordance with ANSUASTM D698 and with Section 01400. C_ Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ANSUASTM D1556 and with Section 01400. D. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner. E. Frequency of Tests: One per lift. END OF SECTION ROUGH GRADING SECTION 02211 - 2 PART 1 1.01 SECTION 02222 EXCAVATION GENERAL. SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavation for building foundations. B. Excavation for slabs -on -grade, paving and landscaping. C Excavation for site structures. RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Inspection of bearing surfaces. B. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Dewatering excavations and water control. C. Section 02211 - Rough Grading: Topsoil and subsoil removal from site surface. D. Section 02223 - Backfilling. E. Section 02225 - Trenching: Excavation for utility trenches. r 1.03 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that survey benchmark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. 1.02 1.04 GENERAL arll trw A. Footings may be excavated to dimensions of the concrete work and poured without forms if the nature of the soil will permit SECTION 02222 EXCAVATION GENERAL. SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavation for building foundations. B. Excavation for slabs -on -grade, paving and landscaping. C Excavation for site structures. RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Inspection of bearing surfaces. B. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Dewatering excavations and water control. C. Section 02211 - Rough Grading: Topsoil and subsoil removal from site surface. D. Section 02223 - Backfilling. E. Section 02225 - Trenching: Excavation for utility trenches. r 1.03 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that survey benchmark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. ar.r 1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS trw A. Footings may be excavated to dimensions of the concrete work and poured without forms if the nature of the soil will permit plus the written approval of the Architect/Engineer, B. Concrete walls and piers other than beams specified above, shall be formed on each side. Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated on the plans plus sufficient space to permit erection of required forms, and to permit observation of forms. C. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated sub -grade elevations or dimensions without specific directions from the Architect/Engineer. r. D. Unauthorized excavations from underneath footings shall be filled by extending the indicated bottom elevation of the footing or �- base to the proper excavation bottom without altering required top elevation. E. Other unauthorized excavations shall be backfilled and compacted as specified for authorized excavation of same classification. �., F. Spot Footings: I. Spot footing excavations shall be made only after accurate sized templates are properly positioned and observed by the Architect/Engineer. 2. Side of footing excavations shall be true, parallel to the building lines, and neatly trimmed. 3. Bottom for excavations for footings shall be at the proper elevation flat, and free of all loose dirt and debris. Should suitable bearing not be found at the contract elevation, the Contractor shall revise the elevation to a greater depth. In this event, adjustments in the Contract Price will be made using negotiated unit prices. G. Excavation for structures shall conform to elevations and dimensions shown on the Drawings within a tolerance of 0.17 feet, and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, and for other construction required, and for observation. H. Take care not to disturb bottom of excavation for footings and foundations. Hand excavate to final grade just prior to concrete placement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive concrete. •+ 1. All work in connection with excavation shall be performed in accordance with the standards set forth in the Occupational Safety Standard for Excavation Work and Shoring. PART PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION IEXCAVATION SECTION 02222 - I A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. B. Identify known underground, above ground, and aerial utilities. Stake and flag locations. C. Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain. E. Protect plant life, lawns, and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping. F. Protect bench marks, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavation equipment and vehicular traffic. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. Underpin adjacent structures which may be damaged by excavation work, including utilities and pipe chases. B. Excavate subsoil required to accommodate building foundations, slabs -on -grade, paving and site structures, construction operations, and amenities as required. C. Coordinate special requirements for foundation. D. Machine slope banks to angle of repose or less, until shored. E. Excavation cut not to interfere with normal 45 degree bearing splay of foundation. F. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation. G. Hand trim excavation. Remove loose matter. H. Notify Architect/Engincer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work. 3.03 3.04 1. Correct unauthorized excavation at no extra cost to Owner, 3. Correct areas over -excavated by error in accordance with Section 02222. K. Stockpile excavated material in area designated on site and remove excess material not being reused, from site. Any and all remaining material after completion of construction shall be removed from site. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. B. Provide for visual inspection of bearing surfaces. PROTECTION A. Protect excavations by methods required to prevent cave-in or loose soil from falling into excavation, B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation, from freezing. END OF SECTION EXCAVATION SECTION 02222 - 2 PART I 1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 PART 2 2.01 SECTION 02223 BACKFILLING GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. Site filling and backfilling. B. Fill under slabs -on -grade and paving. D. Consolidation and compaction. E. Fill for over-cxeavation. RELATED SECTIONS A_ Section 01400 - Quality Control: Testing Fill compaction. B. Section 02110 - Site Clearing. C. Section 02222 - Excavation. D. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Concrete materials. REFERENCES A. ANSUASTM C136 - Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. B. ANSUASTM D698 - Test Methods for Moisture -Density Relations of Soils and Soil -Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5 lb Rammer and 12 inch Drop. C. ANSUASTM D1556 - Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand -Cone Method. D. ANSUASTM D1557 -Test Methods for Moisture -Density Relations of Soils and Soil -Aggregate Mixtures Using 10 lb Rammer and 18 inch Drop. SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Samples: Submit ld lb. sample of each type of fill to testing laboratory, in air -tight containers. PRODUCTS FILL MATERIALS A. Type A -Crushed: Angular, natural stone; free ofshale, clay, friable material, sand, debris; graded in accordance with ANSUASTM C136 within the following limits: Sieve Size Percent Passing 2 inches 100 One inch 95 314 inch 95 to 100 518 inch 75 to 100 318 inch 55 to 85 No. 4 35 to 60 No. 16 15 to 35 No. 40 10 to 25 No 200 5 to 10 B. Type B - Pea Grave: Natural stone; washed, free of clay, shale, organic matter, graded in accordance with ANSUASTM C136, to the following: 1. Minimum Size: 1I4 inch. 2. Maximum Size: 518 inch. C. Type C - Sand: Natural river or bank sand; washed, free of silt, day, loam, friable or soluble materials, or organic matter; graded in accordance with ANSUASTM C136, within the following limits: Sieve Size Percent Passing No. 4 t00 No. 14 10 to 100 BACKFILLING SECTION 02223 - 1 No. 50 5 to 90 No. 100 4 to 30 No. 200 0 D Subsoil: Reused. or Imported, free of gravel larger than 3 inch size, and debris. E. BackfilVFill Materials: 1. Maximum Plasticity Index of 12. 2. Minimum Plasticity Index of 3. 3. No stones larger than 1-1/2 inches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify fill materials to be reused are acceptable. B. Verify foundation perimeter drainage installation has been inspected. C. Verify underground tanks are anchored to their own foundation to avoid floatation after backfilling. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Generally, compact subgrade to density requirements for subsequent backfill materials. B. Cutout soft areas ofsubgrade not capable ofinsitu compaction. Backfill with Type A fill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent backfill material. C. Prior to placement o£aggregate base course material at paved areas, compact subsoil to 95 percent of its maximum dry density in accordance with ANSVASTM D698. 3.03 BACKFILLING A. Backfill areas to contours and elevations with unfrozen matcnals. B. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. C. Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches compacted depth D. Soil Fill: Place and compact material in continuous layers not exceeding 6 inches compacted depth. E. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage foundation perimeter drainage, foundation dampproofing, foundation waterproofing and/or protective cover or utilities in trenches. F. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density. G. Backfill against supported foundation walls. Do not backfill against unsupported foundation walls. H. Backfill simultaneously on each side of unsupported foundation walls until supports are in place. 1. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft. unless noted otherwise. J. Make grade changes gradual. Blend slope into level areas. K. Remove surplus backfill materials from site. L. leave fill material stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials. M. Prior to Backfill Placement: Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following: L Acceptance by Architect/Engineer of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimiter insulation. 2. Observation„ testing, approval and recording locations of underground utilities. 3. Removal of concrete formwork. 4. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling ofvoids with satisfactory materials. Cut offtcmporary sheet piling driven below bottom of structures and remove in a manner to prevent settlement of the structure or utilities, or leave in place if required. 5. Removal of trash and debris. N. Placement and Compaction: 1. Place backfilllftll materials in layers not more than 6 inches in loose depth. 2. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide the optimum moisture content. 3. Compace each Sayer to the required percentage of maximum density for each area classification. BACKFILLING SECTION 02223 - 2 - 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of Backfilling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus one inch from required elevations. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. B. Tests and analysis of fill material will be performed in accordance with ANSUASTM D698 and with Section 01400. C. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ANSIIASTM D1556 and with Section 01400. D. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner. E. Frequency of Tests: One per lift F. Proof toll compacted fill surfaces under slabs -on -grade and paving. 3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. B. Recompact fills subjected to vehicular traffic. 3.07 SCHEDULE A. Interior Slab -0n -Grade: a 1. Type A fill, 24 inches thick, compacted to 95 percent, 2. Cover with Type C fill, 2 inches thick, compacted to 95 percent. B. Fill Under Grass Areas: 1. Subsoil Type fill, 6 inches below finish 95 to grade, compacted to percent_ C. Fill Under Landscaped Areas: 1. Subsoil Type fill, to 12 inches below finish grade, compacted to 80 percent. D. Fill to Correct Over -excavation. 1. Type A fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to 95 percent. END OF SECTION 1 IBACKFILLING SECTION 02223 - 3 SECTION 02225 TRENCHING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavate trenches for utilities from 5 feet outside building to municipal utilities. B. Compacted bedding under fill over utilities to subgrade elevations. C. Backfilling and compaction. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Testing fill compaction. B. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Water Control in excavations. C. Section 02110 - Site Cleaning: Topsoil and subsoil removal from site surface. D. Section 02211 - Rough Grading: Topsoil and subsoil removal from site surface. E. Section 02222 - Excavation: General building excavation. F. Section 02223 - Backfilling: General backfilling. G. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Concrete materials. H. Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM C136 Method for Sieve analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. B. ANSIJASTMD698 Test Methods for Moisture-DensityRelations ofSoils and Soil -Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5 Ib (2.49 kg) Rammer and 12 inch (304.8) Drop. C. ANSI/ASTM D1556 Test Method for Density of soil in Place by the Sand -Cone Method. D. ANSI/ASTM D1557 Test Methods for Moisture -Density Relations of Soils and Soil -Aggregate Mixtures Using 10 lb (4.54 kg) Rammer and 18 inch (457 mm) Drop. 1.04 SUBMITTALS TRENCHING SECTION 02225 - 1 A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Samples: Submit 10 samples of each type of IFIL to testing laboratory, in air -tight containers. 1.05 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that survey benchmark and intended elevations for the Work are as shown on Drawings. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS A. Fill Material: Type A materials as specified in Section 02223. 2.02 BED MATERIALS A. Type 1 Material: As specified for Type A in Section 02223. B. Type 2 Material: As specified for Type B in Section 02223. C. Type 3 - Material: As specified for Type C in Section 02223. D. Subsoil Material: As specified in Section 02223. E. Concrete: Structural concrete conforming to Section 03300 with a compressive strength of 3000 psi. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A, Verify fill materials to be reused, is acceptable. TRENCHING SECTION 02225 - 1 3.02 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. B. Maintain and protect existing utilities remaining, which pass through work area. C. Protect plant life, lawns, rock outcropping and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping. D. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavation equipment and vehicular traffic. E. Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain, F. Cutout soft areas ofsubgrade not capable of insitu compaction. Backfill with Type 2 fill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent backfill material. 3.03 EXCAVATION A_ Excavate subsoil required for sanitary sewer water and gas piping to municipal utilities. B. Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable installation of utilities and allow inspection. C. Excavation shall not interfere with normal 45 degree bearing splay of foundations. D. Fland trim excavation. Remove loose matter. E. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 113 cu yd , measured by volume. F. Correct unauthorized excavation at no cost to Owner. G. Correct areas over -excavated by error in accordance with Section 02222. H. Stockpile excavated material in area designated on site and remove excess material not being used, from site. 3.04 BEDDING A. Support pipe and conduit during placement and compaction of bedding fill. 3.05 BACKFILLING A. Backfill trenches to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials. B. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. C. Granular Fill: Place and compact material in continuous layers not exceeding 6 inches; compacted depth. D. Soi Fill: Place and compact material in continuous layers not exceeding 9 inches; compacted depth. E. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density. F, Remove surplus backfill materials from site. G. Leave fill material stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials. 3.06 TOLERANCES A. Top surface of Backfilling: Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus one inch from required elevations. B. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus one inch from required elevations. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. B. Tests and analysis of fill material will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D698 and with Section 01400. C. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D1556 and with Section 01400. D. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner. E. Frequency of Tests: Per lift. 3.08 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. TRENCHING SECTION 02225 - 2 B. Recompact fills subjected to vehicular traffic. 3.09 SCHEDULE A. Storm and Sanitary Piping: 1. Bedding Fill: Type 1, 12 inches thick, compacted to 95 percent, 2. Cover with Common fill, in 8 inch lifts, compacted to 95 percent. END OF SECTION ON! TRENCHING SECTION 02225 - 3 trr arr PART 1 1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 PART 2 2.01 PART 3 3.01 3.02 SECTION 02231 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. Aggregate base course. B. Aggregate for driveways and parking areas. RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02211 - Rough Grading: Preparation of site for base course, B. Section 02223 - Backfilling: Compacted rill under base course. C. Section 02225 - Trenching: Compacted fill under base course. D. Section 02510 - Asphaltic Concrete Paving: Finish asphalt surface coarse. E. Section 02520 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Finish concrete surface course. REFERENCES A. AASHTO/M 147-65 - Materials for Aggregate and Soil -Aggregate. B. ASTM C136 - Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. C. ANSI/ASTM D698 - Test Methods for Moisture -Density Relations of Soils and Soil -Aggregate Mixtures, using 5.5 lb Rammer and 12 inch Drop. D. ANSUASTM D1557 - Test Methods for Moisture -Density Relations of Soils and Sail-Aggrcgatc Mixtures using 10 lb Rammer and 18 inch Drop. E. ASTM D4318 - Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit sample of each type of aggregate to testing laboratory. PRODUCTS MATERIALS A. Coarse Aggregate: Angular, crushed, washed stone; free of shale, clay, friable materials and debris; graded in accordance with ASTM C 136 within the following limits: Sieve Size Percent Passing 2 inches 100 I inch 95 3/4 inch 95 to 100 5/8 inch 75 to 100 318 inch 55 to 85 No. 4 35 to 60 No. 6 15 to 35 No. 40 10 to 25 No. 200 5 to 10 B. Fine Aggregate: Natural river or bank sand; washed free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials; and maximum of 10 percent organic matter. C. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA. Provide granular, liquid or wcttablc powder form. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following companies: a Allied Chemical Corporation, b. Ciba-Grigy corporation. C. Dow Chemical, USA. EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Verify subgrade has been inspected, gradients and elevations are correct, and are dry. AGGREGATE PLACEMENT AGGREGATE BASE COURSE SECTION 02231 -1 3.03 3.04 A Spread coarse aggregate over prepared base to a total compacted thickness of 6 inches. B- Place coarse aggregate in 3 inch layers and roller compact. C. Level and contour surfaces to elevations and gradients indicated. D. Add small quantities of fine aggregate to coarse aggregate as appropriate to assist compaction. E. Compact placed aggregate materials to achieve compaction to 95 percent of its maximum dry density in accordance with ANSUASTM D698 and ANSUASTM D1557. F. Add water to assist compaction. If excess water is apparent, remove aggregate and aerate to reduce moisture content. G. Use mechanical vibrating tamping in areas inaccessible to compaction equipment_ TOLERANCES A. Flatness: Maximum variation of 114 inch measured with 10 foot straightedge. B. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 114 inch. C. Variation from True Elevation: With IR inch. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Gradation of Aggregate: In accordance with ASTM C136. B Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ANSUASTM D698 and ANSUASTM D1557. C. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at not cost to Owner. D. Frequency of Tests: One per truck load of asphalt.. END OF SECTION AGGREGATE BASE COURSE SECTION 02231 - 2 PART I 1.05 1.06 1.07 1.08 1.09 1.10 PART 2 2.01 SECTION 02281 TERMITE CONTROL GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. Soil treatment for termite control below grade., at interior and exterior foundation perimeter. RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02223 - Soil Materials: Backfill materials. REFERENCES A. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency - Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and Rodent. SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Indicate each toxicant to be used, composition by percentage, dilution schedule, intended application rate. C. Test Reports: Indicate regulatory agency approval reports when required. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate caution requirements. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that toxicants meet or exceed specified requirements. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Accurately record moisture content of soil before application, date and rate of application , areas of application diary of meter readings and corresponding soil coverage. MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Maintenance Data: Indicate re -treatment schedule. QUALIFICATIONS A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum five years documented experience and licensed by the State of Texas. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for requirements for application, application licensing, authority to use toxicant chemicals and in accordance with EPA. B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of toxicants. SEQUENCING A. Sequence work under the provisions of Section 0 10 10. B. Apply toxicant immediately 12 hours prior to installation of vapor barrier under slabs -on -grade finish grading work outside foundations. WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty: Include coverage for damage and repairs to building and building contents caused by termites. Repair damage. Re- treat where required. C. Inspect and report annually to Owner in writing. PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS A. Only those products authorized by the EPA. TERMITE CONTROL SECTION 02281 - 1 1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 1.05 1.06 1.07 1.08 1.09 1.10 PART 2 2.01 SECTION 02281 TERMITE CONTROL GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. Soil treatment for termite control below grade., at interior and exterior foundation perimeter. RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02223 - Soil Materials: Backfill materials. REFERENCES A. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency - Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and Rodent. SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Indicate each toxicant to be used, composition by percentage, dilution schedule, intended application rate. C. Test Reports: Indicate regulatory agency approval reports when required. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate caution requirements. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that toxicants meet or exceed specified requirements. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Accurately record moisture content of soil before application, date and rate of application , areas of application diary of meter readings and corresponding soil coverage. MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Maintenance Data: Indicate re -treatment schedule. QUALIFICATIONS A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum five years documented experience and licensed by the State of Texas. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for requirements for application, application licensing, authority to use toxicant chemicals and in accordance with EPA. B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of toxicants. SEQUENCING A. Sequence work under the provisions of Section 0 10 10. B. Apply toxicant immediately 12 hours prior to installation of vapor barrier under slabs -on -grade finish grading work outside foundations. WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty: Include coverage for damage and repairs to building and building contents caused by termites. Repair damage. Re- treat where required. C. Inspect and report annually to Owner in writing. PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS A. Only those products authorized by the EPA. TERMITE CONTROL SECTION 02281 - 1 2.02 MATERIALS A. Toxicant Chemical: EPA approved; synthetically color dyed to permit visual identification of treated soil. B. Diluent: Recommended by toxicant manufacturer. 2.03 MLY A. Mix toxicant to manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that sail surfaces are unfrozen, sufficiently dry to absorb toxicant, and ready to receive treatment. C. Verify final grading is complete. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Spray apply toxicant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B Apply toxicant at locations indicated in Schedule at end of Section. C. Apply extra treatment to structure penetration surfaces such as pipe or ducts, and soil penetrations such as grounding rods or Posts. D. Re-treat disturbed treated soil with same toxicant as original treatment. E. If inspection or testing identifies the presence of termites, re-treat soil and re-test. 3.03 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. B. Do not permit soil grading over treated work.. 3.04 SCHEDULES A. Locations: I. Under Slabs-on-Grade. 2. Both Sides of Foundation Surface. END OF SECTION TERMITE CONTROL SECTION 02281 - 2 SECTION 02510 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Asphaltic concrete paving and surface sealer, wearing binder or base course. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02211 - Rough Grading: Preparation of site for paving and base. B. Secdon 02222 - Excavation: Preparation of site for paving and base. C. Section 02223 - Backfilling: Preparation of site for paving and base. D. Section 02231 - Aggregate Base Course: Aggregate base course. E. Section 09900 - Painting: Pavement markings. 1,03 REFERENCES A. MS -2 - Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot Mus Types - The Asphalt Institute (A!). B. MS -3 - Asphalt Plant Manual - The Asphalt Institute (AI). C. MS -8 - Asphalt Paving Manual - The Asphalt Institute (Al). D. MS -19 - Basic Asphalt Emulsion Manual, The Asphalt Institute (Al). E. ASTM D946 - Penetration-Gradcd Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Paving: Designed for parking and light duty commercial vehicles. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with Texas Highways standard. B. Mixing Plant: Conform to Texas Highways standard. C. Obtain materials from same source throughout. D. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for paving work on public property. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not place asphalt when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F , or surface is wet or frozen. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Asphalt Cement: In accordance with State of Texas Highways standards. B. Aggregate for Binder Course Mix: In accordance with State of Texas Highways standards. C. Aggregate for Wearing Course Mix: In accordance with State of Texas Highways standards. D. Fine Aggregate: In accordance with State of Texas Highways standards. E. Mineral Filler: Finely ground particles of limestone, hydrated lime or other mineral dost, free of foreign matter. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 02510 - 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: In accordance with State of Texas Highways standards. B. Tack Coat: In accordance with State of Texas Highways standards. C. Seal Coat: Al MS -14, fog type 2.03 ASPHALT PAVING MIX A. Use dry material to avoid foaming. Mix uniformly. B. Binder Course: 4.5 to 6 percent of asphalt cement by weight in mixture in accordance with State of Texas Highways standards. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Submit proposed mix design of each class of mix for review prior to commencement of work B. Tat samples in accordance with Al MS -2. PART EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that compacted subgrade is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads. B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct. 3.02 SUBBASE A. Section 02231 - Aggregate Base Course forms the base construction for work of this Section. 3,03 PREPARATION - PRIMER A, Apply primer in accordance with State of Texas Highways standards. B. Apply pnmer to contact surfaces of curbs, gutters and swales, C. Use clean sand to blot excess primer. 3.04 PREPARATION - TACK COAT A. Apply tack coat in accordance with State of Texas Highways standards. B. Apply tack coat to contact surfaces of curbs, gutters and swales. 3.05 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT - SINGLE COURSE A. Install Work in accordance with State of Texas Highways standards. B. Place asphalt within 24 hours of applying primer or tack coat. C. Place to 1.5 inch compacted thickness. D. Compact pavement by rolling. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment. E. Develop rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish, without roller marks. 3.06 SEAL COAT A. Apply seal coat to surface course in accordance with State of Texas Highways standards. 3.07 TOLERANCES A. Flatness: Maximum variation of 114 inch measured with 10 foot straight edge. B. Scheduled Compacted ThicUess: Within 1/4 inch. C. Variation from True Elevation_ With 112 inch . 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 02510 - 2 Take samples and perform tests in accordance with Al NES -2. 3.09 PROTECTION Immediately after placement, protect pavement from mechanical injury for 14 days. END OF SECTION ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 02510 - 3 SECTION 02520 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION] INCLUDES A. Concrete sidewalks, integral curbs, gutters. median barriers, and parking areas.. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02211 - Rough Grading: Preparation of site for paving and base. B. Section 02222 - Excavation: Preparation of site for paving and base. C. Section 02223 - Backfilling: Preparation of site for paving and base. D. Section 02231 - Aggregate Base Course: Aggregate base course. E. Section 02510 - Asphaltic Concrete Paving: Asphalt wearing course. F. Section 07900 - Sealants: Sealant for joints. G. Section 09900 - Painting: Pavement markings. 1,03 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ACI 3G4 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. C. ANSI/ASTM A185 -Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. D. ANSI/ASTM A497 - Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. E. ANSUASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. F. ANSI/ASTM D 1752 - Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. G. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel for Concrete Reinforcement. H. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates. I. ASTM C94 - Ready Mix Concrete. J. ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement. K. ASTM C260 - Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. L. ASTM C309 - Liquid Membrane -Farming Compounds for Curing Concrete. M. ASTM C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. N. FS TT -C-800 - Curing Compound, Concrete, for New and Existing Surfaces. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Paving: Designed for parking and light duty commercial vehicles. 1.05 SUBM=ALS A. Product Data: Provide data on joint filler and admixtures. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with State of Texas Highways standard. B. Obtain cementitious materials from same source throughout. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable standards for paving work on public property. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 02520 - I 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. Form Materials: Conform to ACI 301. B. Joint Filler. ANSI/ASTM D1751 and D1752: Type and thickness as required. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615,40 ksi yield grade; deformed billet steel bars; galvanized finish. B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: Plain type, ANSUASTM A185; in flat sheets galvanized finish. C. Dowels: ASTM A615-,40 ksi yield grade, plain steel, galvanized finish. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Concrete Materials: Provide in accordance with State of Texas Highways standards. B. Fine and Coarse Mix Aggregates: ASTM C33. C. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete. D. Air Entrainment ASTM C260 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class A, B. Liquid Surface Sealer: As required, 2.05 CONCRETE MIX - BY PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A, Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94, alternative No 2. B. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Method I. C. Provide concrete to the following criteria: 1. Compressive Strength: 2800 psi @ 7 days. 2. Compressive Strength: 4000 psi @ 28 days. 3. Slump: 2 to 4 inches. 4. No Admixtures, except for the addition of 5% air -entrainment to exterior concrete exposed to the elements D. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Arch itectlEngineer. E. Use calcium chloride only when approved by Arch itect/Engineer_ F. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer. 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to appointed firm for review prior to commencement of work. B. Tests on cement and aggregates will be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements. C. Test samples in accordance with ACI 301. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify compacted subgmde is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads. B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct. 3.02 SUBBASE PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 02520 - 2 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 02520 - 3 A. Section 02231 - Aggregate Base Course forms the base construction for work of this Section. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete. B. Coat suffaces of manhole catch basin frames with oil to prevent bond with concrete pavement- avementC. C. Notify Architect/Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations. 3.04 FORMING A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, and profile. B. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete. C. Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete placement. 3.05 REINFORCEMENT A. Place reinforcement at mid-height of slabs-on-grade. B. Interrupt reinforcement at expansion joints. C. Place dowels reinforcement to achieve pavement and curb alignment as detailed. D. Provide doweled joints 12 inch o.c. at interruptions of concrete with one end of dowel set in capped sleeve to allow longitudinal movement. 3.06 PLACING CONCRETE A. Coordinate installation of snow melting components. B. Place concrete in accordance with State of Texas Highways standards. C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. D. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur. 3.07 JOINTS A. Place expansion joints at 20 foot intervals. Align curb, gutter, and sidewalk joints. B. Place joint filler between paving components and building or other appurtenances. Recess top of filler 1/4 inch for sealant placement by Section 07904. C. Provide scored joints at 3 feet intervals between sidewalks and curbs and between curbs and pavement. D. Saw cut contraction joints 3/16 inch wide at an optimum time after finishing. Cut 113 into depths of slab. 3.08 FINISHING A. Area Paving: Light broom. B. Sidewalk Paving: Light broom, radius to 114 inch radius, and trowel joint edges. C. Median Barrier: Light broom, radius to 114 inch radius, and trowel joint edges. D. Curbs and Gutters: Light broom. E. Inclined Vehicular Ramps: Broom perpendicular to slope. F. Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 75 or less cu yds of concrete placed each day. B. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather and cured on site under same conditions as concrete it represents. C. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 02520 - 3 D. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. 3.11 PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanics! injury. 3.12 SCHEDULES A. Concrete Sidewalks and Median Barrier: 3,000 psi 28 day concrete, 4 inches thick Portland cement, B. Parking Arra Pavement: 4,000 psi 28 day concrete, 5 inches thick, 616 - 6 x 6 inch mesh reinforcement, wood float finish. END OF SECTION PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 02520 .4 PART 1 1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 1.05 1.06 1.07 1.08 1.04 1.10 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. Formwork for cast -in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage. B. Openings for other work. C. Form accessories. D. Form stripping. PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Supply of concrete accessories for placement by this Section. B. Section 04300 - Concrete Unit Masonry System: Supply of masonry accessories for placement by this Section. C. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Supply of metal fabrications for placement by this Section. D. Section 15010 - Basic Mechanical Requirements: Supply of mechanical items for placement by this Section. E. Section 16010 - Basic Electrical Requirements: Supply of electrical items for placement by this Section. RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement. B. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. REFERENCES A. ACI 347 - Recommended Practice For Concrete Formwork. B. ANSI/ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving Walks. C, PS -1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to [design and] code requirements; resultant concrete to conform to required shape, line and dimension. SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensions, materials, bracing, and arrangement of joints and ties. C. Product Data: Provide data on void form materials and installation requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 347. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for design, fabrication, erection and removal of formwork. FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide under provisions of Section 01400. Coordinate with requirements stated in Section 03300. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. CONCRETE FORMWORK SECTION 03100 - I CONCRETE FORMWORK SECTION 03100 - 2 B. Deliver void forms and installation instructions in manufacturers packaging. C. Store off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from moisture. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01034. B. Coordinate this Section with other Sections of work which require attachment of components to formwork. C. If formwork is placed after reinforcement resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement, request instructions from Arch itecVEngineer before proceeding. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD FORM MATERIALS A. Plywood: Douglas Fir species; solid one side select sheathing, medium density overlaid one side grade; sound undamaged sheets with clean, true edges. 8. Lumber: Douglas Fir species; Utility grade; with grade stamp clearly visible. ' 2.02 PREFABRICATED FORMS A. Preformed Steel Forms: Minimum 16 gage matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces. B Glass Fiber Fabric Reinforced Plastic Forms: Matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished concrete surfaces. C. Pan Type: Steel of size and profile required. D. Tubular Column Type: Round, spirally wound laminated fiber material, surface treated with release agent, non -reusable, of sizes required. E. Void Forms: Moisture resistant treated paper faces, biodegradable, structurally sufficient to support weight of wet concrete mix until initial set; 2 inches thick. 2.03 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. Form Ties: Removable type, galvanized metal, adjustable length, cone type, with waterproofing washer, inch back break dimension, free of defects that could leave holes larger than one inch in concrete surface. B. Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil which will not stain concrete, or absorb moisture, or impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete. C. Comers: Filleted, rigid plastic type; maximum possible lengths. D. Dovetail Anchor Slot: Galvanized steel, 22 gage thick, foam filled, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork. E. Flashing Reglets: Galvanized steel, 22 gage thick, longest possible lengths, with alignment splines for joints, foam filled, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork. F. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts. Anchorages Sized as required, of sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete. G. Waterstops: Rubber, minimum 1,750 psi tensile strength, minimum 50 degrees F to plus 175 degrees F working temperature range, 3/4 inch wide, maximum possible lengths, ribbed profile, preformed corner sections, heat welded jointing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with Drawings. 3.02 EARTH FORMS A. Earth forms are not permitted. 3.03 ERECTION - FORMWORK A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301. CONCRETE FORMWORK SECTION 03100 - 2 B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads. C, Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stepping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores, D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum. E. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members which are not indicated on Drawings. F. Provide fillet and chamfer strips on external corners of floor slab. G- Install void forms in accordance with manufacturer`s recommendations. Protect forms from moisture or crushing. 3.04 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT A Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items, C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied covenngs which are effected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete. 3.05 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in or passing through concrete work. B. Locate and set in place items which will be cast directly into concrete. C, Coordinate work of other Sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts D. Position recessed reglets for brick veneer masonry anchors to spacing and intervals specified in Section 04300, E. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers instructions, straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed dunng concrete placement. F. Install waterstops continuous without displacing reinforcement. !-feat seal joints watertight. G. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. H, Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. 3.06 FORM CLEANING A. Clean and remove foreign matter within forts as erection proceeds. B, Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete. C. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports, D During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts or water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heat enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter. 3.07 FORMWORK TOLERANCES A- Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by AC] 301. B, Camber slabs in accordance with ACI 301. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure. B. Do not reuse wood formwork more than two times for concrete surfaces to be exposed to view. Do not patch formwork. 3.09 FORM REMOVAL A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads. CONCRETE FORMWORK SECTION 03100 - 3 B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view. C. Store removed forms in manner that surfaces to be in contact with fresh concrete will not be damaged. Discard damaged forms. AWMUN:fZoUl CONCRETE FORMWORK SECTION 03100 - 4 SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Reinforcing steel bars, wire fabric and accessories for cast-inplace concrete. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork. B. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. ,,.., C. Section 04300 - Unit Masonry System: Reinforcement for masonry. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements For Reinforced Concrete. C. ACI SP -66 - American Concrete Institute - Detailing Manual. D. ANSI/ASTM A184 - Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. E ANSI/AWS D12.1 - Reinforcing Steel Welding Code. F ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. G ASTM A616 - Rail Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. H ASTM A617 - Axle Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. I CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Manual of Practice. J CRSI 63 - Recommended Practice For Placing Reinforcing Bars. K CRSI 65 - Recommended Practice For Placing Bar Supports, Specifications and Nomenclature. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate bar sizes, spacings, locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel, bending and cutting schedules, and supporting and spacing devices. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with CRSI 63,65 and Manual of Practice, ACI 301, ACI SP -66, ACI 318 and ANSI/ASTM Al 84. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. C. Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis. D. Provide Architect(Engineer with access to fabrication plant to facilitate inspection of reinforcement. Provide notification of commencement and duration of shop fabrication in sufficient time to allow inspection. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Design reinforcement under direct supervision ofa Professional Structural Engineer experienced in designofthis workand licensed in the state where the Project is located. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate with placement of formwork, formed openings and other Work. CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT SECTION 03200 - 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A616, 60 ksi yield grade; deformed rail steel bars, plain to ASTM A767, Class 1 finish. B. Stirrup Steel: ANSI/ASTM A82, plain to ASTM A767, Class I finish. 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed type. B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports and Spacers: Steel of Plastic type , sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during concrete placement conditions including steel load bearing pad on bottom to prevent vapor barrier puncture. Mustbecapable of withstanding crushing, bending or breaking from foot traffic across reinforcement mat during placement of concrete. 1 Spacing: Steel type chairs for re -bar mat reinforcing in slabs -on -grade shall be spaced at a minimum of 32 inches on center each way. C. Special Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers Adjacent to Weather Exposed Concrete Surfaces: Plastic or Plastic coated steel type; size and shape as required with load bearing pad on bottom to prevent vapor barrier puncture. Must be capable of withstanding crushing, bending or breaking form foot traffic across reinforcement mat during placement of concrete. 1. Spacing: Special chairs, etc., shall be spaced at a minimum of 32 inches on center each way. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI Manual of Practice, ACI SP -66, ACI 318, and ANSUASTM At 84. B. Weld reinforcement in accordance with ANSI/AWS DIA and ANSUAWS D12.1. C. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on Drawings, at point of minimum stress. Review location of splices with Architect[Engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position. B. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier. C. Accommodate placement of formed openings. D. Conform to applicable code for concrete cover over reinforcement. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. 3.03 SCHEDULE OF CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT A. Continuous Grade Beams: Reinforcement as indicated on the Drawings. B. Spot Footings: Reinforcement as indicated on the Drawings. C. Drilled Piers: Reinforcement as indicated on the Drawings. D. Slab on Grade: No. 3 Bars at 16 inches on center each way. No NVNVF will be allowed whether indicated or not. E. Exterior Flatwork: Fiberglass reinforcement as approved, in writing, by the Structural Engineer. END OF SECTION CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT SECTION 03200 - 2 SECTION 03300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cast -in-place concrete floors foundation walls and retaining walls. B. Floors and slabs on grade. C. Control, and expansion and contraction joint devices associated with concrete work , including joint sealants. D. Equipment pads, light pole base, flagpole base, and splash blocks. 1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork: Placement of joint device, joint device anchors in formwork. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork: Formwork and accessories. B. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement. C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. D. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials & Methods: Mechanical items for casting into concrete. E. Section 16010 - Basic Electrical Requirements: Electrical items for casting into concrete. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ACI 302 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. C. ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. D. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting. E. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting. F. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete. G. ACI 3 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. H. ANSI/ASTM D994 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type). 1. ANSI/ASTM D 1190 - Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot -Poured Elastic Type. J. ANSI/ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). K. ANSIIASTM DI 752 - Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. L. ASTM B221 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes. M. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates. N. ASTM C94 - Ready -Mixed Concrete. O. ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide data on joint devices, attachment accessories and placement. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03300 - I CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03300 - 2 C. Samples: Submit two, inch long samples of expansionlcontraction joint and control joint. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and interface required with adjacent Work. 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components which are concealed from view. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. C. Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all work. D. Conform to ACI 3058 when concreting during hot weather. , E. Conform to ACI 3068 when concreting during cold weather. 1.08 FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide under provisions of Section 01400. Coordinate with Section 03100. B. Construct and erect a field sample for architectural concrete surfaces receiving special treatment or finish as result of formwork. C. Sample Panel: Sufficient size to indicate special treatment or finish required. D. If requested by Architect/Engineer, cast concrete against sample panel. Obtain acceptance of resultant surface finish prior to erecting formwork. E. Locate where directed. F. Accepted sample panel is considered basis of quality for the finished work. Keep sample panel exposed to view for duration of concrete work. G. Accepted sample may not remain as part of the Work, 1.04 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01034. B- Coordinate the placement ofjoint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I - Normal Portland type. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33. C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.02 ADMIXTURES A. There shall be no admixture use allowed. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Bonding Agent Polymer resin emulsion. B. Vapor Barrier: 6 mil thick clear polyethylene film, type recommended for below grade application. C. Non -Shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non- metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days. D. Sand Cushion: River bank sand. E. Reinforcement Chairs: Plastic type. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03300 - 2 2.04 JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MAIERLALS A Joint Filler. ASTM D 1752; Prcmolded sponge rubber, fully compressible with recovery rate of minimum 95 percent. B. Construction Joint Devices: Integral galvanized steel; formed to tongue and groove profile, with removable top strip exposing sealant trough, knockout holes spaced at 6 inches, ribbed steel spikes with tongue to fit top screed edge. C. Expansion and Contraction Joint Devices: ASTM 8221 alloy, extruded aluminum; resilient elastomcric filler strip with a Shore A hardness of 35 to permit plus or minus 25 percent joint movement with full recovery; extruded aluminum, of longest manufactured length at each location, recessed mounted; color as selected. D. Scaiant and Primer: type, as spocifted in Section 07900. 2.05 CONCRETE MIX A. Mix concrete in accordance with ACI 304. Deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94. B. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Method I. C. Provide concrete to the following criteria: 1. Compressive Strength (7 days): 2400 psi; (28 days): 3000 psi. a. Slabs on Grade and Footings. 2. Compressive Strength (7 days): 3400 psi; (28 days): 4000 psi_ a. Exterior Flatwork. 3. Slump: 1 to 3 inches. 4. Minimum WaterJCement Ratio: 0.58 for Slabs on Grade and Footings; 0.35 for Exterior Flaiwork, PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039 B. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement. C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. In locations where new concrete is dowelled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non -shrink grout. 3.03 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304. B. Place concrete when the temperature is at least 40 degrees F and rising. Cold weather placement techniques shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer in writing 10 days prior to placement of concrete. C. Notify Architect/Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of operations. D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joint fillers, and joint devices are not disturbed during concrete placement. E. Install vapor barrier under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight by sealant applied between overlapping edges and ends or taping edges and ends. F Repair vapor barrier damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor barrier material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. G. Install joint fillers, primer and sealant in accordance with manufacturers instructions. I#. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with 112 inch thick joint filler. I. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 112 inch of finished slab surface. Conform to Section 07900 for finish joint scaler requirements. J. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03300 - 3 3.04 3.05 3.06 3.07 K. Install construction joint device incoordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. L. Install joint device anchors. Maintain correct position to allow joint cover flush with floor and wall finish. M. Install joint covers in longest practical length, when adjacent construction activity is complete. N. Apply sealants in joint devices in accordance with Section 07900. O_ Maintain records of concrete placement. Record dale, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. P. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints, Q. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit coed joints to occur. R. Place floor slabs in checkerboard pattern indicated. S. Saw cutjoints within 24 hours after placing. Using 311.6 inch thick blade, cut into 114 depth of slab thickness. T. Screed floors and slabs on grade level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 118 inch in 10 ft. CONCRETE FINISHING A. Provide formed concrete surfaces to be left exposed with smooth rubbed finish. B. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301. C. Wood float surfaces which will receive ceramic tile with full bed setting system. D. Steel trowel surfaces which will receive carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, thin set ceramic tile. E. Steel trowel surfaces which are scheduled to be exposed. F. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at 114 inch per foot nominal. CURING AND PROTECTION A_ Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of ccment and hardening of concrete. C. Cure floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 308. D. Ponding: Maintain 100 percent coverage of water over floor slab areas continuously for 4 days. E. Spraying: Spray water over floor slab areas and maintain wet for 7 days. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with ACI 301 and under provisions of Section 01400. B. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm. C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of conerete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of Work. D. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements. E. Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 75 or less cu yds of each class of concrete placed. F. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. G. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. PATCHING A, Allow Arch itectlEngineer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms.. B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Architect/Engineer upon discovery. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03300 - 4 C. Patch imperfections in accordance with ACI 301. 3A8 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Arch itecVEngineer. C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of ArchitcctfEnginecr for each individual area. END OF SECTION CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03300 - 5 SECTION 03370 CONCRETE CURING PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Initial and final curing of horizontal and vertical concrete surfaces. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. ACI 302 - Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. C. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete. D. ASTM C 171 - Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. E. ASTM C309 - Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. F. ASTM D2103 - Polyethylene Film and Sheeting. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide data on curing compounds, product characteristics, compatibility and limitations. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate criteria for preparation and application. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301. B. Maintain one copy of document on site. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products under provisions of Section 01600. B. Delivery curing materials in manufacturees packaging including application instructions. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Absorptive Mats Type B: ASTM C171, burlap -polyethylene, minimum 8 ortsq yd bonded to prevent separation during handling and placing. B. Waterproof Paper Type C: ASTM C 171, treated to prevent separation during handling and placing, standard color. C. Polyethylene Film Type D: ASTM C 171, ASTM D2103,4 mil thick, clear. D. Water: Potable and not detrimental to concrete. E. NO CURING COMPOUNDS ALLOWED. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to be cured. 3.02 EXECUTION - HORIZONTAL SURFACES A. Cure floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 308. CONCRETE CURING SECTION 03370 - 1 3.03 3.04 B. Absorptive Mat: Saturate burlap -polyethylene that and place burlap -side down over floor slab areas, lapping ends and sides;. maintain in place for 7. C. Polyethylene Film: Spread Polyethylene film over floor slab areas, lapping edges and sides and scaling with pressure sensitive tape; maintain in place for 7 days. EXECUTION - VERTICAL SURFACES A_ Cure surfaces in accordance with ACI 308. B. Spraying: Spray water over surfaces and maintain wet for 7 days. PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface. END OF SECTION CONCRETE CURING SECTION 03370 - 2 SECTION 04100 MORTAR PART I GENERAL. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Mortar and grout for masonry. 1.02 RELATED WORK A_ Section 01400 - Quality Control: Testing laboratory services. B. Section 04300 - Unit Masonry System: Installation of mortar and grout. C. Section 08111 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames: Grouting steel door 6rames. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C5 - Quicklime for Structutal Purposes. B. ASTM C91 - Masonry Cement. C. ASTM C94 - Ready -Mixed Concrete. D. ASTM C 144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. E. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. F. ASTM C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. G. ASTM C270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry. H. ASTM C387 - Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials, for Mortar and Concrete. 1. ASTM C404 - Aggregates for Masonry Grout. J. ASTM C476 - Grout for Masonry. K. ASTM C595 - Blended Hydraulic Cement_ L. ASTM C780 - Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry. M. ASTM CIO 19 - Method of Sampling and Testing Grout. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Include design mix, indicate Proportion or Property method used, required environmental conditions, and admixture limitations. C. Samples: Submit under provisions of Section 01300. D. Samples: Submit two ribbons of mortar color, illustrating color and color range. E. Submit test reports under provisions of Section 01400. F. Submit test reports on mortar indicating conformance to ASTM C270 and C780. G. Submit test reports on grout indicating conformance to ASTM C476 and CIO 19. H. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Section 01400 that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. C. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter. MORTAR SECTION 04100 - 1 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS MORTAR SECTION 04100 - 2 A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperatures to minimum 50 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work, 1.07 MIX TESTS A. Test mortar and grout in accordance with Section 01400. B. Testing of Mortar Mix: In accordance with ASTM C780. C. Test mortar mix for compressive strength, consistency, mortar aggregate ratio, water content, air content, and splitting tensile strength. D. Testing of Grout Mix: In accordance with ASTM CIO 19, E. Test mortar mix for compressive strength. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Atlas Minerals & Chemicals. B. Gifford -Hill. C. Southern Grouts & Mortars, D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, gray color. B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type M. C. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144, standard masonry type, D. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. E. Quicklime: ASTM C5, non -hydraulic type. F. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404. G. Grout Fine Aggregate: Bamk sand. H. Water: Clean and potable. 2.03 MORTAR COLOR A. Mortar Color; Mineral oxide pigment; color as selected by Arch itect/Engineer. 1. Color shall match color of existing mortar.. 2.04 ADMIXTURES A. Plasticizer: Water reducing type which reduces porosity and absorption to increase bond strength. B. Water Repellent: Liquid type. 2.05 MORTAR MIXES A. Mortar for Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type S utilizing the Proportion Method to achieve 4000 psi strength. B. Mortar for Non -load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type S utilizing the Proportion Method to achieve 3000 psi strength. C. Mortar for Reinforced Masonry: ASTM C270, Type M utilizing the Proportion Method to achieve 4000 psi strength. D. Pointing Mortar: ASTM C270, Type N, with maximum 2 percent ammonium stearate or calcium stearate per cement weight. MORTAR SECTION 04100 - 2 END OF SECTION MORTAR SECTION 04100 - 3 E. Stain Resistant Pointing Mortar. One part Portland cement, 118 part hydrated lime, and two parts graded (80 mesh) aggregate, proportioned by volume. Add aluminum tristearate, calcium stearate, or ammonium stearate equal to 2 percent ofPortland cement by weight F. Mortar: ASTM 0270, Type S using the Property Method. G. Pointing Mortar' ASTM C270, Type 0, with maximum 2 percent ammonium stearate or calcium stearate per cement weight. 2.06 MORTAR MIXING A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C270. B. Add mortar color in accordance with manufacturees instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration. C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. D. if water is lost by evaporation, retemper only within two hours of mixing. E. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 80 degrees F, or two-and-one-half hours at temperatures under 50 degrees F. 2.07 GROUT MIXES A. Bond Beams and Lintels: 4000 psi strength at 28 days, 3-5 inches slump; mixed in accordance with ASTM C476 Fine grout. B. Engineered Masonry: 4000 psi strength at 28 days; 3-5 inches slump; mixed in accordance with ASTM C476 Fine grout. 2.08 GROUT MIXING A. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94. B. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix. C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Request inspection of spaces to be grouted. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Apply bonding agent to any existing concrete surfaces. B- Plug cleanout holes with masonry units to prevent leakage of grout materials. Brace masonry for wet grout pressure. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install mortar and grout to requirements of the specific masonry Sections. B. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids. C. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout. D. Remove grout spaces of excess mortar. END OF SECTION MORTAR SECTION 04100 - 3 SECTION 04300 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Rock Face Custom Concrete masonry units. B. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories. 1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 04100 - Mortar. Special anchors for placement in unit masonry. 1.03 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Placement of steel anchors for structural steel. B. Section 05210 - Steel Joists: Placement of steel bearing pads for joists. C. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Placement of loose steel lintels. D. Section 07620 - Flashing and Sheet Metal: Placement of reglets for flashings. 1.04 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Testing laboratory services. B. Section 04100 - Mortar: Mortar and grout. C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Rod and sealant at control and expansion joints. 1.05 REFERENCES A. ANSUASTM A82 - Cold -Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. B. ANSI/ASTM C34 - Structural Clay Load Bearing Wall Tile. C. ANSI/ASTM C55 - Concrete Building Brick. D. ANSUASTM C56 - Structural Clay Non -Load Bearing Tile. E. ANSI/ASTM C73 - Calcium Silicate Face Brick (Sand -Lime Brick). F. ANSUASTM C126 - Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay Facing Tile, Facing Brick, and Solid Masonry Units. G. ANSUASTM C212 - Structural Clay Facing Tile. H. ANSI/ASTM 0216 - Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale). I. ANSUASTM 0315 - Clay Flue Linings. J. ANSUASTM 0530 - Structural Clay Non -Load Bearing Screen Tile. K. ANSUASTM 0652 - Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale). L. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. M. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate. N. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. O. ASTM A580 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Steel Wire. P. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. Q. ASTM B370 - Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. R. ASTM C27 - Fireclay and High -Aluminum Refractory Brick. S. ASTM C62 - Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale). CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04300 - I CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04300 - 2 T. ASTM C90 - Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. U. ASTM C 129 - Non -Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. V. ASTM 0145 - Solid load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. W. ASTM C744 - Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units. X. IMIAC-Intcmational Masonry Industry Ali -Weather Council: Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. Y. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A- Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Submit product data for concrete masonry units and all reinforcement required in the this Section. C. Submit samples under provisions of Scction 01300. D. Submit manufacturers certificate under provisions of Section 01400 that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Submit manufacturers installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to UL Assembly requirements for fire rated concrete masonry construction. 1.09 MOCK-UP A. Provide mock-up of concrete masonry under provisions of Section 01400. B. Erect concrete masonry unit mock-up to 3x4 feet panel size, include specified mortar and accessories. C. When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard for the Work. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.10 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this Section, under provisions of Section 01200. 1.1 l DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B_ Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. C. Accept concrete masonry units on site. Inspect for damage. 1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. 1.13 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate the masonry work with other masonry system(s) and other sections of these specifications as required. 1.14 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS - CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Featherlite Corporation. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04300 - 2 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04300 - 3 B. Bums and Russell Company. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Hollow Load Bearing Block Units: ASTM C90, Grade N, Type I - Moisture Controlled; normal weight. B. Hollow Non-Load Bearing Block Units: ASTM C129, Type 1- Moisture Controlled; normal wcighL C. Masonry Units: Nominal modular size of x 8 x 16 inches. Provide special units for 90 degree corners, bond beams, lintels, coved base, and buitnosed comers. 2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss or Ladder type; hot dip galvanized after fabrication cold-drawn steel conforming to ANSI/ASTM A82, 3/16 inch side rods with 3116 inch cross ties. B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 60 ksi yield grade, deformed billet bars, unprotected finish. 2.04 FLASHINGS A. Metal Flashings: As Specified in Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 2,05 ACCESSORIES A. Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material. Provide with comer and tee accessories, heat fused joints. B. Joint Filler: Closed cell rubber; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self-expanding; by maximum lengths. C. Building Paper: #30 asphalt saturated felt. D. Nailing Strips: Softwood, preservative treated for moisture resistance, dovetail shape, sized to masonry joints. E. Weep Holes: Preformed plastic tubes. F. Cleaning Solutions: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. G. Insulation Inserts: Expanded polystyrene inserts equal to EPS insulation inserts as Districuted by KORFIL, Inc. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Verify items provided by other Sections of work are property sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other Sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. 3.03 COURSING A, Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Lay concrete masonry units in running bond. Course one unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. Form concave mortar joints. 3.04 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. B. Buttering comers of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04300 - 3 3.05 3.06 3.07 3.08 3.09 C. Remove excess mortar as Work progresses. D. Interlock intersections and external comers. E. Do not shift ortap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. F. Perform jobsite cutting ofmasonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit comers or edges. G. Cut mortar joints flush where cement parging is required, resilient base is scheduled or bitumen dampproofsng is applied. H. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint. 1. Isolate top joint ofmasonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with compressible joint filler. CAVITY WALL A. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weep holes. B. Build inner Wythe ahead of outer wythe to receive cavity insulation airivapor barrier adhesive. REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES - SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16inches oc. B. Place masonryjoint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. C. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of openings. E- Reinforce stack bonded unit joint comers and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches oc. REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES - REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches oc. B. Place masonryjoint reinforcement in fust and second horizontaljoints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening, C. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls. 1)_ Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. Extend minimum 16 inches each side ofopenings. E. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 12 inch ( 13 mm) of dimensioned position. F. Embed anchors embedded in concrete or attached to structural steel members. Embed anchorages in every second block joint. G. Reinforce stack bond unit joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches oc. MASONRY FLASHINGS A. Lap end joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. B. Use flashing manufacturer's recommended adhesive and scaler. LINTELS A. Install loose steel or precast concrete lintels over window openings, and door openings. B. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel or precast concrete lintels are not scheduled. C. Openings Up To 42 Inches Wide: Place two, No. 4 reinforcing bars I inch from bottom web. D. Openings From 42 Inches Up To 78 Inches Wide: Place two, No. 5 reinforcing bars I inch from bottom web. E. Openings Over 78 Inches: Reinforce openings as detailed. F. Use single piece reinforcing bars only, G- Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 12 inch of dimensioned position. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04300 - 4 u n u u3.11 n 3.12 H. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. 1. Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary supports. J. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening. GROUTED COMPONENTS A. Reinforce bond beam with 2, No. 5 bars, placed as shown on the Drawings. B. Reinforce pilaster with 4, No. 5 bars, and No. 3 tics, placed as shown on the Drawings. C. Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters. D. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1!2 inch of dimensioned position. E. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. F. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 12 inches either side of opening. REINFORCED MASONRY A. Lay masonry units with core cells vertically aligned and cavities between wythes clear of mortar and unobstructed. B. Place mortar in masonry unit bed joints back 114 inch from edge of unit grout spaces, bevel back and upward. Permit mortar to cure 7 days before placing grout. C. Reinforce masonry unit cores and cavities with reinforcement bars and grout as indicated. D. Retain vertical reinforcement in position at top and bottom of cells and at intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters. Splice reinforcement in accordance with Section 03200. E. Wet masonry unit surfaces in contact with grout just prior to grout placement. F. Grout spaces less than 2 inches in width with fine grout using low lift grouting techniques. Grout spaces 2 inches or greater in width with course grout using high or low lift grouting techniques. G. When grouting is slopped for more than one hour, terminate grout 1-112 inch below top of upper masonry unit to form a positive key for subsequent grout placement. H. Low Lift Grouting: Place first lift of grout to a height of 16 inches and rod for grout consolidation. Place subsequent lifts in 8 inch increments and rod for grout consolidation. t. High Lift Grouting: 1. Provide cleanout opening no less than 4 inches high at the bottom of each cell to be grouted by cutting one face shell of masonry unit. 2. In double wythe walls, omit every second masonry unit in one of the wythes for clean out and cell inspection purposes. 3. In double wythe walls, construct vertical grout barriers ordains between the masonry wythes, with masonry units every 30 feet maximum. 4. Clean out masonry cells and cavities with high pressure water spray. Permit complete water drainage. 5. Request the Architect/Engineer to inspect the cells and cavities. Allow 3 days advance notice of inspection. 6. After cleaning and cell inspection, seal openings with masonry units. 7. Pump grout into spaces. Maintain water content in grout to intended slump without aggregate segregation. S. Limit grout lift to 48 inches and rod for grout consolidation. Wait 30 to 60 minutes before placing next lift. CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints. B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and comer joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07900 for sealant performance. D. Form expansion joint as detailed. BUILT-IN WORK A. As work progresses, build in metal door and glazed frames, fabricated metal frames, window frames, wood nailing strips, fireplace accessories, anchor bolts, plates, and other items furnished by other Sections. B. Build in items plumb and level. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04300 - 5 3.14 3.15 3.16 3.17 C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortarjoints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings. D. Do not build in organic materials subject to deterioration. TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Alignment of Pilasters: 114 inch. B. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch. C. Maximum Variation From Plane of Wali; 114 inch in 10 feet and 1/2 inch in 20 feet or more. D. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 114 inch per story non -cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more. E. Maximum Variation From Level Coursing: 118 inch in 3 feet and 1/4 inch in 10 feet; 1/2 inch in 30 feet. F. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 118 inch in 3 feet G. Maximum Variation From Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch. CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, and grounds. Coordinate with other Sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location_ B, Obtain Architect/Engineer approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears. C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500. B. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external comers which may be damaged by construction activities, END OF SECTION CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04300 - 6 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURALSTEEL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural steel framing members and support members. B. Baseplatcs, shear stud connectors and expansion joint plates. C. Grouting under baseplates. 1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Anchors for casting into concrete. B. Section 04300 - Concrete Unit Masonry: Anchors for embedding into masonry. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Non -framing fabrications affecting structural steel work. B. Section 09900 - Painting: Finish painting. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel. B. ASTM A53 - Hot -Dipped, Zinc -coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe. C. ASTM A108 - Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold -Finished, Standard Quality. D. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. E. ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. F. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners, G. ASTM A325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints, H. ASTM A490 - Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. 1. ASTM A500 - Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes. J. ASTM A501 - Hot -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. K. ASTM A572 - High Strength Low Alloy Columbium -Vanadium Steel of Structural Quality. L. AWS A2.0 - Standard Welding Symbols. M. AWS D 1.1 -Structural Welding Code. N AISC - Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. O. AISC - Specification for Architectural Exposed Structural Steel. P. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of the Uniform General Conditions and the Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and fasteners. 2. Connections. 3. Cambers, loads and related criteria. 4, Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. STRUCTURAL STEEL SEC'T'ION 05120 - 1 C. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Submit certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Mill Test Reports: Submit under Uniform General Conditions and the Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract. E. Welders Certificates: Submit under provisions ofthe Uniform General Conditions and the Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract., certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualifications within the previous 12 months. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC-Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. B. Perform Work in accordance with AISC - Specification for Architectural Exposed Structural Steel. C. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum three years experience. C. Design connections not detailed on the Drawings under direct supervision ofa Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State where the project is located. 1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS 2.02 A. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A572, Grade 50, B. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. C. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B. D. Shear Stud Connectors: ASTM A108, Grade 1015, forged steel, headed, and primed. E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325. F. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A36. G. Rivets: ASTM A502: high strength type or carhon steel. H- Welding Materials: AWS DI. I, type required for materials being welded. I- Grout: Non -shrink type, pre -mixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing additives, capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days. 1. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: SSPC Paint 15, Type t, red oxide. FABRICATION A. Space shear stud connectors as recommended by Fabricator. B. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. Grind exposed welds smooth. r�Ut�y1�IG'�:I A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP -2. B. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be in contact with concrete. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS A. Testing and analysis of components will be performed under provisions of the Uniform General Conditions and the Supplementary General Conditions of the ContracL STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTION 05120 - 2 1] PART 3 EXECUT]ON 3.01 EXAMINATION X Verify that Geld conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions. 3.02 ERECTION A. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion oferection and installation of permanent bracing. B. Field weld components and shear studs indicated on Drawings. C. Do not Geld cut or alter struetural members without approval of Arch itect/Engineer. D. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. E. Grout under bascplates in accordance with Section 04100. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non -cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions ofthe Uniform General Conditions and the Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract. END OF SECTION STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTION 05120 - 3 STEEL JOISTS SECTION 05210 - 1 SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Open web steel joists and shear stud connectors, with bridging, attached seats, and anchors. B. Loose bearing plates and anchor bolts for site placement. C. Framed roof openings greater than 18 inches. 1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Anchors for casting into concrete. B. Section 04300 - Concrete Unit Masonry: Anchors for embedding into masonry. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Grouting base plates. B. Section 05120 - Structural Steel. C. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Non -framing steel fabrications. D. Section 09900 - Painting. 01 �.w 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASTM A108 - Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold -Finished, Standard Quality. B. ASTM At 53 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. C. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Threaded Standard Fasteners. D. ASTM A325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. E. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. F. FS TT -P-636 - Primer Coating, Alkyd, Wood and Ferrous Metal. 49 G. SJI - Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel H Series. H. SJI - Standard Specifications for Longspan Steel Joists LH and LJ Series and Deep Longspan Steel Joists DLH and DLJ Series. 1. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate standard designations, configuration, sizes, spacing, locations of joists, joist leg extensions. 2. Joist coding, bridging, connections, attachments. 3. Cambers. C. Welders' Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificates under provisions of Section 01400 that welders employed on the Work have met AWS verification within the previous 12 months. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with SJI Standard Specifications, Load Tables, and Weight Tables, including headers and other supplementary framing. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum five years documented experience. STEEL JOISTS SECTION 05210 - 1 A. Shop prime joists. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and analysis of components will be perforated under provisions of Section 01400. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTORS A. Only qualified erectors with at least five years of documented experience shall be used on this Project. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions. STEEL JOISTS SECTION 05210 - 2 B. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum five years documented experience. C. Design connections not detailed on the Drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of where the Project is located. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600 and to SJI requirements. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600 and to SJI requirements. C. Protect joists from distortion or damage. 1.09 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FABRICATORS A. W & W Steel Company. B. Falcon Steel Company. C. Vulcrafl Division, Nucor. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Open Web Joists Members: SJI Type H open web. B. Anchor Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307. C. Shear Stud Connectors: ASTM A108, Grade 1015, forged steel, headed, uncoated. D. Primer: FS TT -P-636. E. Structural Steel For Supplementary Framing and Joist Leg Extensions: ASTM A36. F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Provide bottom and top chord extensions as indicated. B. Weld threaded lugs to chords for attachment of wood nailers. C. Frame special sized openings in joist chord framing as detailed. D. Space shear stud connectors as recommended by joist manufacturer. A. Shop prime joists. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and analysis of components will be perforated under provisions of Section 01400. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTORS A. Only qualified erectors with at least five years of documented experience shall be used on this Project. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions. STEEL JOISTS SECTION 05210 - 2 3.03 3.04 3.05 ERECTION A. Erect and bear joists on supports. B. Allow for erection loads. Provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain framing safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bridging and bracing. C. Coordinate placement of anchors in concrete and/or masonry construction for securing bearing plates. D. After joist alignment and installation of framing, field weld joist seat to bearing plates. E. Position and field weld joist chord extensions and wall attachments. F. Frame roof openings greater than 18 inches with supplementary framing. G. Do not permit erection of decking until joists are braced, bridged, and secured. H. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of joist fabricator. 1. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed. ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 114 inch. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 114 inch. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. END OF SECTION STEEL JOISTS SECTION 05210 - 3 L A 1� 1 SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PARTI GENERAL 1.0 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a partof this specification to the extent referenced. The publicauorts are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications: A 361A36M-89 Structural Steel A 53-86 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated Welded and Seamless C. American Welding Society (AWS) Publication: DIA -86 Structural Welding Code -Steel 1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall take all field measurements necessary before fabrication, Welding to or on structural steel shall be in accordance with AWS Dl. l Exposed fastenings shall be compatible materials, shall generally match in color and finish, and shall harmonac with the material to which fastenings are applied. Materials and parts necessary to complete each item, even though such work is not definitely shown or specified, shall be included. Poor matching of holes for fasteners shall because for rejection. Fastenings shall be concealed where practicable. Thickness of metal and details of assembly and supports shall provide strength and stiffness. Joints exposed to the weather shall be formed to exclude water. 1.03 DISSIMILAR MATERIALS A. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, the surfaces shall be protected with a coat of bituminous paint or asphalt varnish. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings 1. Shop drawings shall besubmitted in accordance with the Uniform General Conditions and the Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract. Shop drawings shall indicate material thickness, type, grade, and class; dimensions; and construction details. Drawings shall include catalog cuts, erection details, manufacturer's descriptive data and installation instructions, and templates. Shop drawings for the following items shall be submitted: wire mesh guard panels, pipe handrails and brackets. 1.05 WORKMANSHIP A. Miscellaneous metalwork shall be well formed to shape and size, with sharp lines and angles and true curves. Drilling and punching shall produce clean true lines and surfaces. Welding shall be continuous along the entire area of contact except where tack welding is permitted. Exposed connections of work in place shall not be tack welded. Exposed welds shall be ground smooth. Exposed surfaces of work in place shall have a smooth finish, and unless otherwise approved, exposed riveting shall be flush. Where tight fits are required, joints shall be milled. Corner joints shall be coped or mitered, well formed, and in true alinement. Work shall be accurately set to established lines and elevations and securely fastened in place. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and approved drawings, cuts, and details. 1.06 ANCHORAGE A. Anchorage shall be provided where necessary for fastening miscellaneous metal items securely in place. Anchorage nototherwise specified or indicated shall include slotted inserts made to engage with the anchors, expansion shields, and powder -driven fasteners when approved for concrete; toggle bolts and through bolts, lag bolts, and screws for wood. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 SHOP PAINTING A. Surfaces of ferrous metal shall be cleaned and shop coated with the manufacturer's standard protective coating unless otherwise specified. Surfaces of items to be embedded in concrete shall not be painted. Items to be finish painted shall be prepared according to manufacturer's recommendations or as specified. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS PLATES AND SHAPES A. Miscellaneous plates and shapes for items that do not form a part of the structural steel framework, such as lintels, sill angles, miscellaneous mountings, and frames, shall be provided to complete the work. METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 05500 - I PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All items shall be installed at the locations shown and according to the manufactures rccommendations. Items listed below require additional procedures as specified. 9210I01l#.90019M METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 05500 - 2 SECTION 06112 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SHEATHING PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION NCLUDES A. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing. B. Telephone and electrical panel boards. C. Concealed wood blocking for support of toilet and bath accessories, wall cabinets, wood trim, and similar items. 1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Placement of steel fabrications embedded, bearing upon and anchored into masonry. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06410 - Custom Casework: Casework to receive wood blocking. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ALSC - American Lumber Standards Committee: Softwood Lumber Standards. B. ANSI/AHA A135.4 - Basic Hardboard. C. APA: American Plywood Association. D. NFPA: National Forest Products Association. E. SPIB: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. F. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau, G. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the following agencies: 1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC. 2. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA. B. In lieu ofgrade stamping exposed to view lumber and plywood, submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Section 01400 that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Design structural site fabricated trusses under direct supervis ion ofa PrufessionalStructinal Engineer experienced in designofthis Work and licensed in the state where the Project is located. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Lumber Grading Rules: NFPA, RIS, SPIB, WCLIB, and WWPA. B. Miscellaneous Framing: Stress Group D, Yellow Pine species, 14 percent maximum moisture content. 2.02 SHEATHING MATERIALS MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SHEATHING SECTION 06112 - 1 A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing, Structural 1, Span Rating 1; Exposure Durability l; sanded. B. Plywood Wall Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing, Structural 1, Sparc Rating 1; Exposure Durability l; sanded. C. Plywood Floor Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing, Structural 1, Span Rating I; Exposure Durability I; sanded. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: I. Fasteners: Hot -dipped galvanized steel for high humidity and treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length to achieve full penetration of sheathing substrate. 3. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolt or ballistic fastener for anchorages to steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FRAMING A. Set members level and plumb, in correct position. B. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Place horizontal members flat, crown side up, D. Construct load bearing framing members full length without splices. E. Double members at openings over 18 inches wide. Space short studs over and under opening to stud spacing. F. Coordinate instal€ation of toilet partitions, toilet accessories, fire extinguishers, and anylall other wall hung items with installation of solid blocking behind all wall mounted items. 3.02 SHEATHING A. Secure roofsheathing perpendicular to framing members with ends staggered and sheet ends over firm bearing. Use sheathing clips between sheets between roof framing members. Provide solid edge blocking between sheets. B. Secure wall sheathing with long dimension parallel to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing and staggered. C. Install plywood to simple span. D. Install telephone and electrical panel boards with plywood sheathing material where required. Oversize the panel by 12 inches on all sides. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 114 inch from true position, maximum. B. Surface Flatness of Floor: 114 inch in 10 feet maximum, and % inch maximum in 30 feet. 3.04 SCHEDULES A. Above Grade Stud Framing: S/P/F species, 19 percent maximum moisture content.. B. Roof/Wall Sheathing: Plywood, 518 inch thick, 24 x 48 inch sized sheets, square edges; appearance grade facing inward. C. Blocking: SIP/F species, 19 percent maximum moisture content; size as appropriate for wall hung item. D. Telephone and Electrical Panel Boards: Plywood, 314 inch thick, 48 x 96 inch sized sheets, or size as required, square edges; appearance grade exposed to view. Band edges with 3/8 inch hardwood edge band, all exposed ends. END OF SECTION MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SHEATHING SECTION 06112 - 2 SECTION 06114 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roof curbs and cants. B, Blocking in wall and roof openings. C. Wood furring and grounds. D. Concealed wood blocking for support oftoilet and bath accessories, wall cabinets, wood trim, marker boards, and fire extinguisher cabinets. E. Telephone and electrical panel boards. F. Preservative treatment of wood. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Concrete openings to receive wood blocking. B. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AISC - American Lumber Standards Committee: Softwood Lumber Standards. B. APA: American Plywood Association. C. AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C 1 - All Timber Products Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process, D. AWPA (American Wood Preservers Association) C20 - Structural Lumber Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process. E. NFPA: National Forest Products Association. F. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service. G. SPIB: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. H. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 1. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials and application instructions. 1,05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the following agencies: 1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC. 2. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Lumber Grading Rules: NFPA and WWPA. B. Miscellaneous Framing: Stress Group D, Douglas Fir species, 19 percent maximum moisture content, pressure preservative treat when exposed to moisture.. C. Plywood: APA Rated Sheathing Structural I, Grade C -D; Exposure Durability l; sanded. 2.02 ACCESSORIES WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING SECTION 06114 - 1 END OF SECTION WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING SECTION 06114 - 2 A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Fasteners: Hot -dipped galvanized steel for high humidity and treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete, Bolt or ballistic fastener for anchorages to steel. 2.03 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Fire retardant: AWPA Treatment C20, Exterior Type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread/smoke development rating as recommended by NFPA 101. B. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Treatment C1 using water borne preservative with 0.25 percent retainage. C. Wood Preservative (Surface Application): Clear, Epoxy type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FRAMING A. Set members level and plumb, in correct position. B. Place horizontal members flat, crown side up. C. Construct curb members of single pieces. D. Space framing and furring 16 inches o.c. E. Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs arc provided. Form comers by alternating lapping side members. F. Coordinate curb installation with installation ofdecking and support ofdeck openings, roofing vapor retardant, parapet construction, and openings. 3.02 SHEATHING A. Secure sheathing to framing members with ends over firm bearing and staggered. B. Install telephone 4'x 8' board with plywood sheathing material where required. 3.03 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Brush apply two coats ofpreservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious materials, roofingand related metal flashings, and any surface exposed to moisture. Treat site -sawn cuts. C. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members. 3.04 SCHEDULES A. Roof Blocking: S/PIF species, 19 percent maximum moisture content, pressure preservative treatment. B. Telephone Backboards: 314 inch thick, square edges, site brush applied preservative treated. C. Wall Blocking: SIP/F species, 19 percent maximum moisture content, pressure preservative treatmentwhen exposed to moisture. END OF SECTION WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING SECTION 06114 - 2 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finish carpentry items, other than shop prefabricated casework. B. Hardware and attachment accessories. C. Wood Veneer Panelling. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 - Wood blocking and curbing. B. Section 06410 - Custom Casework: Shop fabricated custom cabinetwork. C. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors. D. Section 08800 - Glazing. Glass and glazing of glazed partition screens. E. Section 09900 - Painting: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSUHPHA HP - American Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood, B. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard. C. AWI - Quality Standards. D. FS MM -L-36 - Lumber, Hardwood. E. FS MMM -A-130 - Adhesive, Contact. F. NEMA LD -3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. G. PS I - Construction and Industrial Hardwood, H. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. 1. UL - Underwriters Laboratories. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire retardant requirements. B. Conform to UL requirements to achieve fire resistance assembly rating indicated. 1.05 FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide samples under provisions of Section 01300. B. Provide field sample, 12 inch long by 12 inch wide, illustrating full panel sheet, edge rim, joint trim, applied finish. C. Locate where directed. D. Accepted sample may remain as part of the Work. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300. B. Submit shop drawings indicating materials, component profiles, fastening methods,jointingdetails, finishes, and accessories toan appropriate scale. C. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. D. Submit product data on fire retardant treatment materials and application instructions. E. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. F. Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating wood grain and specified finish. FINISH CARPENTRY SECTION 06200 - 1 G. Submit two samples 12 inch long of wood trim. H. Submit fabricator's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. I. Submit instructions for use of adhesives, attachment hardware, and finish hardware. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. 6, Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600 C. Store materials in ventilated, interior locations under constant minimum temperatures of 60 degrees F and maximum relative humidity of 55 percent. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; Custom grade in accordance with AW[; maximum moisture content of 6 percent; birch species, with vertical grain, of quality capable of transparent Finish. B. Hardwood Lumber: FS MM -L-736; Custom Grade in accordance with AWI; maximum moisture content of 6 percent; red oak species with vertical grain, of quality capable of transparent finish. 2.02 SHEET MATERIALS A. Softwood Plywood: PS l; Standard sheathing grade, Group 1, Appearance quality; birch species with face veneer of rotary cut grain. B. Hardwood Plywood: ANSIIHPHA HP; Custom Grade in accordance with AWI; veneer core material; red oak species with face veneer of vertical grain. C. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4; pressed wood fiber with resin binder; tempered grade; one-quarter inch thick minimum. D. Pegboard: Pressed wood fiberwith resin binder; tempered grade; 114 inch thick minimum with 9132 inch diameter holes at ane inch on center both ways. E. Wood Veneer Panelling: ANSI/HPHA HP, Premium Grade in accordance with AWI; veneer core material; finish veneer ofred oak species with book matched vertical grain; two layers of 114 inch thick on fiont of Reception Counter and one layer of 318 inch thick on wall behind Reception Counter. Refer to the Drawings. 2.03 ADHESIVE A. Contact Adhesive: FS MMM -A -I30; solvent release type. B. Wall Adhesive: Solvent release, cartridge type, compatible with wall substrate, capable of achieving durable bond. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Nails: Size and type to suit application, plain finish. B Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Blind Fasteners, Lags, and Screws: Size and type to suit application; plain finish. C. Lumber for Shimming, Blocking, and Curbing: Softwood lumber of any species. D. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer. E. Wood Filler: Oil base, tented to match surface color. 2.05 WOOD TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Fire Retardant ('FR -S' Type): Chemically treated, and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flamelfuel/smoke rating required by code. B. Wood Preservative "PT" Type: Waterproof type; clear color. 2.05 SHOP TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS A. Brush apply wood materials requiring UL fire rating to concealed wood blocking. B. Provide UL approved identification on fire retardant treated material. C. Deliver fire retardant treated materials cut to required sixes. Minimize field cutting. D. Redry wood after pressure treatment to maximum 19 percent moisture content. FINISH CARPENTRY SECTION 06200 - 2 2.06 FABRICATION A. Fabricate to AW1 Custom standards. B. Shop prepare and identify components for book match grain matching during site erection. 2.07 SHOP FINISHING A. Shop finish work in accordance with AW1 'Factory Finishing' Section 1500, PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on shop drawings. B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this Section are placed and ready to receive this work C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with cementitious materials. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install work in accordance with AWI Custom quality standard. B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. C. Set structural members level and plumb, in correct position. D. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. E. Place horizontal members flat, crown side up, F. Construct load bearing framing members full length without splices. G. Bridge joists in excess of 8 feet span at midspan. Fit solid blocking at ends of members. H. Install plywood to simple span. 1. Install Wood Veneer Panelling and accessory trim as indicated on the Drawings. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1116 inch. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1132 inch. C. Framing Members: 114 inch from true position, maximum. D. Surface Flatness of Floor: Framing members 1f4 inch in 10 feet maximum and 1122 inch maximum in 30 feet. END OF SECTION FINISH CARPENTRY SECTION 06200 - 3 SECTION 06410 CUSTOM CASEWORK PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated cabinet units. B. Countertops. C. Cabinet hardware. D. Shop Preparation for Site Finishing.. 1.02 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 08710 - Door Hardware: Supply of cabinet hardware for placement by this section. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Related trim not specified in this section. B. Section 09900 - Painting: Finishing cabinet exterior and interior, 1.04 REFERENCES A. ANSVBHMA A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware. B. AWE - Quality Standards. C. FS MM -L-736 - Lumber, Hardwood. D. FS MMM -A-130 Adhesive, Contact. E. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA) LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. F. PS l - Construction and Industrial Plywood. G. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location, and schedule of finishes. C. Samples: Submit two, 12 x 12 inch size samples, illustrating counter top finish. D, Samples: Submit one sample of drawer pulls, and hinges illustrating hardware finish. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Custom quality. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.08 MOCKUP A. Provide mockup of full size base cabinet and upper cabinet under provisions of Section 01400. B. Provide units with specified countertop; with hardware installed. C. Units will be examined to ascertain quality and conformity to AWI quality level standards and specification requirements. D. Mockup may remain as part of the Work if accepted. E. No further fabrication of custom casework shall be done until required mockup has been accepted by the Archilect. CUSTOM CASEWORK SECTION 06410 - I 1.09 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of Section 01039. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A, Deliver, store and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect units from moisture damage. I'll FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.12 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 0 103 9. B. Coordinate the work with plumbing and electrical rough -in work. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood for Opaque Finish: PS 20; graded in accordance with AWI Custom, average moisture content of 6 percent; species and grade as follows: ITEM SPECIES CUT Cabinet Frame Red Oak Rotary Concealed Stiles and Rails Red Oak Rotary Semi -Exposed Construction Red Oak Rotary Exposed Show End Red Oak Rotary B. Wood for Transparent Stain: FS MM- L - 736; graded in accordance with AWI Custom; average moisture content of 6 percent,. species and grade as follows: ITEM SPECIES CUT Cabinet Frame Red flak Rotary Exposed Stiles and Rails Red Oak Rotary Semi -Exposed Construction Red Oak Rotary Exposed Show End Red Oak Rotary C. Wood for Plastic Laminate Finished Casework: PS 20; graded in accordance with AWI Custom; average moisture content of 6 percent; any species suitable for laminated plastic finish. 2.03 SHEET MATERIALS A. Plywood for Opaque Finish: PS 1; graded in accordance with AWI, core materials of veneer; species and cut as follows: ITEM FACE SPECIES CUT Drawer Construction Red Oak Rotary Gables and Backs Red Oak Rotary B. Plywood for Transparent Finish: PS 51; graded in accordance with AWI, core materials of veneer, type of glue recommended for application; face veneer and cuts as follows: ITEM FACE SPECIES CUT Door and Drawer Fronts Red Oak Rotary Open, Exposed Shelving Red Oak Rotary C. Plywood for Plastic Laminate Finish: PS 1; graded in accordance with AWI Custom; average moisture content of 6 percent;. any species suitable for laminated plastic finish. D, Hardboard: Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, tempered grade, 114 inch thick, smooth one side, located as follows: ITEM: Drawer Bottoms 2.04 MANUFACTURERS - PLASTIC LAMINATE A. Wilson Art: Colors will be selected from Wilson Art colors. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. Colors from other Manufacturers must be a match to those selected from Wilson Art. 2.05 LAMINATE MATERIALS CUSTOM CASEWORK SECTION 06410 - 2 ar PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. 3.02 INSTALLATION 01 CUSTOM CASEWORK SECTION 06410 - 3 A A. Plastic Laminate: AWI, Post Forming 0.050 inch General Purpose quality; color, pattern, and surface texture as selected. B. Laminate Backing Sheet: 0.020 inch, Backing Sheet grade, undecorated plastic laminate. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: FS MMM -A-130 contact adhesive and or Type recommended by AWI to suit application. B. Aluminum Edge Trim: Extruded flat shape; smooth surface finish; self locking serrated tongue; of width to match component thickness; natural mill finish. C. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. t D. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application. E. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. 2.07 HARDWARE A. Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.9. B. Cabinet Hardware Schedule: Refer to the Drawings for cabinet hardware and all associated hardware accessories required for this section. +n, 2.08 SITE FINISHING MATERIALS war A. As specified in Section 09900. 2.09 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. B. Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with 318 inch matching hardwood edging. Use one piece for full length only. C. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern. D. Door and Drawer Fronts: 314 inch thick; overlay style. E. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site I cutting. F. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit comers and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs. + G. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces. H. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops with steel brackets at 16 inches on center. I. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Seal contact surfaces of cut edges. J. Apply colored caulking to all interior corners of plastic laminate and interior corners adjacent to wall surface. 2.10 SHOP PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. indentations. B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes. ar PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. 3.02 INSTALLATION 01 CUSTOM CASEWORK SECTION 06410 - 3 A A. Set and secure casework in place; rigid, plumb, and level. B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and counter tops. D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. E. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. F. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations- Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. END OF SECTION CUSTOM CASEWORK SECTION 00410 - 4 SHEET MEMBRANE VAPOR BARRIER SECTION 07110 - I SECTION 07110 SHEET MEMBRANE VAPOR BARRIER PART1. GENERAL, 1.01 SECTION rNCLUDES A. Loose laid elastomeric sheet membrane vapor barrier. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02223 - Backfilling. B. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Concrete substrate. C. Section 04320 - Veneer Masonry System: Veneer masonry joints prepared to receive flashings. D, Section 07160 - Bituminous Dampproofing. E. Section 07212 - Board Insulation: Perimeter and horizontal insulation protective cover. F. Seetion 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal parapet, coping, and counter flashing work. G. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. H. Section 15430 - Plumbing Specialties: Drain flashing flanges. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM 13412 - Rubber Properties in Tension. B. ASTM D624 - Rubber Property - Tear Resistance. C. ANSUASTM D746 - Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact. D. ASTM D822 - Operating Light and Water -Exposure Apparatus (Carbon -Arc Type) for Testing Paint, Vanish, Lacquer, and Related Coatings and Materials. E. ASTM D1004 - Initial Tear Resistance of Plastic Film and Sheeting. F. ASTM D2240 - Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness. G. ASTM D3020 - Polyethylene and Ethylene Copolymer Plastic Sheeting for Pond, Canal, and Reservoir Lining. H. ASTM D3253 - Vulcanized Rubber Sheeting for Pond, Canal, and Reservoir Lining. I. ASTM D4068 - Chlorinated Polyethylene (CPE) Sheeting for Concealed Water -Containment Membrane. J. ASTM D4551 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Flexible Concealed Water -Containment Membrane. K. ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. L. NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) - Waterproofing Manual. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Vapor Barrier System: Capable of resisting water head as required by the National Plumbing Code and preventing moisture migration to interior. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A- Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate special joint or termination conditions and conditions of interface with other materials. C. Product Data: Provide data for surface conditioner, flexible flashings, joint cover sheet, and joint and crack sealants, with temperature range for application of waterproofing membrane. D, Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. E. Manufacturers Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1 SHEET MEMBRANE VAPOR BARRIER SECTION 07110 - I 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Membrane Manufacturer. Company specializing in vapor barrier sheet membranes with three years experience. B. Applicator Company specializing in performing the work ofthis section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.08 MOCKUP A. Provide mockup of waterproofing system under provisions of Section 01400, B. Mockup: 100 sq ft ofhorizontal and vertical vapor barrier panel; to represent finished work including intemal and extemal corners, and seam jointing. C. Mockup may remain as part of the Work if authorized in writing by the Arch itect/Enginecr. 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and during application and until liquid or mastic arrncc^ries have cured. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Section 01700, B- Warranty: Include coverage for vapor barrier failing to resist penetration of water, except where such failures are the result of structural failures of building. Hairline cracking of concrete due to temperature change of shrinkage is not considered a structural failure. C. For warranty repair work, be responsible for removing and replacing materials concealingvapor barrier. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Grace Construction Products Division, W.R. Grace. B. 0,Acns-Coming Fiberglass Foundation Systems. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. Plastic Membrane: Clear polyethylene film; 6 mils thick, standard width roll. B. Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. 2.03 ADHESIVE MATERIALS A. Surface Conditioner: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. B. Adhesives: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. C. "]Rinner and Cleaner: As recommended by adhesive manufacturer, compatible with sheet membrane. 2.04 ATTACHMENT MATERIALS A. As recommended by membrane manufacturer. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Sealant: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate surfaces are durable; free of matter detrimental to adhesion or application of vapor barrier system. SHEET MEMBRANE VAPOR BARRIER SECTION 07110 - 2 END OF SECTION SHEET MEMBRANE VAPOR BARRIER SECTION 07110 - 3 B. Verify items which penetrate surfaces to receive vapor barrier are securely installed. 302 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to rectivevapor barrier. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive vapor barrier in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not apply vapor barrier to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer or applicator. D. Seal cracks and joints with sealant maienals using depth to width ratio as recommended by sealant manufacturer. E. Apply surface conditioner at a rale recommended by manufacturer. Protect conditioner from rain or frost until dry. 3.03 INSTALLATION - LOOSE LAID A. Install membrane vapor barrier in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, B. Rall out membrane. Minimize wrinkles and bubbles. C. Overlap edges and ends and seal by contact tape, minimum 3 inches. Seal permanently water tight_ Apply uniform bead of sealant to joint edge. D. Reinforce membrane with multiple thicknesses of membrane material over static or moving joints. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected or uncovered membrane. C. Protect membrane from damage during placement ofconcrete. 3.06 SCHEDULE VAPOR BARRIER SCHEDULE A. Under Floor Slab: One ply of membrane vapor barrier; three plies at internal comers; adhesive applied. B. Under and up vertical sides of Grade Beam: One ply of membrane vapor barrier. END OF SECTION SHEET MEMBRANE VAPOR BARRIER SECTION 07110 - 3 arr SECTION 07115 ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING PARTI GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Self-adhesive elastomeric sheet membrane waterproofing. a• B. Counterflash membrane termination. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete substratre. .R B. Section 04300 -Concrete Masonry System: Masonry joints prepared to receive flashings. err C. Section 07212 - Board Insulation: Rigid thermal insulation cover. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM D42 - Rubber Properties in Tension. B. ASTM D624 - Rubber Property - Tear Resistance. WW C. ASTM D822 -Practice for Operating Light-and-Water-Exposure Apparatus (Carbon-arc type) for Testing Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. D. ASTM D 1004 - Initial Tear Resistance of Plastic Film and Sheeting. E. ASTM D2240 - Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness. _ F. ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Membrane Manufacturer: Company specializing in waterproofing sheet membranes with three years experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in application of specified waterproofing with three years documented experience. 1.05 MOCKUP A. Provide mockup of installed membrane under provisions of Section 01400. B. Mockupto represent conditions offinished work including internal and external comers, sainjointing, attachment method, scaling and counterflashing cover, control and expansion joints. C. Provide testing of mockup under provisions of Section 01400 to ensure weathertightness. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Submit shop drawings detailing special joint or termination conditions and conditions of interface with other materials. C. Submit product data for surface conditioner, flexible flashing, joint cover sheet, and jointand crack sealants, with temperature range for application of waterproofing membrane. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01400. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply waterproofing during inclement weather or when air temperature is below 40 degrees F. 1.08 WARRANTY $' A. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty: Include coverage for of materials and installation and resultant damage from failure ofinstallation to resist penetration of moisture. ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING SECTION 07115 - I PART PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - MEMBRANE A Betuthcne. B. Miradri. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. Membrane: 60 mm thick butyl or EPDM,maximum width roll, conforming to the following criteria: Tensile Strength ANSI/ASTM D412 Elongation ANSI/ASTM D412 Hardness, Shore A ASTM D2240 Tear Strength ANSI/ASTM D624 Moisture Vapor -perms ASTM E96 Exposure ASTM D822 B. Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. C. Flexible Flashings: 60 mm thick butyl. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. B. Protection Board: 1/2 inch thick asphalt impregnated board. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify items which penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing arc rigidly installed. B. Verify surfaces are free of cracks, depressions, waves, or projections which may be detrimental to successful installation, C. Do not apply waterproofing to damp, frozen, dirty, dusty, or deck surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer. D Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing. B. Sea] cracks andjointswith recommended material and sealant, Use proper depth -width ratio as recommended sealant manufacturer C. Clean surfaces of foreign matter detrimental to installation of membrane, D. Apply surface conditioner at a rate recommended by manufacturer. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install membrane waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Roll out membrane. Minimize wrinkles and bubbles. C. Remove release paper layer. Roll out on deck surface with mechanical roller to encourage full contact bond. D. Overlap edges and ends minimum 3 inches. Apply uniform bead of sealant to joint edge. E. Shingle joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage. F. Seat to adjoining surfaces. G. Continue membrane up vertical surfaces minimum 6 inches unless otherwise noted. H. Seal items penetrating membrane with counterfiashing membrane material. 1. Install flashings. Seal Watertight to membrane. J. Reinforce membrane with multiple thickness of membrane material ovcr joints, whether joints are static or moving. ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING SECTION 07115 - 2 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. 305 PROTECTION A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 0I500. B, Install protection board with lappet joints and retain in place for vertical surfaces. C. After installation, close off area to prevent unauthorized traffic. END OF SECTION ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING SECTION 07115 - 3 SECTION 07160 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cold applied asphalt bitumen damproofing. B. Protective cover. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02223 - Backfilling - B. Section 07110 - Sheet Membrane Vapor Barrier. C. Section 07212 - Board Insulation: Perimeter and horizontal insulation. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM D41 - Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing and Waterproofing. B. ASTM D449 - Asphalt Used in Dampproofing and Waterproofing. C. ASTM D450 - Coal -Tar Pitch Used in Rooting, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing. D. ASTM D43 - Creosote Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing. E. ASTM D2822 - Asphalt Roof Cement. F. ASTM D4022 - Coal Tar Roof Cement. G. NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) - Waterproofing Manual. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide properties of primer, bitumen, and mastics. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Waterproofing Manual. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1,07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and during application until membrane has cured. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Black Armor. B. Manville. C. GAF Products. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 HOT ASPHALTIC MATERIALS A. Asphalt Mastic: ASTM D491. B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41, compatible with substrate. BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING SECTION 07160 -1 END OF SECTION u BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING SECTION 07160 - 2 C. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D2822, Type 1. 2.03 ACCESSORIES 1 A. Protection Board: Rigid insulation specified in Section 07212. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate surfaces are durable, free of matter detrimental to adhesion or application of dampproofing system. B. Verify items which penetrate surfaces to receive dampproofing are securely installed. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive dampproofing. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive dampproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not apply dampproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer. D Apply mastic to seal penetrations, small cracks, or minor honeycomb in substrate. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Prime surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Rate shall be not less than '/a gal/100 sq ft. Permit primer to dry. B. Apply cold bitumen by trowel. C. Apply bitumen at a temperature limited by equiviscous temperature (EVI') plus or minus 25 degrees F; finish blowing temperature not to be exceeded for four hours. D. Apply bitumen in two coats, continuous and uniform, at a rate of I gal/100 sq ft per coat. E. Apply from 2 inches below finish grade elevation to top of footings. F. Seal items projecting through dampproofing surface with mastic. Seal watertight. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Immediately backfill against dampproofing to protect from damage. 3.05 SCHEDULE DAIAPPROOFING SCHEDULE _ A. Foundation Wall. Two, coatings of asphalt dampproofing. B. Exterior Walls; Two coatings of asphalt dampproofing applied to all bricks below grade. ' END OF SECTION u BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING SECTION 07160 - 2 ..r SECTION 07212 BOARD INSULATION ar PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Board insulation in between masonry cavity wall system and at roof system and or for exterior wall insulation. +Ad 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04300 - Concrete Masonry System: Board insulation on wall construction. B. Section 07213 - Batt and Blanket Insulation. 1.03 REFERENCES AW A. ASTM C578 - Preformed Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. ^� B. ASTM E96 - Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. C. FS HH -I-530 - Insulation Board, Thermal, Unfaced, Polyurethane or Polyisocyanurate. D. FS HH-I-1972/GEN - Insulation Board, Thermal, Faced, Polyurethane or Polyisocyanurate. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS aur A. Materials of this Section shall provide continuity of thermal barrier at building enclosure elements, B. Materials of this Section shall provide continuity of surface adhesion for built-up roofing system. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations, and thermal ratings. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special environmental conditions required for installation, installation techniques, and storage. yrr D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS - INSULATION MATERIALS A. Celotex. B. CertainTeed Insulation. C. Manville. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Polystyrene Insulation Type A: ASTM C578; molded bead type, conforming to the following: Thermal Resistance R of 3.7 Thickness Thickness indicated .. Board Size Manufacturer's Standard BOARD INSULATION SECTION 07212 - 1 3.05 SCHEDULES BOARD INSULATION SECTION 07212 - 2 Compressive Strength Minimum 10 psi Water Absorption In accordance with ANSUASTM 2842 4 percent by volume maximum Edges Square B. Polystyrene Insulation Type B: ASTM 0578 Type VI; extruded cellular type, conforming to the following: Thermal Resistance R of 5.0 Thickness Thickness indicated Board Size Manufacturer's Standard Compressive Strength Minimum 30 psi Water Absorption In accordance with ANSUASTM2842 0.3 percent by volume maximum Edges Square 2.03 ADHESIVES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Tape: Polyethylene type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch wide. B. Insulation Fasteners: Impale clip of galvanized steel, to be adhered or mechanically fastened to surface to receive board insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate, capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place. C. Protective Boards: Wood fiberboard, 114 inch thick. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation boards are dry and ready to receive insulation. C. Verify substrate surface is flat, free of honeycomb fins, irregularities and materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond. 3.02 INSTALLATION - ROOFING SYSTEM A. Adhere Type A or B insulation board to roof deck to receive built-up roofing system according to the roofing system manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR WALLS A. Adhere a one inch wide strip of polyethylene over joint with double beads of adhesive each side ofjoint. Tape seal joints between sheets. Extend sheet full height of joint. B. Apply adhesive in three continuous beads per board length. Daub adhesive tight to protrusions. C. Install boards on wall surface, vertically. Place membrane surface of insulation against adhesive. D. Place boards in a method to maximize contact bedding. Stagger end joints. Butt edges and ends tight to adjacent board and to protrusions. E. Tape insulation board joints. 3.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. B. Do not permit Work to be damaged prior to covering insulation. 3.05 SCHEDULES BOARD INSULATION SECTION 07212 - 2 A. As adhering surface for built-up roofing system: Type A thickness as indicated on the Drawings. B. Exterior Wall Insulation: Type B, thickness as indicated on the Drawings. END OF SECTION BOARD INSULATION SECTION 07212 - 3 SECTION 07213 BATT INSULATION PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Batt insulation in ceiling construction. B. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation far Light Fume Construction and Manufactured Housing. B. FS HH -1-521 - Insulation Blankets, Thermal, (Mineral Fiber for Ambient Temperatures. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Materials of this Section shall provide continuity of thermal barrier at building enclosure elements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations. C. Manufacturer's Ccrtificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01039. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS - INSULATION MATERLALS A. Certain Teed Insulation. B. Manville. C. Owens-Corning. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 MATERL4LS A. Ban Insulation: FS HH -I-558; ASTM C665 preformed glass fiber batt; conforming to the following: Thermal Resistance R of 19. Thickness Six (6) inches. Batt Size Manufacturers' standard widths and lengths as required to coordinate with spaces to be insulated. Facing Unfaced B. Nails and/or Staples: Steel wire; galvanized; type and size to suit application. C. Tape: Polyethylene self- adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation are dry and ready to receive insulation. BATT INSULATION SECTION - 07213 - l 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in exterior ceiling spaces without gaps or voids. C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. D. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of insulation. Leave no gaps or voids, E. Install with factory applied membrane facing warm side of building spaces. Lap ends and side flanges of membrane over framing members. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. Attic Insulation: R19 batt, unlaced. END OF SECTION BATT INSULATION SECTION - 07213 - 2 SECTION 07214 SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKET INSULATION PARTi GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sound attenuation/control blanketlbatt insulation in wall construction. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM Ego - Fire Hazard Classification of 25150 or less; ASTM C-665, Type 1. B. HH -1-521 F, Type 1. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Materials of this Section shall provide sound control between adjacent spaces. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01034. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS - INSULATION MATERIALS A. Certain Teed Insulation. B. Manville. C. Owens-Corning. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Sound Control Batt Insulation: HH -1-521F; ASTM C665 preformed glass fiber batt; conforming to the following: STC Rating 47 minimum.. Thickness 2 3/4 inches. Batt Size Manufacturers' standard widths and lengths as required to coordinate with spaces to be insulated. Facing Unfaced B. Nails and/or Staples: Steel wire; galvanized; type and size to suit application. C. Tape: Polyethylene self- adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01034. B. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation are dry and ready to receive insulation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. install insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions. SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKET INSULATION SECTION - 07214 - I B. Install in all interior wall spaces without gaps or voids. C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. D. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of insulation. Leave no gaps or voids. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. In all interior partitions. END OF SECTION SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKET INSULATION SECTION - 07214 - 2 SECTION 07610 STANDING SEAM ROOF PART GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The following is a description of the metal roof as per the contract drawings. The panels, flashing, clips, ridge material, endlaps, and fasteners shall be as described here and in the contract drawings, unless otherwise approved. The roof support (structural) system and counter flashings are not included in this Section. 1.02 PANELS A. The panels shall be UL90 rated, malformed, 24 gauge, G90 Galvalume steel sheet, whether prepainted or bare, having a minimum yield of 50,000 PSI. B. The panels shall be 18" widths with a 3" high rib on each side. C. One side of the panel shall be female in configuration, suitable to accept the other male side, and form a locking assembly. D. Maximum panel length shall be no more than 45'- 0". E. The panels shall be factory notched at both ends so that field installation can commence and end starting from either end or side of the building. F. Panel sidelaps shall have a factory applied hot melt mastic (see sealants and closures). 1.03 ENDLAPS A. Pre -punched endlaps shall have an 18 gauge pre -punched backup plate and a 16 gauge pre -punched cinch strap for proper placement of fasteners. B. Mastic (see sealants and closures) shall be applied between the panels and secured with 1/4 -14 x I" self -tapping fasteners through the cinch strap, panels, and backup plate to form a compression joint. 1.04 FASTENERS A. Eave - #14 x 1-1/4" ZAC self -driller with neoprene washer. B. Endlaps - # 14 x l" ZAC self -tapper without washer. C, Ridge - # 14 x l- 1/4" ZAC self -driller with neoprene washer. D. Clips to purlin - #1/4 x 14 x l" self -driller with washer. E. Clips to bar joist - # 12 - 24 x 1-1/4" self -driller with washer. F. Trim to panel - #t 14 x 718" ZAC Lap Tek with neoprene washer. 1.05 CLIPS A. All clips shall have factory applied mastic and be designed so that movements between the panel and the clip does not occur. I. Utility clips - shall be 3" in height, to be used when insulation is not required. 2. Low fixed clips - shall be 3-3/8" in height providing a 318" clearance for insulation between the panel and the purlin or joist, to reduce water ponding on low pitch roofs. (Not available for Double -Lok system.) 3. }sigh fixed clips - shall be 4-318" in height to accommodate a 1" thermal spacer for added insulation at the purlins. (Not available for Double -Lok system.) 4. High or low floating clips - shall be either 3-3/8" or 4-3/8" in height (see contract drawings). Floating clips shall provide a minimum of 2-112" travel to allow for expansion and contraction. Floating clips shall be able to articulate to handle standard purlin manufacturing tolerances. 1.06 SEALANTS AND CLOSURES A. Factory applied sealant used in panel sidelaps shall be a hot melt, foamable mastic - Q41A. B. Field applied sealant used at the endlaps, eaves, ridge assembly, and gable flashings shall be 1000/6 solids, butyl -based elamomeric tape sealer, furnished in roll form or pre-cut to length. C. Outside closures shall be manufactured from the same materials as the roof panels. D. Inside closures shall be 18 gauge metal or neoprene, 1.07 FLASHINGS AND TRIM STANDING SEAM ROOF SECTION 07610 -1 END OF SECTION STANDING SEAM ROOF SECTION 07610 - 2 A, Flashing at the rake (parallel to roof panels) and high cave shall not compromise the integrity of the roof system by constricting movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. B. The panel manufacturer shall supply the flexible membranes if applicable. C. All trim and flashing shall be manufactured from Galvalume steel shin whether prepainted or bare. 1,08 INSTALLATION A. Erection of the roof system shall be in complete accordance with the manufacturer's erection manual. B. The erection manual shall include procedures and designs to accommodate the out -0f --square and out -0f --plumb conditions that normally occur in construction. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. MBCI. B. Substitution: Under provisions of Section 01600. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION STANDING SEAM ROOF SECTION 07610 - 2 SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Coping, parapet, and cap flashings. B. Facias and scuppers. C. Roof and sill flashings. D. Counterflashings over bituminous base flashings. E. Roof joint cover flashings. F. Counterflashings at roof mounted mechanical equipment and vent stacks. 1.04 RELATED WORK A. Section 06112: Wood blocking, nailers, and grounds. B. Section 07631 - Gutters and Downspouts. C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. D. Section 09900 - Painting: Prime and finish painting. E. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials & Methods: Flashing sleeves and collars for mechanical items protruding through roofing membrane. F. Section 16010 - Basic Electrical Requirements: Flashing sleeves and collars for electrical items protruding through roofing membrane. 1.05 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM B32 - Solder Metal. B. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. C. ASTM D226 - Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. D. FS O -F-506 - Flux, Soldering, Paste and Liquid, E. FS QQ-S-571 - Solder, Tin Alloy. F. FS SS -C-153 - Cement, Bituminous, Plastic. G. NAAMM -Metal Finishes Handbook. H. NRCA (National Roofmg Contractors Association) - Roofing Manual. I. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Work ofthis Section is to physically protect membrane roofing, base flashings, and shingle roofing from damage that would pcnnit water leakage to building interior. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Company specializing in sheet metal flashing work with three years minimum experience. 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Describe material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, and installation details. C. Submit manufacturees installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300, SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 07620 - 1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 07620 - 2 D. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. E. Provide 12x 12 inch sized sample of metal flashing illustrating typical searnexternalcomer,internal comer, valley,ridge,junetion to vertical dissimilar surface, material, and finish. 1.09 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store products under provisions of Section 01600. B. Stack preformed material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. C. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration, staining, or damage. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel; ASTM A525, G90; 24 gage core steel. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Fastener: Galvanized steel with soft neoprene washers at exposed fasteners. Finish exposed fasteners same as flashing metal. B. Underlayment: ASTM D266; No. 15 asphalt saturated roofing felt. C. Protective Backing Paint: Bituminous. D. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper. E. Sealant: Polyurethane type specified in Section 07900. F Bedding Compound: Rubber -asphalt type manufactured by Manville. G. Plastic Cement: FS SS -C-153, Type I -asphaltic base cement. H. Reglem Surface mounted galvanized steel; face and ends covered with plastic tape. I. Solder: FS QQ-S-571, or ANSUASTM 1332; 50150 type. J. Flux: FS O -F-506. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Fabricate cleats and starter strips of 24 gauge type sheet metals, minimum 6 inches wide, interlockable with sheet. C. Form pieces in longest practical lengths. D. Hem exposed edges on underside 112 inch; miter and scam comers. E. Form material with flat Pock seam. F. Solder and seal metal joints. After soldering, remove flux. Wipe and wash solder joints clean. G. Fabricate comers from one piece with minimum lg inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. H. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 114 inch and hemmed to form drip. I. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing material. Return and brake edges. I. Form sheet metal pans 6 inch nominal square size, with 3 inch upstand, and 4 inch flanges. Fill pans watertight with plastic cement. 2.04 FINISH A. Shop prepare and prime exposed ferrous metal surfaces. Finish color shall be as selected by Architect. B. Backpaint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 07620 - 2 F 1 A. Verifyopenings, roofo pen gs, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips and reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B_ Verify membrane termination and base Flashings art in place, sealed, and secure. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance ofexisting conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. B. Install starter and edge snips, and cleats before starting installation_ C. install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels. Seal top of reglets with sealant. D. Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit Secure in place with lead wedges at maximum 12 inches on center. Pack remaining spaces with lead wool. Seal flashings into reglets with sealant L ' E. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only in locations approved by Arch itect/Engineer. F. Lap and sea] all joints. G. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. H. 1. Fit flashings tight in place. Make comers square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. Solder metal joints watertight for full metal surface contact. Afler soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water. J. Seal metal joints watertight. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Conform to drawing details included in AA, A]SI, CDA, NAAMM, SMACNA, and NBCA manual. END OF SECTION SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 07620 - 3 SECTION 07631 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Galvanized steel gutters and downspouts. B. Precast concrete splash blocks. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. E. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting of metal surfaces. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet. Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, structural (Physical) Quality. B. ANSUASTM B32 - Solder Metal. C. ASTM A525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. D. FS O -F-506 - Flux, Soldering, Paste and Liquid. E. FS TT -C494 - Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent Type, Acid Resistant. F. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Indicate on shop drawings, general construction, configurations, jointing methods and locations, fastening methods, locations, and installation details. C. Provide product data on prefabricated components. D. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. E. Submit two samples 6 x 6 inches in size illustrating component design, finish, color, and configuration. F. Submit manufacturces installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to SMACNA Manualand Drawings for nominal sizing of components for rainfall intensity determined by a storm occurrence of I in 5 years. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. C. Stack preformed material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to aid ventilation. Slope to drain. D. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration, staining, or damage. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Follansbee Steel. B. Manville. C. Merchant and Evans. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS SECTION 07631 -1 2.02 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A525, G90; 24 gage core steel. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Gutters: Rectangular SMACNA style profile. B. Downspouts: Rectangular profile. C. Scupper Linings, End Caps, Downspout Outlets, Rain Diverters, Gutter, Downspout, Straps, Support Brackets, Joint Fasteners, Down Spout Strainers, Gutter Screens, Downspout Header. Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts. Refer to Drawings for detains. D. Splash Blocks: Precast concrete type, of standard size and profile, minimum 3000 psi at 28 days, with minimum 5 percent air entrainment F. Downspout BooWShocs: See Drawings, 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Anchorage Devices: SMACNA requirements. B. Gutter Supports: Brackets or Straps. C. Downspout Supports: Brackets or Straps. D. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc chromate alkyd. E. Protective Back Coating: FS TT -C-394, bituminous. F. Solder: FS (Q -S-571; ANSVASTM B32; 50150 type. G. Flux: FS O -F-506. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Form gutters and downspouts of profiles and size indicated. B. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work,. C. Fabricate with required connection pieces. D. Form sections square, true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths and free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Allow for expansion at joints. E. Hem exposed edges of metal. F. Solder metal joins. After soldering, remove flux. Wipe and wash solder joints clean. H. Fabricate gutter and downspout accessories; solder watertight. 2.06 SHOP FINISHING A. Shop prepare and prime exposed ferrous metal surfaces. B. Backpaint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and conditions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3,02 INSTALLATION A. Install gutters, downspouts, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Join lengths with formed seams soldered watertight. Flash and solder gutters to downspouts and accessories. C. Apply backing paint to metal back surfaces. GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS SECTION 07631 - 2 D. E. F. G. H. Appty bituminous protective backing on surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials. Slope gutters 1/$ inch per foot minimum. Solder metal joints watertight for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizer solution and rinse with water. Connect downspouts to downspout boots/shoes. Seal connection watertight. Set splash blocks under downspouts. END OF SECTION GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS SECTION 07631 - 3 SECTION 07900 CAULKING AND SEALANTS PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces. B. Sealant and backing. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08111 - Standard Steel. Doors: Sealants used in conjunction with door frames. B. Section 08112 - Standard Steel Frames: Sealants used in conjunction with steel frames for doors. C. Section 08800 - Glazing: Sealants used in conjunction with glazing methods, 1.03 REFERENCES CAULKING AND SEALANTS SECTION 079013 - 1 A. ANSUASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materiais - Sponge or Expanded Rubber, B. ASTM C804 - Use of Solvent -Release Type Sealants. C. FS TT -S-001657 - Sealing Compound, Single Component, Butyl Rubber Based, solvent Release Type. D. FS TT -S-00230 - Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component. E. FS TT -S-001543 - Sealing Compound, Silicone Rubber Base. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Conform to Sealant and Waterproofers Institute requirements for materials and installation. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces. B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1,06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work of this Section with all Sections referencing this Section. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide three year war=ty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty: Include coverage of installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve air tight and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEALANTS A. Potysulphide Sealant: FS TT -S-00230, Type [I - non -sag, Class A, color as selected; manufactured by Pecora or Dap. B. Polyurethane Sealant: FS TT -S-00230, Type II - non -sag, Class A; color; as selected; manufactured by Pecora or Dap. C. Silicone Sealant: FS TT -S-01543, Class A, low modulus type; color; as selected, manufactured by Pt=ra or Dap. D. Butyl Sealant: FS TT -S-001657, black color; as manufactured by Pecora or Dap. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. CAULKING AND SEALANTS SECTION 079013 - 1 CAULKING AND SEALANTS SECTION 07900 - 2 B. Joint Cleaner: Non -corrosive and non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer, compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: ANSI/ASTM D 1056, round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PANT 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on Drawings and recommended by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces and substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Remove loose materials and foreign mattes which might impair adhesion of sealant. C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. D. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release sealants. E. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release sealants. B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required widthidepth ratios. C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 113 the joint width. D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. G. Tool joints concave. 3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500. B. Protect sealants until cured. 3.06 SCHEDULE Location Type Color A. Window perimeter Polysulphide Match Window Frame Color B. Door Frame/Walls Polyurethane As Selected C. Under Thresholds Butyl Black D. Plastic Laminate Comers As Required Match Laminate Color (Interior comers and corners abutting walls) CAULKING AND SEALANTS SECTION 07900 - 2 E. Penetrations through Rated Partitions Fire Rated Color as Selected F. Floor Finish Expansion Joints As Required Cotor as Selected 016- G_ Composite Metal Building Panels Polysulphide Match Existing H. Veneer Masonry Expansion JointsPolyurcd=e Dark Brown END OF SECTION � I � I � I 1 1 I I CAULKING AND SEALANTS SECTION 07900 - 3 SECTION 08111 STANDARD STEEL DOORS PART] GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non -rated steel doors. B. Fire Rated steel doors. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08112 - Standard Steel Frames. B. Section 08710 -Door Hardware. C. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting of doors. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI Al 17.1- Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People, B. ANSI/SDI-100 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames. C. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, D. ASTM C236 - Test Method for Steady -State Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Guarded Hot -Box, E. ASTM E 152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. F, ASTM E413 - Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class. G. Door Hardware Institute (DHI) - The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware. H. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 1. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests for Door Assemblies. J. UL IOB - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. K. SDI -108 - Selection and Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors. L. SDI -I l ID - Recommended Door, Frame and Hardware Schedule for Standard Steel doors and Frames. M. SDI -106 - Recommended Standard Door Type Nomenclature.. N. SDI -I 17 - Manufacturing Tolerances - Standard Steel Doors and Frames. O. ASTM A366, A620 and A568 - Cold Rolled Steel Guidelines. P. ASTM A569 and A568 - Hot Rolled, Pickled and Oil Steel Guidelines. Q. ASTM A526, A642 and A525 - Hot Dipped Zinc Coated Steel. R. ASTM A591 and A568 - Electrolytically Deposited Zinc Coated Steel for Anchors and Accessories. Class B coating weight. S. ANSI A151.1 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors and Hardware Reenforcing. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate door elevations, internal reinforcement, closure method, and cut-outs for glazing, louvers, and finish. C. Product Data: indicate door configurations, location of cut-outs for hardware reinforcement. D. Samples: Submit two samples of full thickness door, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating primed finish, core construction and closure method. E. Manufacturers Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. STEEL DOORS SECTION 08111 - 1 F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/SDI-100 and ANSI Al 17.1. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacttmngtheProducts specifiiedinthis section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Rated Door Construction: Conform to ASTM E 152, NFPA 252 and UL IOB. B. Fire Rated Door Construction: Rate of rise of 450 F degrees across door thickness. C_ Installed Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as scheduled. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Break packaging seal on—site to permit ventilation. 1.09 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DOOR MANUFACTURERS A. Kawneer Corporation: Steel Doors and/or Louvers. B- Fenestra Corporation: Steel Doors and/or Louvers. C. Steelcraft Corporation: Steel Doors and/or Louvers. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 DOORS A. Exterior Doors (Thermally Broken): SDI -100 Grade II, Model 1. B. Interior Doors (Fire Rated): SDI -100 Grade I, Model 1. 2.03 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Exterior Doors (Thermally Insulated and Broken). I. Face: 18 Ga. steel sheet in accordance with ANSIISD1-100. 2. Core: Polyurethane. 3. Total insulation R value of 12, measured in accordance with ASTM C236. B. Interior Doors (Fire Rated) L Face: 20 Ga. steel sheet in accordance with ANSUSDI-100. 2. Core: Fire Coreboard. 3. Fire Rating: As scheduled on the Drawings. STEEL DOORS SECTION 08111 - 2 2.04 ACCESSORIES A.A. Louvers: Manufacturer's standard to meet the requirements of the installation and to maintain the integrity of the fire; rating where and when applicable. 1. Material and Finish: IS Ga. rola formed steel; shop primed. 2. Louver Blade: Inverted "Y" blade, sight proof; fire rated when and where applicable to UL requirements. 3. Louver Free Area: Thirty (30) percent. 4. Frame: 18 Ga, steel, mitered and welded at comers; non -removable exterior side; interior side tamper proof screws. B. Primer: Zinc chromate type. C. Glazing Beads: 18 Ga_ steel bevel profile; mitered and welded at comers; non -removable exterior side; interior side tamper proof screws. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Removable Mull for Double Doors: 16 Ga. steel, shaped as application requires, specifically for double doors. B. Fabricate doors with hardware reinforcement welded in place. C. Artach non -removable fire rated label to each fire rated door unit. D. Close top and bottom edge of exterior doors with inverted steel channel closure. Sea] joints watertight. 2.06 FINISH A. Steel Sheet: In accordance with ANSI/SDI-100. B. Primer: Air dried or Baked. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of Section 01034_ B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with ANSUSDI-100 and DHI. B. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. C. Install door louvers, plumb and level. D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of fames in Section 08112 and hardware in Section 08700. E. Touch-up primer as required. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1116 inch measured with straight edge, corer to comer. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION STEEL DOORS SECTION 08111 - 3 C C I i SECTION 08112 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non -rated steel frames. B. Fire Rated steel frames. 1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Anchors and reinforcing for wall construction. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08111 - Standard Steel Doors. B. Section 08710 - Door Hardware. C. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting of frames. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ADA -AG - Guidelines for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. B, ANSI/SDI-100 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames. C. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. D. ASTM E152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. E. BHI - Door Hardware Institute: The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware. F. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. G. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests for Door Assemblies. H. UL l OB - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. I. SDI -I i I - Recommended Steel Door Frame Details. J. SDI -105 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. K. SDI -110 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames for Modular Masonry Construction. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate frame elevations, reinforcement, and finish. C. Product Data: Indicate frame configuration, anchor types and spacings, location of cut-outs for hardware, reinforcement. D. Samples: Submit two samples of frame, full size cross section, 12 inches long, illustrating frame construction, surface texture and primer calor and type. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/SDI-100 and ANSI Al 17, 1. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum threeyears documented experience. STEEL FRAMES SECTION 08112 - I 1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Rated Frame Construction: Conform to ASTM E152, NFPA 252 and UL 10B. B. Installed Frame Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class same as fire door. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Accept frames on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Deliver welded frames with a temporary spreader bar securely fastened to the bottom of each frame. D. Deliver knock down frames unassembled in securely strapped bundles. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.11 COORD[NATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate the work with frame opening construction, door and hardware installation. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 FRAME MANUFACTURERS A. Kewanee Corporation: Steel Frames. B. Fenestra Corporation: Steel Frames. C. Steelcraft corporation: Steel Frames. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 FRAMES A. Exterior Frames: 16 gage thick material, base metal thickness. B. Fire Rated Frames: Provide the type of frame assembly that has been successfully tested in accordance with the latest revision of ASTM E152, ANSUUL [0(b) or NFPA 252, whichever is required by the authority having jurisdiction over the project. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Silencers: Resilient rubber fitted into drilled hole. B. Primer: Zinc chromate type. C. Floor Anchors: Minimum 18 gage anchors for attachment to floor. D, lamb Anchors: Provide frames other than slip-on drywall type with a minimurn of three anchors per jamb as required for the adjoining wall construction. Provide anchors of not less than 18 gage steel or 7 gage diameter wire. E. Glazing Beads: Provide frame glazing beads in interior glazed openings and other locations where fixed glass is indicated in steel frames. Prepare frames for the type of glazing beads required to receive the glass and gaskets indicated. Miter beads at cornets. Glazing beads can either be the screw -on or snap -on types. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabrication of frames per opening requirements, 1. For masonry opening - Welded units. 2. For existing masonry opening - Knock down field assembly units. B. Fabricate frames with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place, including but not limited to, reinforcing for closets, hinges and others as may be necessary. C. Reinforce frames wider than 48 inches with roll formed steel channels fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top. STEEL FRAMES SECTION 08112 - 2 END OF SECTION STEEL FRAMES SECTION 08112 - 3 D, prepare fiamefor silencers. Providethreesinglesilencersforsingledoorsandmullionsofdoubledoorsonstrikeside. Providetwo single silencers on frame head at double doors without mullions. E. Fabricate frames to suit masonry wall coursing with 4 inch head member. 2.05 FINISH A. Steel Sheet: In accordance with ANSUSDI-100. B. Primer. Air dried or Baited. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3-02 INSTALLATION A. Install frames in accordance with ANSI/SDI-100 and DRI. B. Coordinate with masonry, wallboard and/or other wall construction for anchor placement. C. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. D. Coordinate installation of frames with installation of hardware specified in Section 08712 and doors in Section 08111. E. Install roll formed steel reinforcement channels between two abutting frames. Anchor to structure and floor. F. Install an additional jamb anchor for those frames that are in a wall condition that does not allow for the use of a floor anchor. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edges, crossed comer to comer. 3.04 SCHEDULE A. Refer to the Drawings for steel frame schedule. END OF SECTION STEEL FRAMES SECTION 08112 - 3 SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush wood doors, flush configuration; fire rated and non -rated. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08112 -Standard Steel Frames: Steel door frames. B. Section 08710 - Door Hardware. C. Section 09900 - Painting: Site finishing doors. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AWI - Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute. B. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. C. UL IOB - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. D. Warnock -Hersey - Certification Listings for fire doors, 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, special blocking for hardware. C. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perforin work in accordance with AM Quality Standard Section 1300, Premium Grade. B. Finish doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standard Section 1500. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Door Construction: Conform to UL IOB. B. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80, Class "C", for 20 minute fire rated class. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. 1.09 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 01700 to the following term: FLUSH WOOD DOORS SECTION 08211 -1 I . Interior Doors: Two (2) years. B. Include coverage for delamination ofveneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction_ PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER (ANDIOR REPRESENTATIVE.) FLUSH WOOD DOORS SECTION 08211 - 2 1 A. Dea Window and Door Co.: American Door Co. B. The Hallgren Co.: CanDor by Algoma Hardwoods. C. Weyerhaeuser Architectural Doors D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 DOOR TYPES A. Flush Interior Doors: 1-314 inches thick; solid core construction, fire rated and non -rated as indicated. 2.03 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Core (Solid, Non -Rated): AWI Section 1300, Type PC -Particleboard. B. Core (Solid, Fire Rated): AWI Section 1300, Flush Doors (Fire Doors). 2.04 FRAME CONSTRUCTION (Fire rated and non -rated) A. Red Oak Species. 2.05 FLUSH DOOR FACING A. Veneer Facing (Flush Interior Doors): AWI Premium quality species wood, rotary cut, with end matched grain, for transparent finish. 2.06 ADHESIVE A. Facing Adhesive: Type I - waterproof. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Fabricate non -rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards requirements. B. Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards and to UL 10B requirements. Attach fire rating label to door. C. Astragals for Fire Rated Double Doors: Treated wood, T shaped, overlapping and recessed at face edge at mid -door thickness, specifically for double doors. D. Provide lock blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement. E. Vertical Exposed Edge of Stiles: Of same species as veneer facing. Hardwood for transparent finish. F. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing. G. Bond edge banding to cores. H. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware. Provide solid blocking for through bolted hardware. 1. Factory pre -fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings. 2.08 FINISH A. Factory finish doors and frames in accordance with AWI Quality Standard Section 1500 to the following finish designations: 1. Finish F3 Doors and Frames: System #3 - transparent, conversion varnish alkyd -urea, Premium quality, sheen. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify frame opening conditions under provisions of Section 01039. FLUSH WOOD DOORS SECTION 08211 - 2 1 END OF SECTION �1 I I I I I I 1� IFLUSH WOOD DOORS SECTION 08211 - 3 B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out -of -tolerance for size or alignment - 3.02 INSTALLATION A. install fire rated and non -rated doors and frames in accordance with AWT Quality Standard, NFPA 80 and to Warnock Hersey requirements. B. frames shall be set plumb and square, and rigidly anchored in place using finish type nails. Double wedge blocking shall be provided new the top, bottom, and mid -point of each jamb. door by bath jamb edges. C. Trim non -rated width cutting equally on D. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 314 inch. Trim fire door height at bottom edge only, in accordance with fire rating requirements. E. Pilot dnll screw and bolt holes. F. Machine cut for hardware. Core for handsets and cylinders. G. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08112 and hardware specified in Section 08710. 3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Conform to AWl requirements for fit and clearance tolerances. B. Conform to ANVI Section 1300 requirements for maximum diagonal distortion. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement. 3.05 SCHEDULE rr A. Reference the Drawings for the Door and Frame Schedules. END OF SECTION �1 I I I I I I 1� IFLUSH WOOD DOORS SECTION 08211 - 3 SECTION 08360 SECTIONAL DOORS me PART GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All ofthe Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. The work of this Section includes upward -acting sectional doors. B. Related Sections: Other specification sections which directly relate to the work of this Section include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metal; metal framing and supports. 2. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware; key cylinders for locks. 3. Section 09900 - Painting; field painting. 4. Section 16902 - Electrical Controls; wiring. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each type of sectional door. Include both published data and any specific data prepared for this project. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for approval prior to fabrication. Include detailed plans, elevations, details of framing members, required clearances, anchors, and accessories. Include relationship with adjacent materials. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Sectional doors shall be manufactured by a firm with a minimum of five years experience in the fabrication and installation of sectional doors. Manufacturers proposed for use, which are not named in these specifications, shall submit evidence of ability to meet performance and fabrication requirements specified, and include a list of five projects of similar design and complexity completed within the past five years. B. Installer: Installation of sectional doors shall be performed by the authorized representative of the manufacturer. C. Singic-Source Responsibility: Provide doors, tracks, motors, and accessories from one manufacturer for each type of door. Provide secondary components from source acceptable to manufacturer of primary components. D. Pte -Installation Conference: Schedule and convene a pre -installation conferencejust prior to commencement of field operations, to establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and to coordinate this work with related and adjacent work. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials and products in labeled protective packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Protect from damage from weather, excessive temperatures and construction operations. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. Provide sectional doors by Overhead Door Corporation, Dallas, Texas. 2.02 STEEL SECTIONAL DOORS A. Trade Reference: 444 Series Steel Doors by Overhead Door Corporation. B. Sectional Door Assembly: Steel door assembly with tongue -and -groove nominal box construction to form weathertight joints and provide full -width interlocking structural rigidity. Units shall have the following characteristics: 1. Panel Thickness: 1-112". 2. Exterior Surface: Ribbed. 3. Steel: Minimum 24 gauge, galvanized. 4. Standard Springs: 10,000 cycles. (High cycles.) 5. Partial Glazing of Steel Panels: (118" double strength glass.) C. Finish and Color: White baked on polyester coating. D. Windload Design: ANSi1NAGDM 102 standards and as required by code. SECTIONAL DOORS SECTION 08360 - 1 E. hardware: Galvanized steel hinges and fixtures. Sall bearing rollers with hardened steel races. F. Lock: Interior mounted slide lock. (Five pin tumbler keyed lock.) G. Weatherstripping: Flexible weather -resistant material at bottom section. 1-1. Track: Provide track as recommended by manufacturer to suit loading required and clearances available. 1. Electric MowOpmdon: Provide UL.listed cicarieoperator, sive and type as recommended by manufacturer to move door in either direction at not less than 2/3 foot nor more than I foot per second. 1. Entrapment Protection: Photoelectric sensors. 2. Operator Controls: Push-button and key, operated control stations with open, close, and stop buttons for flush mounting, for both interior and exterior location. 3. Special Operation: Explosion and dust ignition proof control wiring. PART EXECLMON 3.01 PREPARATION A. Take field dimensions and examine conditions of substrates, supports, and other conditions under which this work is to be performed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Strictly comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper clearances and allow for maintenance. B. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper operating procedures and maintenance schedule. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Test sectional doors for proper operation and adjust as necessary to provide proper operation without binding or distortion. B. Touch-up damaged coatings and finishes and repair minor damage. Clean exposed surfaces using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of material or product being cleaned. END OF SECTION SECTIONAL DOORS SECTION 08360 - 2 err SECTION 08411 ALUMINUM WINDOW FRAMING SYSTEM PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum window frames. B. Concealed Vent System. C. Perimeter sealant. 1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Placement of structural supporting anchors. 1.03 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Supply of structural supporting anchors for placement by this section. B. Section 08710 - Door Hardware: Hardware items other than specified in this section. 1.04 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01045 - Cutting and Patching: Preparation of adjacent work to receive work of this section. B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Metal fabricated attachment devices and framed openings. C. Section 07900 - Sealants: System perimeter sealant and back-up materials. D. Section 08800 - Glazing. E. Section 12512 - Horizontal Louver Blinds: Attachments to framing members. 1.05 REFERENCES A. AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual. B. HAMA - Curtain Wall Manual 910 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site. C. AAMA 501 - Methods of Test for Metal Curtain Walls. D. AAMA 603.8 - Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Extruded Aluminum. E. AAMA 605.2 - Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels. F. AAMA 606.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. G. AAMA 607.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. H. AAMA 608.1 - Specification and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. 1. AAMA SFM-1 - Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual. J. ANSI Al 17.1 - Safety Standards for the Handicapped. K. ANSI/ASTM A36 - Structural Steel. L. ANSI/ASTM A386 - Zine Coating (Hot Dip) on Assembled Steel Products, M. ANSI/ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality. N. ANSI/ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. O. ANSI/ASTM B221 - Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube. P. ANSI/ASTM E283 - Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors. Q. ANSIIASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. ALUMINUM WINDOW FRAMING SYSTEM SECTION 0841 l - 1 R. ANSUASTM E331 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. S. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council. 1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Aluminumwindow framing system with concealed vent, including tubularaluminum sections with supplementary internal support framing, shop fabricated, factory pre -finished, insulated glassl, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1.07 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall as measured in accordance with ANSUASTM E330. B. Limit mullion deflection to 11200; with full recovery of glazing materials. C. System to accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement within system, movement between system and peripheral construction, dynamic loading and release of loads, deflection of structural support framing. D. Limit air leakage through assembly to 0.06 cfm/minlsq R ofwall area, measured ata reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf as measured in accordance with AAMA 501. E Vapor Sea[ with Interior Atmospheric Pressure of I inch sp, 72 degreesF, 40 Percent RH: No failure. F. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glass and inner sheet of infill panel and heel bead of glazing compound. G. System to provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by a cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental affect to system components. H. Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system, to the exterior by a weep drainage network. 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work and expansion. and contraction joint location and details. C. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, internal drainage details and sealant. D. Submit two samples 12 x 12 inches in size illustrating pre -finished aluminum surface, glass units, insulating glass, and glazing materials. E. Manufacturers Certificate: Certify thatProducts meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with AAMA SFM-I and AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual. B. Conform to requirements of ANSI Al 17.1. L10 QUALIFICATIONS A Manufacturer and Installer: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum three years documented experience. L 1 I PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this Section, under provisions of Section 01039. 1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Handle work of this section in accordance with AAMA - Curtain Wall Manual #10. ALUMINUM WINDOW FRAMING SYSTEM SECTION 08411 - 2 C. Protect pre -finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F during a 48 hours after installation, 1.14 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.15 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01039. 1.16 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty: Include coverage for complete system for failure to meet specified requirements. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Kawneer Company, Inc.. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ANSI/ASTM B221; 6063 alloy, T5 temper. B. Sheet Aluminum: ANSI/ASTM 8209; 6063 alloy, TS temper. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Frame: Kawneer Trifab 451 T system; thermally broken with interior tubular section insulated from exterior; flush glazing stops; drainage holes; internal weep drainage system. 2.04 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS A. Glass and Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08800 of Types described below: L Glass in Exterior Lights: Tinted tempered. 2.05 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Sealant and Backing Materials: As specified in Section 07900 of Types described below. 1. Perimeter Sealant: Silicone. 2.06 HARDWARE A. As required for proper operation of vent. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal, B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. D. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. 2.08 FINISHES A. Finish coatings to conform to AAMA 603.8. B. Exterior Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: AAMA A41 anodized to 215 -RI thickness, prepared with a mechanical M pre-treatment, anodized to selected color. ALUMINUM WINDOW FRAMING SYSTEM SECTION 08411 - 3 C. Interior Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: AAMA A41 anodized to 21 S -RI thickness, prepared with a mechanical M pre-treatment, anodized to selected color. D. Concealed Steel Items: Galvanized in accordance with ANSUASTM A386 to 2.0 oz/sq ft. Primed with iron oxide paint. E. Apply one coat coats of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify site opening conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. C. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this Section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Install sill flashings. G. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. H. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. I. Install operating vent. J. Install flashings and fittings, K. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure. L. Install hardware using templates provided. M. Install glass in accordance with Section 08800, to glazing method required to achieve performance criteria. N, Install perimeter sealant to method required to achieve performance criteria, backing materials, and installation criteria in accordance with Section 07900. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non -cumulative or 1116 inches per 10 feet, whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust operating vent for smooth operation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Remove protective material from pre -finished aluminum surfaces. C. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. D. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. ALUMINUM WINDOW FRAMING SYSTEM SECTION 08411 - 4 3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. B. Protect finished Work from damage. END OF SECTION ALUMINUM WINDOW FRAMING SYSTEM SECTION 06411 - 5 SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE PARTI GENERAL 1,0 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hardware for wood, hollow steel, and aluminum doors. 1. Refer to the Drawings for exact types of doors included in the project. B. Thresholds. C. Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets, 1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 08112 - Steel Frames: Furnish templates for frame preparation. B. Section 08111 - Steel Doors: Furnish templates for door preparation. C. Section 08 11 I - Steel Doors: Furnish lock cylinders for installation. D. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors: Furnish templates for door preparation. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06410 - Custom Casework: Cabinet hardware. B. Section 08111 - Steel Doors. C. Section 08112 - Steel Frames. D. Section 08360 - Sectional Overhead. E. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Hardware for same except cylinders. F. Section 10441 - Plastic Signs. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ANSI Al 17.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. B. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. C. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute - Quality Standards. D. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. E. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. F. UL 106 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. G. UL 305 - Panic Hardware. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware, electrical characteristics and connection requirements, and appropriate dimensions. C. Submit manufacturer's parts lists, templates, and re -ordering data. D. Samples: Submit l sample of hinge, latchset, and accessory items illustrating style, color, and finish. E. Samples: Will be returned with the Submittal. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and maintenance requirements. 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08710 - 1 B. Record actual locations of installed cylinders and their master key code. 1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with the following requirements: 1. ANSI Al 17.1 - Specifications forMaking Buildings and Facilities Accessibletoand Usable byPhysically Handicapped People. 2. NFPA 101. 3. ANSI A117. 1. 4. NFPA 80. 5. NFPA 252. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08710 - 2 A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying institutional door hardware with three years documented experience. 1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for requirements applicable to fire rated doors and frames. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.11 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of Section 01039. 1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule. C. Deliver keys to Architect/Engineer by security shipment direct from hardware supplier. L13 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 0 103 9. B. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of intemat reinforcement for door hardware. 1.14 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty: Include coverage for door closers and operators. 1.15 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide maintenance materials under provisions of 01700. B. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component. C. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer. 1.16 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01700, B. Provide ten extra key lock cylinders for each master keyed group. PART2 PRODUCTS DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08710 - 2 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Hinges: Hager Hinge. B. Pivots: Hager Hinge. C. Latch Sets: Schlage Lock. D. Push/Pulls: Schlage Lock. E. Cylinder Locks: Schlage Lock. F. Mortise Locks: Schlage Lock. G. Electric Locks: Von Duprin. H. Exit Devices: Schlage Lock, 1. Closers: LCN. J. Overhead Holders: LCN. K. Manual Bolts: Schlage Lock, L. Kick and Push Plates: Ives. M. Sliding Door Hardware: K & V. N. Bifolding Door Hardware: Stanley. O. Protection Plates: Ives. P. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 KEYING A. Door Locks for New Facilities; Grandmaster keyed. Include construction keying, control keying with removable core cylinders. B. Door Locks for Additions to Existing Facilities: Key to existing keying system. C. Supply keys in the following quantities: I. 6 master keys. 2. 6 grand master keys. 3. 6 construction keys. 4. 6 control keys and 3 extra cylinder cores. 5. 6 change keys for each lock. 2.03 KEY CABINET A. Cabinet Construction: Sheet steel construction, piano hinged door with cylinder type lock master keyed to building system. B. Cabinet Size: Size for project keys plus 10 percent growth. C. Hooks for keys. D. Horizontal metal strips for key hook labelling with clear plastic strip cover over labels. E. Finish: Baked enamel, finish, color as selected. 2.04 FINISHES A. Finishes: Identified in schedule at end of section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 0103'9. B. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08710 - 3 DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08710 - 4 C. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct characteristics. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer, C. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: 1, Shall conform to requirements of the Americans With Disabilities Act. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. B. Architectural Hardware Consultant to inspect installation and certify that hardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. , B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation, 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish. 3.06 SCHEDULES A. See Hardware Schedule in the Drawings for Item, Type and Finish. END OF SECTION DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08710 - 4 t■r SECTION 08800 GLAZING L PART GENERAL 1 1.01 SECTION A. INCLUDES Glass for frame and glazing steel windows. B. Glass for glazing aluminum storefront systems. C. Metal framed mirrors. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and back-up material. B. Section 08411 - Aluminum Window Framing System. C. Section 10800 - Toilet Accessories: Mirrors. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Used in Buildings. B. FGMA - Glazing Manual. C. FGMA - Sealant Manual. D. FS TT -S-001657 - Sealing Compound, Single Component, Butyl Rubber Based, Solvent Release Type. E. FS TT -S-00230 - Scaling Compounds, Synthetic -Rubber Base, Single Component, Chemically Curing. F. FS TT -S-01543 - Sealing Compound, Silicone Rubber Base. G. Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Glass and glazing materials of this Section shall provide continuity of building enclosure vapor and air barrier: 1. In conjunction with materials described in Section 07900. r2. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant. r B. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of glass as calculated as measured in accordance with ANSUASTM E330. C. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. �.. B. Product Data on Glass Types Specified: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. D. Samples: Submit two samples, 12 x 12 inch in size, glass coloration.. E. Samples: Submit 6 inch long bead of glazing sealant, color as selected. F. Manufacturer's installation Instructions: Indicate special precautions required. G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that glass, meets or exceeds specified requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual, FGMA Sealant Manual, SIGMA and laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation methods. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. GLAZING SECTION 08800 - 1 1.07 MOCKUP A. Provide mockup of window including glass and perimeter air and vapor barrier seal], under provisions of Section 01400 B. Mockup may remain as pan of the Work. 1.08 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this Section, under provisions of Section 01039. 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop Drawings. L11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate the Work with glazing frames, wall openings, and perimeter air and vapor seal to adjacent Work. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty: Include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. 1.13 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01700.. B. Provide two panes of each glass size and each glass type specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS - FLAT GLASS MATERIALS A, Ford Glass Company. B. Libby -Owens Ford Company. C. PPG Industries D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 FLAT GLASS MATERIALS A. Safety Glass (Type FG -B): Clear; laminated with plastic interlayer; conforming to ANSI 297.1; IA inch thick minimum. B. Tinted Glass (Type FG -C): Float type, tempered, light reducing in gray or bronze color; 114 inch thick minimum. Exact color as selected by Arch itecL(Engineer. C. Wire Glass (Type FG -G): Clear, polished both sides, diagonal mesh of wuven stainless steel wire of 1/2 inch grid size; 114 inch thick. D. Mirror Glass (Type FG -H): ASTM 01036, Type I transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality q I mirror select; 114 inch thick minimum, sizes noted on Drawings. E. One Inch Insulating Glass (Type FG -C): Outside pane- Float type, tempered, Tinted Glass as described above; Inside pane -Clear, Float type, tempered, 114 inch thick. 2.03 MANUFACTURERS - GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Norton Glazing Products. B. Tremco Glazing Systems. GLAZING SECTION 08800 - 2 2.04 2.05 2.06 PART 3.01 3.02 3.03 3.04 C. PPG Industries D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Butyl Sealant (Type GC -B): Single Component; Shore A hardness of 10-20 black color; non -skinning. B. Silicone Sealant (Type GC -F): Single component, solvent curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non -staining; cured Share A hardness of 15-25; color as selected. GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 - 90 Shore A durometer hardness, length of0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1116 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 - 60 Shore A durometer hardness, minimum 3 inch long x one half the height ofthe glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face. C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 -15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; size as required. D. Glazing Splines: Resilient polyvinyl chloride extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot. E. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. F. Mirror Attachment Accessories: Stainless steel clips. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS A. Provide testing and analysis of glass under provisions of Section 01400. B. Test samples in accordance with ANSI Z97. I. EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Verify prepared openings under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. C. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to receive glazing. PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. EXTERIOR - WET METHOD (SEALANT AND SEALANT) A. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points and install glazing pane or unit. B. Install removable stops with glazing centered in space by inserting spacer shims both sides at 24 inch intervals,) /4 inch below sight line. C. Fill gaps between glazing and stops with silicone type sealant to depth of bite on glazing, but not more than 318 inch below sight line to ensure full contact with glazing and continue the air and vapor seal. D. Apply sealant to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth. INTERIOR - DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE) A. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1116 inch above sight line. B. Place setting blocks at 114 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from comers. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit. GLAZING SECTION 08800 - 3 D. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above. E. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact. F. Knife trim protruding tape. 3.05 INSTALLATION - MIRRORS A. Set mirrors with clips. Anchor rigidly to wall construction. B. Place plumb and level. 3.06 QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. B. Inspection will monitor quality of glazing, 3.07 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of01700. B. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. C. Remove labels atter work is complete. D, Clean glass and mirrors. 3.08 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500. ' B. After installation, mark pane with an'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste - GLAZING SECTION 08800 - 4 I,yxr�rc.�.rti�n METAL STUD FRAMING SYSTEM PART[ GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A- The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM C 645 (1983) Non—Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Fuming Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board ASTM C 754 (1982) lnstalWion of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw—Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water—Resistant Backing Board ASTM C 954 (1986) Steel Drill Screws fur the Application ofGypsum Board or Metal Plaster Base to Steel Studs from 0.033 inch (0 84 mm) to 0.1 12 inch (2.84 mm) In Thickness ASTM C 1002 (1983) Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board FACTORY MUTUAL SYSTEM (FM) FM42 (1987) Specification for Tested Products Guide 1.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Except where otherwise indicated or specified, the work shall conform to and shall be applied as indicated in the finish schedule and on the drawings. _ 1,03 SUBMITTALS: The followmg shall be submitted in accordance with the Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract.: SUBMITTALS: A. Detail Drawings Detail Drawings and installation details shall be submitted for ceiling framing and furring, for special wall framing, and for framed openings in walls and ceilings. B. Certificates of Compliance Certificates attesting that the steel framing meets the requirements specified shall be furnished. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 MATERIALS: Materials shall conform to the requirements specified below. Miscellaneous items not otherwise specified shall be as recommended by the stud manufacturer and approved prior to use. Power driven fasteners may be used for installation of floor tracks. A. Steel Framing, Furring, and Related Items: For lengths up to 10'-0", steel studs shall be 3 518" thick, minimum 20 gauge, 16 inches on center, product similar to SJ type as produced by USG. L For lengths taller than 10'-0", steel studs shall be 3 5/8 inches x 1 518 inches, minimum 18 gauge, 16 inches on center. 2_ For exterior wall framing, steel studs shall be 6 inches x 1 518 inches, minimum 16 gauge, lb inches on center. Exterior tracks shall be set in mastic. B. Screws: ASTM C 1002, Type G for attachment of gypsum board to gypsum board, Type S for attachment to light—gauge steel members, Type W for attachment to wood members; ASTM C 954 for attachment to steel members 0.033-- to 0.112—inch thick. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 STEEL, FRAMING: Installation of steel framing shall conform to ASTM C 754, except that limiting heights shall be according to manufacturer's current published data. Framing shall be spaced a maximum of 16 inches on center. A. Partition Framing System: Metal framing and furring system shall be capable of carrying a transverse toad of 5 psf without exceeding either the allowable stress or a deflection of LI240. B. Shaftwall Framing System: Installation of shaftwall framing system shall be in accordance with Manufacturees printed instructions. Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance shall be required for the shafiwall system. ' C. Ceiling Openings: Support members shall be provided at ceiling openings such as required for access panels, recessed light ftxtures, and for air supply or exhaust. Support members of not less than 1—% inch main runner channels and vertically installed suspension wires or straps shall be located to provide at least the minimum support specified herein for furring and wal[board attachment. Intermediate structural members, although not a part of the structural system, shall be provided for attachment or suspension of METAL STUD FRAMING SYSTEM SECTION 09111 - t support members. At existing gypsum board ceilings, reattach existing gypsum board as required or replace as needed to securely seal all penetrations of the gypsum board ceiling. D. Wall Openings: For will openings such as required for doors, pass—through openings, and access panels, the framing system shall provide for the installation and anchorage of the required subframes or finish frames. At rough openings, such as door openings, ofmore than 30—inches wide the studs at such openings shall be 0.0329 -inch minimum bare metal thickness, doubled, and grouted along the jamb. END OF SECTION METAL STUD FRAMING SYSTEM SECTION 09111 - 2 1 01 SECTION 09260 GYPSUM WALLBOARD PARTI GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM C 36 (1985) Gypsum Wallboard ASTM C 475 (198 1) Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction ASTM C 514 (1984) Nails for the Application of Gypsum Wallboard ASTM C 840 (1987) Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board ASTM C 954 (1986) Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Base to Steel Studs from 0.033 inch (0.84 mm) to 0.112 inch (2.84 mm) in Thickness. ASTM C 1002 (1983) Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board FACTORY MUTUAL SYSTEM (FM) PM -02 (1987) Specification for Tested Products Guide 1.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Except where otherwise indicated or specified, the work shall conform to and shall be applied as indicated in the finish schedule and on the drawings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The following shall be submitted in accordance with the Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract.: SUBMITTALS: B. Certificates of Compliance Certificates attesting that the wallboard meets the requirements specified shall be furnished. 1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Wallboard delivered priortouse shall bestored offtheground within a completely enclosed structure or completely enclosed within a weathertight covering. Wallboard shall be dry, free of warpage, and have bundling tape intact immediately prior to use. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials shall conform to the requirements specified below. Miscellaneous items not otherwise specified shall be as recommended by the wallboard manufacturer and approved prior to use. The long edges of wallboard shall be tapered, except when used as abase laver in a double layer application. Power driven fasteners may be used only when approved in writing. Thickness of wallboard shall comply with the systems as detailed on the drawings. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36; 518", Type X (Special Fire—Resistant), bevel edge (we), 48—inches wide. C. Joint Treatment Materials: ASTM C 475. L Taping or Embedding Compound: Specifically formulated and manufactured for use in embedding tape at gypsum wallboard joints and fastener heads and completely compatible with tape and substrate. 2_ Finishing or Topping Compound: Specifically formulated and manufactmd for use as a finishing compound. Texture of finish wall surface shall be a "lightly rolled" texture. A 12 inch x 12 inch sample offinish texture shall be submitted to the Architect for approval, 3. A3 -Purpose Compound: Specifically formulated and manufactured to serve as both a taping and a finishing compound and compatible with tape and substrate. 4. Joint Tape: Reinforcing tape recommended by the manufacturer. D. Nails: ASTM C 514. E. Screws: ASTM C 1002, Type G for attachment of gypsum board to gypsum board, Type S for attachment to light—gauge steel members, Type W for attachment to wood members; ASTM C 954 for attachment to steel members 0.033— to 0. l 12 --inch thick. GYPSUM WALLBOARD SECTION 09260 - 1 F. Comerbead and Edge Trim: Corrosion protective -coated steel designed for its intended use. Flanges shall be free ofdirt, grease, and other materials that may adversely affect the bond of joint treatment. G. Shaft Wall System: Components ofthe shaftwall system include'/:' Firccode'C' gypsurn panels, V gypsum liner panels and steel C -H studs at 24` on center, System shall be Equal to USG 2 -hour wall system #C. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION OF GYPSUM WALLBOARD A_ Gypsum wallboard shall be applied to framing and furring members in accordance with ASTM C 840 and the requirements specified herein. Gypsum wallboard shall be applied with separate boards in moderate contact without forcing in place. End joints of adjoining boards shall be staggered. Abutting end and edge joints shall be neatly fitted. Use gypsum wallboard of maximum practical length. Gypsum wallboard shall be cut as required to make neat close joints around openings. In vertica3 application of gypsum wallboard, panels shall be of length required to reach full height of vertical surfaces in one continuous piece. Surfaces of gypsum wallboard and substrate members may beadditionally adhered together with an adhesive, except adhesive shall not be used in lieu of fasteners. 3.02 FINISHING OF GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. Gypsum wallboard shall be taped, bedded and finished in accordance with ASTM C 840. Joint, fastener depression, and comer treatment shall be provided. Finish texture shall match existing. 3.03 PATCHING A. Surface defects and damage to both new and existing walls within the project area shall be corrected as required to leave gypsum wallboard smooth, uniform in appearance, and ready to receive finish as specified. All patching shall not be visibly noticeable from a distance ofthree feet All wall surfaces that are damaged by any party ofthc Contractor shall be patched at no additional expense to the Owner. END OF SECTION GYPSUM WALLBOARD SECTION 09260 - 2 SECTION 09311 CERAMIC TILE FINISH PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ceramic tile floor, wall, ceiling and base finish using the thinset application method. B. Thresholds at door openings when and where applicable. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Troweling of floor slab for the application. 1,03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/TCA A108.4 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Water Resistant Organic Adhesive. B. ANSI/TCA A108.6 - Ceramic Tile Installed with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile -Setting and Grouting Epoxy. C. ANSI/TCA A118.1 - Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar. D. ANStITCA Al 18.3 - Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile -Setting and Grouting Epoxy. E. ANSI/TCA A118.4 - Latex -Portland Cement Mortar. F. ANSI/TCA Al37.1 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile. G. TCA (Tile Council of America) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300. B. Submit shop drawings indicating the layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials, thresholds, and setting details. C. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. D. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. E. Mount the and apply grout on one 12 x 12 inch plywood panel, to indicate pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations, F. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. G. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Section 01400 that products meet or exceed specified requirements and ANSYrCA A137.1. H. Submit maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to ANSI/TCA Al 37.1 B. Conform to TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation and ANSI/TCA A108.4. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacture of products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.07 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this Section, under provisions of Section 01200. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. CERAMIC TILE FINISH SECTION 09311 - 1 B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. C. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install adhesives in a closed, unventilated environment. B. Maintain 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS - TILE A. Dal -Tile; Dal-Porcelan. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 TILE MATERIAL. A. Ceramic Floor, Wall and Ceiling Tile: ANSVTCA A137.1, conforming to the following: Moisture Absorption 0 to 0.5 percent Floor Tile Size: 2 x 2 x 114 inch mosaic Wall & Ceiling Tile Size: 4 x 4 x 1/4 inch Edge: Cushioned Floor Tile Surface Finish: Unglazed/Non-slip Wall & Ceiling Tile Surface Finish: Matte Glazed Color: Solid and Designer Colors As selected B. Base: Match mosaic floor cite for moisture absorption, surface finish, and color, tile length and height to match wall tile; bull- nosed top edge, coved internal comer. 2.03 MANUFACTURERS - ADHESIVE A. Dal -Tile. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2,04 ADHESIVE MATERIALS A. Epoxy Adhesive: ANSYTCA Al 18.3 and ANSUTCA A108.6; thinset bond type. 2.05 MANUFACTURERS - MORTAR AND GROUT A. Dal -Tile. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.06 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Mortar Materials: ANSIITCA A118.1 and ANSIITCA A118,4; Portland cement, sand, and water. B. Calor Admixture: type and color as selected. 2.07 GROUT MATERIALS A. Grout: Silicone sealant, moisture and bacteria resistant type, as specified in Section 07900. B. Color Admixture: Type and color as selected. 2.08 BACKING BOARD MATERIALS A. Cement Board: Equivalent to DUROCK Cement Board; %" x 48" x 8' or YS" x 32" x 8'. B. Fasteners: Equivalent to DUROCK Steel Screws; 1 114" for steel framing; Wafer head and anti -corrosive coatings. CERAMIC TILE FINISH SECTION 09311 - 2 2.09 ACCESSORIES A. Mesh: Equivalent to DUROCK Reinforcing Mesh; 4.5 oz/sq. yd.; Open -weave treated glass fiber fabric. B. Joint/Comer Reinforcemcnr. Equivalent to DUROCK Exterior Tape; 4" x 150' rolls; Polymer -coated open mesh type for cement panel joints. C. Thresholds: Marble type, color and finish as selected; 4 inch size by full width ofwall or frame opening, beveled both sides, radiused edges from bevel to vertical fare. D. Tile Floor Edging: As selected. 2.10 MORTAR MIX AND GROUT MIX A. Mix and proportion pre -mix setting bed and grout materials in accordance with ANSVECA AI08.4., ANSI/TCA A108.5., ANSVTCA At 18.1., ANSVTCA At 18.4. and TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts condition of existing surfaces and substrate 3.02 CEMENT BOARD PANEL APPLICATION A. Apply cement panels with rough side toward exterior and with ends and edges over supports. Fit ends and edges closely, but not forced together. Stagger end joints in successive coursed. B. Fasten cement panels to framing with specified fasteners. Place screws in accordance with cement board manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.03 JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. Prefill joints with an equivalent to DUROCK Latex Fortified Mortar. Apply reinforcing tape in accordance with cement board manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.04 INSTALLATION - THINSET METHOD A. Install adhesive, tile, threshold, and grout to TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, Latest Edition. B. lay tile to pattern indicated on shop drawings. Request the pattern from Arch itect/Engineer. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings, C. Place thresholds and edge strips at exposed tile edges. D. Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations through tile. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor, base, and wall joints. E. Place tilejoints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. F. Sound the after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. G. Keep expansion/control joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. H. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. L Grout tilt joints. J. Apply sealant to junction of the and dissimilar materials and at junction of dissimilar planes. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of01700. B. Clean the surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500. B. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface. CERAMIC TILE FINISH SECTION 09311 - 3 3.07 SCHEDULE A. See Finish Schedule on the Drawings for tik locations. END OF SECTION CERAMIC TILE FINISH SECTION 09311 - 4 SECTION 09312 CERAMIC TILE WALL FMSH PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ceramic tile walls, wainscot, and base finish using the thinset application method. B. Cementitious backing board. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A Section 04260 - Gypsum Board. B. Section 04311 - Ceramic Tile Floor Finish 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANS VTCA A 108.4 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Water Resistant Organic Adhesive. B. ANS VTCA A108.5 - Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry-Sct Portland Cement Mortar or Latex Portland Cement Mortar, C. ANSLTCA A 118.4 - Latex -Portland Cement Mortar. D. ANSI/TCA A136.1 - Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile, Type 1 and Type 2, E. ANSVTCA A137.1 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile. F. TCA (Tile Council of America) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions ofthe Uniform General Conditions and Supplemcntary General Conditions of the Contract. B. Submit shop drawings indicating tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeterconditions,junctions with dissimilar materials, and setting details. C. Submit product data under provisions of the Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract. D. Submit product data indicating material specifications, characteristics, and 'instructions for using adhesives and grouts. E. Submit samples under provisions of the Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract. F. Mount tile and apply grout on one 12 x 12 inch plywood panel, representative of pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations. G. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of the Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract. H. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Section 01400 that products meet or exceed specified requirements and ANSUTCA A137.1. 1. Submit maintenance data under provisions of the Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract. J. Include recommended cleaning and slain removal methods, and cleaning materials. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to ANSI/TCA A137.1 B. Conform to TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation and ANSI/TCA A108.4. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufactureofproductsspecifiedinthisSectionwithminimumthreeyearsdocumented experience. CERAMIC TILE WALL FINISH SECTION 09312 - 1 B. Installer: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.07 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this Section, under provisions of the Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Ddiverproducts to site undcrprovisiorts ofthe UniforTnGencral Conditions and SupplemcritaryGeneral Conditions of the ContracL B. Store and protect products under provisions of the Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract. C. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install adhesives in a closed, unventilated environment. B. Maintain 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS - TILE A. Dal -Tile: Dal-Soflones, Dal-Softliner and Dal -Jewel. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of the Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract. 2.02 TILE MATERIAL. A. Ceramic and/or Mosaic Wall Tile: ANSVECA A137.1, conforming to the following: Moisture Absorption 0 to 0.5 Size - Field Tiles 4 x 4 x 5116 inch Size - Accent Tiles 4 x 4 x 5116 inch Edge Cushioned Surface Finish Matte glazed Color Designer/Custom Color As selected B. Base: Match wall tile for moisture absorption, surface finish, and color, tile 4 x 4 x 5116 inches; coved bottom. C. Wainscot Cap (when applicable): Match mosaic wall tile for moisture absorption, surface finish, and color, tile length as selected, bullnose top edge. 2.03 MANUFACTURERS - ADHESIVE A. Dal -Tile. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of the Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract. 2.04 ADHESIVE MATERIALS A. • Epoxy Adhesive: ANSVTCA Al 18.3 and ANSUCCA A108.6; thinset bond type. 2.05 MANUFACTURERS - MORTAR AND GROUT A. Dal -Tile. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of the Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract. 2.06 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Mortar Materials: ANSI/TCA At 18.1 and ANSVTCA Al 18.4; Portland cement, sand, and water. B. Color Admixture: Type and color as selected. 2.07 GROUT MATERIALS A. Grout: Silicone sealant, moisture and bacteria resistant type, as specified in Section 07900, B. Color Admixture: Type and color as selected. CERAMIC TILE WAIL FINISH SECTION 09312 - 2 1 1 c t 1 114 I I 2.08 ACCESSORIES A. Cleavage Membrane: 4 mil thick polyethylene film. B. Reinforcing Mesh: Weave and wire size as required; welded fabric galvanized. C. Backing Board: High density, cementitious, glass liber reinforced, 112 inch thick; 2 inch wide coated glass fiber tape forjoints and corners. 2.09 MORTAR MIX AND GROUT MIX A. Mix and proportion pre -mix senting bed and grout materials in accordance with ANSI/TCA A10&.1., ANSVECA A108.4., ANSV `CA A108.5., ANSVPCA Al 18.1., ANSI/TCA Al 18.4. and TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts condition of existing surfaces and substrate. 3,02 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage or disfiguration. B. Vacuum clean existing surfaces and substrate and damp clean. C. Sea] substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. D. Apply sealer to surfaces as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. 3.03 INSTALLATION - THINSET METHOD A. Install adhesive, tile, and grout to TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, Latest Edition. B. Install backing board over gypsum board in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Tape joints and corners; cover with skim coat of dry -set mortar to a feather edge. C. Lay tile to pattern indicated on Drawings. Request tile pattern from ArchitectfEngineer. Do not interrupt the pattern around openings. D. Cut and ft tile tight to penetrations through tile. Form corners and bases neatly. Align wall, base, and floor joints. E. Place tide joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in the size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout. F. Form internal angles coved and external angles bullnose. G. Sound the after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. H. Keep expansion/control joints free of mortar or grout. Apply sealant to joints. I. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting I. Grout the joints. K. Apply sealant to junction of tle and dissimilar materials and at junction of dissimilar planes. 3.04 CLEANING A. Cleats work under provisions of the Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract. B. Clean the surfaces. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. See Finish Schedule on the Drawings for tile locations. END OF SECTION CERAMIC TILE WALL FINISH SECTION 09312 - 3 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS SECTION 09511 - I SECTION 09511 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART] GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical tile. C. Non -fire rated assembly. D. Acoustic insulation over acoustic units. E. Perimeter trim. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 09260 - Gypsum Wallboard Systems. B. Section 09900 - Painting. C. Section 15000 - General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system. D. Section 15000 - General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical: Air diffusion devices in ceiling system. E. Section 15000 - General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical: Light fixtures in ceiling system. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings B. ASTM C636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels. C. FS HH -I-521 - Insulation Blankets, Thermal Mineral Fiber, for Ambient Temperatures. D. UL - Underwriter's Laboratories System Ratings. L04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Metal suspended grid system with acoustical ceiling panels as described in this section and as detailed on the Drawings. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of ceiling suspension systems and ceiling tile with three years minimum experience. B. Installer: Company with three years minimum documented experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for combustibility requirements for materials. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Indicate on shop drawings, grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other work or ceiling finishes, interrelation of mechanical and electrical items related to system, and dimensions. �1 C. Provide product data on metal grid system components, acoustic units, and wall angle. D. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. E. Submit two samples full size, illustrating material and finish of acoustic units. F. Submit two samples each, 12 inches, of suspension system main runner, cross runner, edge trim, and accessories. G. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS SECTION 09511 - I 1-08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain uniform temperature ofminimum 60 degrees F, and humidity of 20 to 40 percent prior to, during, and after installation - 1.09 SEQUENCINGlSCHEDULING A. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. B. Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is dry. 1.10 EXTRA STOCK A, Provide extra quantity of acoustic units under provisions of Section 01700. B. Provide three cartons of extra tile to Owner. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. USG Interiors, Inc. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM MATERIALS A. Grid: ASTM C635, standard 15/16 inch wide, intermediate duty, non -Circ rated exposed T; components die cut and interlocking. B. Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, splices, hold down clips, and required for suspended grid system. C. Grid Materials: Commercial quality cold rolled steel with galvanized coating. D. Grid Finish: I. Standard Grid: Color as selected. 2. Designer Grid: COMPASSO Suspension Trim, 4 inch height, standard color as selected. E. WalllEdge Molding: USG No. MS164 wall molding. No Substitutions. I. Finish: a. Color to match standard grid color. F. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, to rigidly secure acoustic ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360. 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - ACOUSTIC UNITS A. USG Interiors, Inc. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.04 ACOUSTIC UNIT MATERIALS A. Acoustic Tiles "A": AUROTONE Omni Fissured; Conforming to the following: 1. Size: 24 x 48 inches. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inches. 3. Composition: Mineral. 4. STC Range: 35 - 39. 5. Edge: Square. 6. Surface Color: White. 7. Surface Finish: Non -directional fissured, plastic wrapped. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Batt Insulation: FS HH -1-521, friction fit type, unfaced; 4 inch thick. B. Gypsum Board: UL fire rated type; 5/8 inch thick, ends and edges square, paper faced. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.0 INSPECTION A. Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work. SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS SECTION 09511 - 2 END OF SECTION SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS SECTION 09511 - 3 B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. B. Install system in accordance with ASTM C636 and as supplemented in this Section. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 11360 maximum. C, Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. D. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. E. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing ofhangers,reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. F. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan. G. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner; or support components independently. H. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. 1. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical lengths. Miter comers. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions. Field rabbetttile edge. Where bullnose concrete block corners or round obstructions occur, provide preformed closers to match edge molding. 3. Form expansion joints as detailed. Form to accommodate plus or minus one inch movement. Maintain visual closure. K. Fit acoustic units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. L. Lay directional patterned units one way with pattern parallel to shortest room axis. Fit border neatly against abutting surfaces. M. Install acoustic units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents. N. Lay acoustic insulation for a distance of 48 inches either side of acoustic partitions. O. Install hold-down clips where required to retain panels tight to grid system within 20 ft of an exterior door. t P. Install light fixture boxes constructed of gypsum board above light fixtures in accordance with UL assembly requirements. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 118 inch in 10 ft. B. Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: Two degrees maximum. 3.04 SCHEDULE All A. See Drawings for locations and types of suspended acoustical ceilings. END OF SECTION SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS SECTION 09511 - 3 SECTION 09650 RUBBER BASE PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Rubber Base. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09250 - Gypsum Wallboard System: Wall materials to receive base. B. Section 09660 - Resilient Tile Flooring: Floor covering to receive base. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. FS -SS -W40 - Wall base. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for flame/ fueVsmoke rating requirements in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Provide layout plan. C. Provide product data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics, sizes, and colors available, and accessory items. D. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. E. Submit two samples 12 inches long, illustrating color for each base material specified. F. Submit manufacturers installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit cleaning and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability. B. Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer three days prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of materials. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 24 U ft of base for each color specified under provisions of Section 01700. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS -RUBBER BASE A. Roppe B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 RUBBER BASE MATERIALS A. Standard toe base, 4 inches high, minimum of 0.08. inch thick, Custom Color as selected by Architect. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Wall Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by wallboard material manufacturer. B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof, types recommended by base manufacturer. C. Matching inside/outside comers.. RUBBER BASE SECTION 09650 - 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8 inch, and arc ready to receive Work. B. Verify gypsum wallboard is dry to a maximum moisture content of 7 percent. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with wall filler. B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave a smooth, flat, hard surface. C. Vacuum clean substrate. D. Apply primer to surfaces as required. 3,03 INSTALLATION - BASE MATER]AL A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of material before initial set. C. Set rubber base in place, press to attain full adhesion. D. Set pre -molded inside/outside corners in full bed of adhesive, press to attain full adhesion. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Prohibit contact with base for 48 hours after installation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean base surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.06 SCHEDULE A. Refer to the Room Finish Schedule and the Drawings for location of rubber base. END OF SECTION RUBBER BASE SECTION 09650 - 2 SECTION 09660 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING i� PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient Tile Flooring, 1.02 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 16010 - Basic Electrical Requirements: Electrical floor cover plate with recess for resilient flooring. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09260 - Gypsum Wallboard System: Wall materials to receive base. t' B. Section 09650 - Rubber Base: Base material. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.. B. FS L -F-1641 - Floor Covering, Translucent or Transparent Vinyl Surface, with Backing. C. FS LF -475 - Floor Covering, Vinyl Surface (Tile and Roll), with Backing. D. FS SS -T-312 - Tile, Floor: Asphalt, Rubber, Vinyl, Vinyl Composition. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for flame/ fuel/smoke rating requirements in accordance with ASTM E84 q 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product datd under provisions of Section 01300. R Provide layout plan. C. Provide product data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics, sizes, patterns and colors available, and accessory items. ND. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. E. Submit two samples 12 x 12 inches in size, illustrating color and pattern for each floor material specified. F. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. 1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit cleaning and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700. B. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and rewaxing. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability. B. Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer three days prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of 1.09 materials. EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 144 sq 8 of flooring of each material and color specified under provisions of Section 01700. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS - TILE FLOORING A. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. The Architect reserves the right to acceptor reject any substitution based solely upon the colors available from the substitute manufacturer. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING SECTION 09660 -1 2.02 TILE FLOORING MATERIALS A. Vinyl Composition Tile: FS SS -T -312B(1), Type IV, Composition l; 12 x 12 inch size, 1/8 inch thick. I. Field Tiles: STANDARD EXCELON; "Imperial Texture". 2. Border/Feature Tiles: "Premium" Grade. B. Feature Strips: Of same material as tile; 2 inch wide. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer. B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. C. Edge Strips: Flooring material. D. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 ft, and are ready to receive Work. B. Verify concrete floors are dry to a maximum moisture content of 7 percent, and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting. C Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with subfloor filler. B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave a smooth, flat, hard surface. C. Prohibit traffic from area until filler is cured. D. Vacuum clean substrate. E. Apply primer to surfaces as required. 3.03 INSTALLATION - TILE MATERIAL A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variation are consistent, C. Spread only enough ashesive to permit installation of material before initial set. D. Set floor tile in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. E. Lay floor tile with joints parallel to building lines to produce symmetric tile patter. F. Install floor tile with pattern grain alternating with adjoining unit to produce basket weave pattern. Allow minimum of 1/2 full size tile width at room perimeter. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean, seal, and wax floor and base surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.06 SCHEDULE A. Refer to the Drawings for room finish schedule and locations of resilient flooring. END OF SECTION RESILIENT TILE FLOORING SECTION 09660 - 2 SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation and field application of primers, sealers, paints and coatings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02510 -Asphalt Concrete Paving. Pavement markings. B. Section 04300 - Unit Masonry System. C. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Shop primed items. D. Section 05210 - Steel Joists: Shop primed items. E. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry. F. Section 06410 - Custom Casework: Preparation for Site Finishing. G. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. H. Section 07631 - Gutters and Downspouts: Galvanized/Paint Grip. I. Section 08111 - Standard Steel Doors: Shop primed. J. Section 08112 - Standard Steel Frames: Shop primed. K. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors: Preparation for Site Finishing. L. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM DI - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. B. ASTM D2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood. C. AWWA (American Water Works Association) - C204 -Chlorinated Rubbcr-Alkyd Paint Systems for the Exterior ofAbove Ground Steel Water Piping, D. AWWA (American Water Works Association) - D102 - Painting Steel Water Storage Tanks. E. NACE (National Association of Corrosion Engineers) - Industrial Maintenance Painting, F. NPCA (National Paint and Coatings Association) - Guide to U.S. Government Paint Specifications. G. PDCA (Painting and Decorating Contractors of America) - Painting - Architectural Specifications Manual. H. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Steel 'Structures Painting Manual. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ASTM D 16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section, 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products and special coating. C. Samples: Submit two samples, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled. D. Samples: Submit two samples, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating selected colors and textures for each color selected. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures, substrate conditions requiring special attention, and other data as necessary. PAINTING SECTION 09900 - I 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS PAINTING SECTION 09900 - 2 A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience, 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable codes for flame and smoke rating requirements for finishes. 1.08 FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide field sample of paint under provisions of Section 01400. B. Provide field sample panel, one foot long by one foot wide, illustrating coating color, texture, and finish. C. Locate where directed. D. Accepted sample may remain as part of the Work. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600, B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. C. Container label to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. D. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturces instructions. D. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid -height at substrate surface. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01700. B. Provide I gallon of each color, type, and surface texture to Owner, C. Label each container with color, type, texture, room locations, and date in addition to the manufacturer's label. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers - Paint 1. Kelly Moore. 2. Glidden. 3. Sherwin Williams. B. Manufacturers - Transparent Finishes 1. Kelly Moore. 2. Glidden. 3. Sherwin Williams. C. Manufacturers - Stain 1. Kelly Moore, PAINTING SECTION 09900 - 2 u i_ 1 2. Glidden. 3. Sherwin Williams. D. Manufacturers - Primer Sealers 1. Kelly Moore, 2. Glidden. 3. Sherwin Williams. E. Manufacturers - Block Filler 1, Kelly Moore. 2. Glidden. 3. Sherwin Williams. F. Manufacturers - Concrete Masonry /Brick Veneer Sealers 1. Kelly Moore. 2. Glidden. 3. Sherwin Williams. G. Manufacturer - Multi -Calor Coating 1. Equivalent to ZOLATONE. a. Zolatone Elites, waterbased multicolor coating. H. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating; good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality. C. Patching Materials: Latex filler. D. Fastener Head Cover Materials: Latex filler. 2.03 FINISHES A. Refer to schedule at end of section for surface finish and color schedule. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that surfaces and/or substrate conditions are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencementofwork. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. D. Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2, Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. 4. Custom Casework: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. 5. Finish Carpentry: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. 6. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. 7. Concrete Floors: 8 percent. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove electrical plates, all hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. B. Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove existing coatings that exhibit loose surface defects. C. Seal with shellac and sea] marks which may bleed through surface finishes. D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution oftri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and PAINTING SECTION 09900 - 3 allow surface to dry. E. Aluminum Surfaces. Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately following cleaning. F. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion of finishing materials. Apply latex based sealer or primer. G. Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton. li. Concrete Floors: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with clear water. Verify required acid -alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry. I I, Copper Surfaces Scheduled for a Paint Finish: Remove contamination by steam, high pressure water, or solvent washing. Apply vinyl etch primer immediately following cleaning. J. CopperSurfaces Scheduled foraNatural Oxidized Finish: Remove contamination by applying oxidizing solution ofcopperacetate and ammonium chloride in acetic acid. Rub on repeatedly for required effect. Once attained, rinse surfaces with clear water and allow to dry. K. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. L. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. M. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri -sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. N. Concrete Masonry Units/l3rick VeneeriConerete Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Sealer: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter, Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri -sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. O. Plaster Surfaces: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces. P. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs. Q. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Prime metal items including shop primed items. R. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and 'k sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. S. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats. T. Custom Casework Scheduled to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe offdust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. U. Custom Casework Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Wipe offdust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand between coats. V. Casework Interiors Scheduled to Receive Transparent Stain: Same as exterior. W. Casework Interiors Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Same as exterior. X. Exterior Wood Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior caulking compound after prime coat has been applied. Y. Exterior Wood Scheduled to Receive Transparent Finish Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter; seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior caulking compound after sealer has been applied. Z. Wood Timber Members: Prior to finishing, wash surfaces with solvent, remove grease and dirt. AA. Wood and Metal Donors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer. 3.03 APPLICATION PAINTING SECTION 09900 - 4 Il 1 1 7 A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. C. Apply each coat to uniform finish. D. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. E. Sand wood and metal lightly between coats to achieve required finish. F. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. Use tack cloth just prior to applying next coat. G. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. H. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. 'Wipe excess from surface. I. Prime concealed surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint. J. Prime concealed surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits. 3.04 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Refer to Section 15190 and Section 16195 forschedule ofcolor coding and identification banding ofequipment, duct work, piping, and conduit. B. Paint shop primed equipment. Paint shop prefinished items occurring at interior areas. C. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. D. Primeand paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts,hangers, brackets, collars and supports, and exposed raw edges except where items are prefinished. E. Paint interior surfaces ofair ducts that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat offlat black paint, to visible surfaces. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles to match face panels. F. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas. G. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment. H. Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed ductwork in accordance with requirements indicated. Colorband and identify with flow arrows, names and numbering. 1. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3,05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. B. Test questionable coated areas in accordance with ASTM guidelines. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. B. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. 3.07 SCHEDULE - SHOP PRIMED ITEMS FOR SITE FINISHING A. Metal Fabrications; Section - 05500: Exposed surfaces of lintels, elevator pit ladders, and other miscellaneous items. B. Structural Steel Exposed to View; Section 05120: Exposed surfaces. C. Steel Joists; Section 05210: Exposed surfaces. D. Steel Doors; Section - 08111: Exposed surfaces. E. Steel Frames; Section - 08112; Exposed surfaces. 3.08 SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR SURFACES (when applicable) A. Wood - Painted (Opaque): PAINTING SECTION 09900 - 5 3.09 L One coat of alkyd exterior primer equal to Kelly Moore (KM) #220 Exterior Primer. 2. Two coats of latex semi -gloss enamel equal to KM #1250 Acry-Lustre Acrylic Semi -Gloss Finish. B. Wood - Transparent: 1. Two coats of semi -transparent stain equal to KM 91280 Kel-Tone Semi -transparent Stain. C. Wood Timber Members: 1. One coat of semi -transparent stain equal to KM # 1285-666 Acrylic Stain Base. 2, Two coats ofgloss varnish equal to KM #18 Rhino Spar Varnish. D. Pavement Markings: 1. Two coats of Line paint equal to KM #2130 Traffic Line finish, yellow. E. Concrete/Concrete Masonry Units: 1. One coat of block primer equal to KM 9521 Acrylic Block Filler. 2. Two coats of flat acrylic paint equal to KM #1105 Kel-Crete Acrylic Finish. F. Textured Gypsum Board Soffits: I. One coat of latex primer sealer equal to KM 4970 Acry-Plex Hi -Hide Vinyl Wall Sealer. 2. Two coats of satin latex paint equal to KM #1610 Satin Sheen Latex Wall & Trim Finish. G. Steel - Unprimed: 1. One coat of alkyd primer equal to KM # 1710 Kel-Guard Zinc Chromate Red Oxide Primer. 2. Two coats of alkyd gloss enamel equal to KM # 1700 Kel-Guard Rust Inhibitive Enamel. H. Steel - Shop Primed: 1. Touch-up with zinc chromate primer equal to KM # 1710 Kel-Guard Zinc Chromate Red Oxide Primer. 2, Two coats ofalkyd gloss enamel equal to KM #1700 Kel-Guard Rust Inhibitive Enamel. I_ Steel - Exposed to View: I . Touch-up with zinc chromate primer equal to KM 41710 Kel-Guard Chromate Red Oxide Primer. 2. Two coats ofalkyd gloss enamel equal to KM # 1700 Kel-Guard Rust Inhibitive Exterior Enamel, J. Steel - Galvanized: L. One coat galvanize primer equal to KM # 1.722 Kel-Guard Galvanized Iron Primer. 2. Two coats of alkyd gloss enamel equal to KM #1700 Kcl-Guard Rust Inhibitive Enamel. K. Aluminum - Mill Finish: L. One coat etching primer. 2. Two coats ofalkyd gloss enamel equal to KM #1700 Kel-Guard Rust Inhibitive Enamel. L. Copper: 1. One coat etching primer. 2. Two coats ofalkyd gloss enamel equal to KM #1700 Kel-Guard Rust inhibitive Enamel. M. Unpainted Brick/Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Two coat of waterproofing/sealer. SCHEDULE - INTERIOR SURFACES (when applicable) A Wood - Painted: 1. One coat of alkyd primer equal to KM 4985 Flo -Cote Enamel Undercoat, 2. Two coats ofalkyd semi -gloss enamel equal to KM 41630 Kel-Cote Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel. B. Wood - Intumescent Coating: 1. One coat of prime sealer. 2. Two coats of intumescent coating. C. Custom Casework - Transparent: Natural Finish - Color 1. Three coats KM 421 Gloss Kel-Thane Polyurethane Vamish or KM #22 Satin Kel-Thane Polyurethane Varnish. D. Custom Casework - Transparent: Stained and Lacquer Finish; Exterior and Interior Surfaces - Color As Selected 1. One coat of KM #1286-666 Waterborne Wiping Stain, 2. One coat KM 92183 Kel-Lac Ultra -Solids Sanding Sealer. 3. Two coats 42187 Kel-Lac Ultra -Solids Eggshell Lacquer E. Custom Casework Interior: Transparent Stain I. Three coats KM #21 Gloss Kel-Thane Polyurethanc Varnish or KM #22 Satin Kel-Thane Polyurethane Varnish. F. Custom Casework - Exterior and Interior: Painted Finish 1. One coat of alkyd primer equal to KM #985 Flo -Cote Enamel Undercoat. PAINTING SECTION 09900 - 6 END OF SECTION 1 1 t r IPAINTING SECTION 09900 - 7 2. Two coats of alkyd semi -gloss enamel equal to KM # 1630 Kel-Cote Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel, G. Wood Timber Members; 1. One coat of stain equal to KM #1286-666 Waterborne Wiping Stain, 2. One coat or two coats KM #21 Gloss Kel-Thane Polyurethanc Varnish OR KM #22 Satin Kel-Thane Polyurethane Varnish H. Concrete/Concrete Masonry Units: I. One coat of acrylic block filler equal to KM #521 Acrylic Block Filler. 2. Two coats of eggshell latex paint equal to KM # 1640 Acry-Plex Latex Eggshell Enamel. 1. Concrete Masonry Units/Brick Veneer/Concrete; I. One coat of clear, non -yellowing, acrylic block sealer equal to KM #531 Acrylic Block Sealer. J. Steel - Unprimed: 1. One coat of alkyd primer equal to KM # 1710 Kel-Guard Zinc Chromate Red Oxide Primer. 2. Two coats of semi -gloss acrylic latex enamel equal to KM # 1650 Acry-Plex Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel. K. Steel - Primed: 1. Touch-up with alkyd primer equal to KM # 1710 Kel-Guard Zinc Chromate Red Oxide Primer. 2. Two coats of semi -gloss acrylic latex enamel equal to KM # 1650 Acry-Plex Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel. L. Steel - Exposed to View: 1. Touch-up with alkyd primer equal to KM 41710 Kel-Guard Chromate Red Oxide Primer. M. 2. Two coats of semi -gloss acrylic latex enamel equal to KM # 1650 Acry-Plex Latex Semi Gloss Enamel. Steel - Galvanized: L One coat galvanize primer equal to KM #1722 Kel-Guard Galvanized Iron Primer. 2. Two coats of semi -gloss acrylic latex enamel equal to KM # 1650 Acry-Plex Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel. N. Aluminum - Mill Finish: 1. One coat etching primer. 2. Two coats of semi -gloss acrylic latex enamel equal to KM # 1650 Acry-Plea Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel. O. Concrete Floors: 1. One coat of alkyd floor enamel equal to KM # 1300 Industrial Maintenance Alkyd Floor Enamel thinned, 20% with Mineral Spirits. 2. Two coats of alkyd floor enamel equal to KM # 1300 Industrial Maintenance Alkyd Floor Enamel. P. Gypsum Hoard: 1. One coat of latex primer sealer equal to KM #970 Acry-Plea Hi -Hide Vinyl Wall Sealer. 2. Apply Orange Peel Texture for new walls in new construction; otherwise, match texture on existing walls. 3. Two coats of satin latex paint equal to KM #1610 Satin Sheen Latex Wall and Trim Finish. Q. Wall Surfaces Under Vinyl Wall Covering: 1. One coat of latex primer scaler equal to KM #970 Acry-Plex Hi -Hide Vinyl Wall Sealer. R. Fire Retardant Finish: 1. One coat of fire retardant primer. 2. Two coats of fire retardant finish, gloss. 3. Flame and smoke rating of 2515. S. Insulated Coverings - Canvas and Cotton: I. One coat of alkyd primer sealer. 2. Two coats of alkyd enamel, eggshell. END OF SECTION 1 1 t r IPAINTING SECTION 09900 - 7 1 1 A 1 1 1 SECTION 10105 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Modular Metal Markerboards. B. Designer Fabric Bulletin Boards. C. Trim and Accessories. 1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 09111- Metal Stud Framing System: Placement of concealed supports in wall construction. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems: Substrate construction. 1.04 REFERENCES A. AHA A135.4- Basic Hardboard. B. ASTM A424 - Steel Sheets for Porcelain Enameling. C. ASTM A526 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality. D. ASTM B209 - Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. E. ASTM B221 - Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. F. ASTM 0208 - Insulation Board (Cellulose Fiber) Structural and Decorative. G. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. H. FS CCC -W-408 - Wall Covering, Vinyl -Coated. I. HPMA HP - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. J. NPA A208.1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard. K. PEI (Porcelain Enamel Institute) - Performance Specifications for Porcelain Enamel Chalkboards. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of the Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract. B. Shap Drawings: Indicate wall elevations, dimensions, joint locations, special anchor details. C. Product Data: Provide data on markerboards and trim and accessories. D. Samples: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating materials and finish, color and texture of markerboard and trim. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of the Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract. B. Maintenance Data: Include data on regular cleaning, stain removal. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for flame/smoke rating for markerboards. 1.08 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.09 FIELD MEASUREMENTS VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS SECTION 10105 -1 A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of the Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract. B. Warranty: Include coverage of markerboard surface from discoloration due to cleaning, crazing or cracking, staining. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Claridge Products & Equipment. "Modular System." B. Substitutions: Under provisions of the Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract. 2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Modular Metal Marker Boards: 1, MOD2M-8; 4'-0" x 8'-0" wide, "Multi -Purpose Board" wide with wrap around aluminum trim, chalktrough and map rail. Board shall accept pencil, pen rayon, chalk, dry -erase makers, permanent marker. Surface can substitute for projection screen. 2. Wall Standards: MOD ID, 6-0" long. B. Modular Designer Fabric Bulletin Boards: 1. MOD3C4; 4'-0" high x 4'-0" wide with wrap around aluminum trim. 2. Wall Standards: MOD ID, 6-0" long. 2.03 MODULAR METAL MARKERBOARDS A. Fabrication - Modular Metal Markerboards: I. Outer Face Sheet: Steel, 24 gage thick with "Multi -Purpose", Enamel Writing Surface. Color as selected. 2. Core: Particle Board, 318 inch thick. 3. Backing Surface: Aluminum Foil. 4. Splice Joint: Concealed spline of sheet steel. 5. Wall Standards: Double Slotted extruded aluminum. B. Fabrication - Frame and Trim: 1. Aluminum Frame: Of standard profile; concealed fasteners. C. Aluminum Chalkrail: Of standard profile, one piece full length of markerboard molded ends; concealed fasteners. 2.04 MODULAR DESIGNER FABRIC BULLETIN BOARDS A. Fabrication - Designer Fabric Bulletin Boards: 1. Outer Face: 100% polyester designer wall fabric. 2. Core: "Duraeore". 3. Wall Standards: Double Slotted extruded aluminum. B. Fabrication - Frame: 1. Aluminum Frame: Of standard profile; concealed fasteners. 2.05 FINISHES A. Modular Metal Markerboards: 1. Writing Surface: Multi -Purpose Enamel. 2. Aluminum Frame, Chalkrail, and Accessories: Mill finish natural aluminum. 3. Wall Standards: Mill finish natural aluminum. B. Designer Fabric Bulletin Boards: 1. Surface: Designer Wall Fabric 2. Aluminum Frame: Mill finish natural aluminum. 3. Wall Standards: Mill finish natural aluminum/. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of the Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract. VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS SECTION 10105 - 2 r 3,02 3.03 3.04 B. Verify that internal wall blocking is ready to receive work and positioning dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings and instructed by the manufacturer. C. Verify flat wall surface for frameless adhesive applied type. INSTALLATION A, Install markerboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Establish top of chalk rail and/or bottom of perimeter frame at recommended height above finished floor. C. Secure units level and plumb. D. Markerboards: Butt panels tight with concealed spline to hairline joint. CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of the Uniform General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions of the Contract. B. Clean markerboard surfaces in accordance with manufacturees instructions. C. Cover markerboard surfaces with protective cover, taped to frame. D. Remove temporary protective cover at date of Substantial Completion. SCHEDULE A. Refer to the Drawings for locations of marker boards and bulletin boards. END OF SECTION VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS SECTION 10105 - 3 SECTION 10160 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal toilet compartments, floor mounted. B. Urinal screens, wail mounted with floor to ceiling pilaster brace. 1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Installation ofconcealed supports. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Above ceiling framing for partition panel support. 1.04 REFERENCES ANSI Al 17.1 (1986) - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People, ANSI/ASTM A424 (1989) - Steel Sheets for Porcelain Enameling, ANSI/ASTM A526 (1985) - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality. ASTM A] 67 (1989) - Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. FS RR -P -1352C (08Feb89) - Partitions, Toilet, Complete. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300. 1. Indicate how new materials are to attach to existing materials, B. Indicate on shop drawings, partition plan and elevation views, dimensions, details of wall, floor and ceiling supports, and door swings. C. Provide product data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. D. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300, E. Submit two samples 12 x 12 inches in size illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen. F. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Global Steel Products Corporation B. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation. C. Sanymetal Products Company, D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: ANSI/ASTM A526, with G90 zinc coating, Type 1, commercial quality, B. Head Rails: Hollow steel tube, I x 1-518 inch size, with anti -grip strips and cast socket wall brackets. C. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel; tamper proof type; heavy duty extruded aluminum brackets. D. Hardware: Continuous, nylon bearing, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning, nylon bearings; thumb turn door latch; door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; cast alloy chrome plated coat hook and bumper. METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS SECTION - 10160 -1 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate partitions in accordance with FS RR -P-1352. B. Fabricate components of steel sheet as follows: I. Panel and Door Faces: 20 gage. 2. Pilaster Faces: 18 gage. 3. Reinforcement: 12 gage. C. Doors and Panels: One inch thick by 24 inch wide x 58 inch high, sheet steel face, pressure banded to sound deadening gore; 24 inch wide door. 32 inch wide door swinging out on stalls for handicapped use. D. Pilasters: l-114 inch thick, constructed same as doors, of sizes required to suit cubicle width and spacing. E. Pilaster Shoes: Formed chromed steel with polished finish. F. Doors, Panels. and Pilasters: Form and close edges, miter and weld corners, grind smooth. G Internal Reinforcement: Provide in areas ofattached hardware and fittings. Mark locations of reinforcement for partition mounted washroom accessories. 2.04 FACTORY FINISHING A. Clean, degrease, and neutralize panels. B. Follow with a phosphatizing treatment, prime coat and two finish coats baked enamel of colors as selected by Architect_ PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify correct spacing of plumbing fixtures. C. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing, where required. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces and substrate. 3.02 INSTALLATION A- Install partitions secure, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Maintain 318 to 122 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. C. Attach panel brackets securely to wails using anchor devices. D. Attach panels and pilasters to bracket with through sleeve tamper proof bolts and nuts. Locate hcadrail joints at pilaster center lines. E. Anchor urinal screen panels to walls with continuous bracket and vertical upright consisting of pilaster anchored to floor and ceiling. F. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screwjack through steel saddles integral with pilaster. Conceal floor fastenings with pilaster shoes. G. Support pilasters from built—in framing using two adjustable hanging studs providing vertical leveling. Conceal ceiling fastenings with pilaster shoe. H. Equip each door with two hinges, one door latch, and one coat hook and bumper. 1. Install door strike and keeper with door bumper on each pilaster in alignment with door latch. J. Adjust hinges to locate doors in partial open position when unlatched. Return out swing doors to close position. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch. 3.04 CLEANING METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS SECTION - 10160 - 2 1 11 I[] II A. Remove protective maskings. Clean surfaces. B. Field touch-up ofscratches or damaged enamel finish will not be permitted. C. Replace damaged or scratched materials and with new materials. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Refer to the large Scale plans of Metal Toilet Compartments for elements of compartments and coordination and attachment requirsments. END OF SECTION METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS SECTION - 10160 - 3 SECTION 10260 CORNER AND WALL GUARDS PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Corner guards. B. Wall guards 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI Al 17.1 -Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible To and Usable By Physically Handicapped People. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Comer guards to resist lateral impact force of 100 lbs at any point without permanent damage. 1.04 SUBMfT-TALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Indicate physical dimensions, features, wall mounting brackets with mounted measurements, anchorage details, and rough -in measurements. C. Samples: Submit two sections of comer guard, and wall guard, 24 inches long illustrating component design, configuration, and color and finish. D. Manufactureds Installation Instructions: Indicate installation rough -in measurements and instructions. E. Manufacturces Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed flame spread rating for surface finish. 1.05 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate the work witlrwall or partition Sections for installation of concealed blocking or anchor devices. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Balco. B. Construction Specialties. C. Tri -Guards. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Comer Guard - Surface Mounted: Projecting 114 inch plus or minus, from wall to outside of guard, high impact Clear plastic, with 2 I/2" wing, 4' long. B. Wall guards - Surface mounted: Projecting 114 inch plus or minus, from wall to outside of guard, high impact Clear plastic. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with tight joints, comers and seams. B. Pre -drill holes for attachment. 2.04 FINISHES A. Corner and Wall Guard: Clear Plastic, unless otherwise indicated. CORNER AND WALL GUARDS SECTION 10260 - 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01034. B. Verify that rough -in for components are correctly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install components in accordance with manufacturers instructions, level and plumb, secured rigidly in position. B. Position corner guard four inches above finished floor to flush with ceiling. 3.03 SCHEDULE A. All column comers and all external wall corners. END OF SECTION CORNER AND WALL GUARDS SECTION 10260 - 2 SECTION 10441 SIGNAGE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Engraved plastic signs. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300. B. Submit shop drawings listing sign styles, lettering and locations, and overall dimensions of each engraved sign. C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. D. Submit two samples illustrating full size sample sign, of type, style and color specified including method of attachment. E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. F. Include installation template and hardware. 103 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. C. Package signs, labeled in name groups. D. Store adhesive tape at ambient room temperatures. 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install signs when ambient temperature is below 70 degrees F. Maintain this minimum during and after installation of signs. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. All signage must conform to all ADA requirements and other provisions for the handicapped as may be required and necessary. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Modular Signage: 1. FAST -Signs., 2. Modular Signs: Laminated colored plastic back with a total thickness of 0.125 inch, square edge, one inch corner radius; laminated clear plastic front with a minimum total thickness of 0.0625 inch, square edge, one inches comer radius; removable colored insert for lettering; color and lettering style as selected. 3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. B. Nan -Illuminated Identification Signage: 1. Leeds Aluminum Letters, Architectural Signage. 2. Welded aluminum, anodized bronze finish; Upper case letters shall be Garamond 213 style, twelve inches tall; Lower case letters shall be Garamond 213 style, eight inches tall, 3. No substitutions. 2.02 LETTERING A. Modular Signage: 1. Size and Style: I inch high upper and 3/4 inch high lower ease Helvetica. 2. Colors: As selected. 203 ACCESSORIES A. Mounting Hardware: Brass screws. B. Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive. SIGNAGE SECTION 10441 -1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install signs after surfaces are finished, in locations as scheduled. C. Locate sign on door or wall surface, level. D. Ciean and polish. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. All Modular Signage shall be b inches x 6 inches. B. Verify Owner's requirements for signage prior to ordering/fabrication of signs. C. For the purposes of bidding, Signage count and text shall be equal to the number and title of spaces as indicated by the Finish Schedule on the Drawings. END OF SECTION SIGNAGE SECTION 10441 -2 SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire extinguishers. B. Cabinets. C. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood blocking and shims. B. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Roughed -in wall openings. C. Section 09900 - Painting: Field paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSIINFPA 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers. B. ANSI/UL 92 - Fire Extinguisher and Booster Hose. C. ANSI/UL 711 - Rating and Fire Testing of Fire Extinguishers. D. UL 8 - Foam Fire Extinguishers. E. UL 154 - Carbon Dioxide Fire Extinguishers. F. UL 299 - Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers. G. UL 626 - 2 112 Gallon Stored Pressure, Water Type Fire Extinguishers. H. UL 1093 - Halogenated Agent Fire Extinguishers. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions, rough -in measurements for recessed cabinets, location, and related items. C. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features, color and finish, anchorage details and related data. D. Manufacturers Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re -certification requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide units conforming with ANSUUL 711 and ANSWL 92. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code and ANSI/NFPA 101 for requirements for extinguishers. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS & ACCESSORIES SECTION 10522 -1 PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. J. L. Industries. B. Larsen Manufacturing. C. Watrous Industria. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 EXTINGUISHERS A, Dry Chemical Type: UL 299, Cast steel tank, with pressure gage; Class ABC, Size 10. 2.03 CABINETS A. Metal: Formed sheet steel, primed; 18 gage thick base metal. B. Configuration: Recessed type, sized to accommodate accessories. C. Trim Type: Returned to wall surface, with 114 inch projection, I inch wide face. D. Door: 18 gage thick reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch with full glass access. E. Door Glazing: Glass, clear, 118 inch thick tempered. F. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, white enamel finish. B. Cabinet Signage: Manufacturer's standard. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside comers and seams. Form perimeter trim and door stiles. B. Pre -drill for anchors. C. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge, Provide roller type catch. D. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth. E. Glaze doors with resilient channel gasket glazing. 2.06 FINISHES A. Extinguisher: Steel, enamel to red color. B. Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Primed for field paint finish. C. Cabinet Interior: Same as exterior. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify wall openings under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. 302 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufactur es. instructions. B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, at height to comply with applicable regulations and codes of governing authorities. C. Secure rigidly in place. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS & ACCESSORIES SECTION 10522 - 2 D. Place extinguishers and accessories in cabinets. E. Position cabinet signage at per manufacturers instructions. END OF SECTION 1 1 I I I I I I I I � I 1 IFIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS a ACCESSORIES SECTION 10522 - 3 SECTION 10800 TOILET ACCESSORIES PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. LavatoryNanity accessories. B. Attachment hardware. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09111 - In wall framing and plates for support of accessories. B. Section 09312 - Ceramic Tile Wall Finish: Ceramic accessories. 1.03 REFERENCES FS DD -M-0041 l B (07Mar70) & Amt. I Mirror, Glass FS WW -D- I 909A (3 1 Dcc85) Dispenser, Paper Towel FS WW -P -541/8B (OlAug80) Plumbing Fixtures Accessories 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Provide product data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods. C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. D. Submit one sample of each component illustrating color and finish. E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for installing work in conformance with ANSI A117.1. 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work of this Section with the placement of internal wall reinforcement to receive anchor attachments. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Bobrick Washroom Equipment. B. Bradley Corporation. C. Gamco Products. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 MATERIALS A_ Sheet Steel: ANSUASTM A366. B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A[ 67, Type 304. C. Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel. D. Adhesive: Contact type, waterproof E. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized. F. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components. TOILET ACCESSORIES SECTION 10800 -1 END OF SECTION TOILET ACCESSORIES SECTION 10800 - 2 B. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints. C. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents. D. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. E Shop assemble components, package complete with anchors & fittings. F. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and components for installation. G. Hot dip galvanize exposed and painted ferrous metal and fastening devices. 2.04 FACTORY FINISHING A. Galvanizing: ANSI/ASTM A123. B. Stainless Steel: No. 4 Polished finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance ofexisting conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough -in frames to site at appropriate time for building -in. B. Provide templates and rough -in measurements as required. C. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. 3.04 SCHEDULE OF TOILET ACCESSORIES A. Mirror, Glass: Glass mirror shall conform to FS WW -D-00411, Type 1, Class 1, Quality q2, Style C. B. Paper Towel Dispenser: Dispenser shall conform to FS WW -D-1909. 1. Mounting Surface: Style N (Folded Towels) shall not be less than 0.0269 inch, stainless steel for C -fold quarter fold towels. C. Soap Dispenser: Dispenser shall be liquid type consisting of a vertical stainless steel tank withholding capacity of40 fluid ounces. D. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: Dispenser shall conform to FS WW -P -54118B, Type 1, Class 1, Style A, stainless steel. E. Grab Bars: Provide stainless steel grab bars in conformance to the following: 1. Wall Thickness: 18 Gauge 2. Mounting: Exposed, provide flange anchors and fasteners. 3. Clearance: 1 'h inches between wall and inside face of grab bar. 4. Gripping Surface: Non -slip texture. 5. Heavy -Duty Size: Outside diameter of 1 '/, inch. 6. Equal to: Bobrick No. B6106.99 x length as shown on drawings and as required by the ADA. 7. Number Required: Two at each handicap water closet. 8. Handicap Regmnts.: Shall meet all ADA requirements. F. Metal Framed Wall Mirror: 18 inch x 22 inch. Glass as specified in Section 08800 -Glazing. G. Stainless Steel Shelf: Shelfshall be 5 inches deep x 18 inches wide; 18 gauge; type 304 stainless steel; satin finish; 314 inch edge; front hemmed; 16 gauge wall brackets. Equal to Bobrick B-295. END OF SECTION TOILET ACCESSORIES SECTION 10800 - 2 r� IHORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS SECTION 12512 -1 SECTION 12512 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS PART GENERAL I.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Horizontal slat louver blinds. B. Operating hardware. 1.02 REFERENCES A. FS AA -V-00200 - Venetian Blinds. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Horizontal metal slat louver blinds installed at window openings, manual control ofraisingand lowering bybladeangleadjustable cord; by control wand. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300. B. Submit shop drawings indicating opening sizes, tolerances required, installation of blind at window opening, method of attachment, clearances, and operation. C. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. D. Submit product data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics, operating features. �4 E. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300, F. Submit two samples 12 inches long illustrating slat materials and finish, color, cord rod type and color. G. Submit manufacturces installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with threeyearsdocumented experience. 1.06 FIELD SAMPLES �,. A. Provide samples under provisions of Section 01300. B. Construct a field sample panel, two feet long by two feet wide, illustrating complete blind assembly with operable hardware and accessories. C. Provide field sample at time of first submission of shop drawings. D. Locate where directed. E. If accepted, field sample will demonstrate minimum standard for the Work. Field sample may not remain as part of the Work. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. tib B. Deliver blinds wrapped and crated in a manner to prevent damage to components or marring of surfaces. C. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. D. Store in a clean, dry area, laid flat and blocked off ground to prevent sagging, twisting, or warping. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish ten additional slats under provisions of Section 01700. B. Fumish two additional complete blind assemblies. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Levolor. IHORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS SECTION 12512 -1 END OF SECTION HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS SECTION 12512 - 2 B. Vision Control. C, Profile. D, Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 MATERIALS A- Louver Slats: One inch wide; 0.011 inch thick spring tempered prefinished aluminum horizontal slats, with manufacturing burrs removed, radiused slat comers. B. Slat Support: Woven polypropylene, ladder configuration. C. Head Rail Housing: Prefinished, formed aluminum box, intemally fitted with hardware, pulleys and bearings for blind operation. D. Cord: Braided nylon, continuous loop, free end. E. Control Wand: Extruded hollow plastic, round shape, non -removable type, length of window opening height less 12 inches. F. Head Support Bracket: Overhead head rail housing attachment. G. Accessory Hardware: Type recommended by blind manufacturer. 2.03 FACTORY FINISHING A. Blind Slat and Head Rail Housing: Color as selected. B. Cord and Control Wand: Calor as selected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings are ready to receive the work. B. Do not commence fabrication until field measurements are confirmed. C. Ensure structural supports are correctly placed - D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturces instructions. B. Secure in place with flush countersunk fasteners. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 114 inch. B. Maximum Offset From Level: 118 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A, Adjust work under provisions of Section 01650. B. Adjust blinds for smooth operation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. 3.06 SCHEDULE Location of Windows Nominal Opening Color Size in inches A. All Window Openings Verify Existing As Selected END OF SECTION HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS SECTION 12512 - 2 SECTION 13121 PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDINGS PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pre-engineered and shop fabricated structural steel building frame. B. Sloped roof system including soffits, gutters and downspouts. C. Exterior doors, where indicated. 1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Placement ofanchor bolts, base plates and other anchorage accessories as maybe required. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Concrete footings, grade beams and floor slab. B. Section 07631 - Gutters and Downspouts. C. Section 08111 - Standard Steel Doors: Steel doors. D, Section 08112 - Standard Steel Frames: Steel frames. E. Section 09900 -Painting: Finish painting ofexterior primed steel surfaces, insidesurface of linershect, when required and touch-up requirements. F. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials & Methods: Mechanical rough -in utilities.. G. Section 16010 - Basic Electrical Requirements: Electrical rough -in utilities. 1.04 REFERENCES A. AISC - Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. B. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel. C. ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. D. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners. E. ASTM A325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. F. ASTM A386 -Zinc-coating (Hot -Dip) on Assembled Steel Products. G. ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality. H. ASTM A490 - Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. 1, ASTM A500 - Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. J. ASTM A501 - Hot Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. K. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, General Requirements, L. ASTM A529 - Structural Steel with 42,000 psi (290 MPA) Minimum Yield Point. M. ASTM A572 - High Strength Low Alloy Columbium -Vanadium Steel of Structural Quality. N. ASTM 0665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. O. AWS A2.0 - Standard Welding Symbols. P. AWS D 1.1 - Structural Welding Code. Q. FS HH -1-521 - Insulation Blankets, Thermal, Mineral Fiber. R. FS HH -1-558 - Insulation, Blocks, Boards, Blankets, Felts, Sleeving (Pipe and Tube Covering), and Pipe Fitting Covering, Thermal (Mineral Fiber, Industrial Type). PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDINGS SECTION 13121 - I 1.05 1.06 1.07 1.08 1-09 1.10 S. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Clear span rigid frame or modular rigid frame supported with intermediate columns. B. Bay spacing as indicated on the Drawings. C. Primary Framing: Rigid frame of rafter beams and columns, intermediate columns, when used, braced end frames, end wall columns, and wind bracing. D. Secondary Framing: Purlins, giro, cave struts, flange bracing, sill supports, clips, and other items as required. E. RoofSystem: Preformed metal pane Is ofstand ing-seam profile, insulation, liner sheets, when applicable, and accessory components. F. Roof Slope: '/3 inches in 12 inches. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Thermal Resistance of Roof System: R value of 19. B. Members to withstand dead load, 20 psf live load ((not reduced), and design loads due to pressure and suction of wind calculated in accordance with 1994 Standard Building Code for 80 mph basic wind speed, exposure. C. Provide drainage to exterior for water entering or condensation occurring within wall or roof system. D. Assemblytopermitmovementofcomponentswithout buckling, failure ofjointseals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to adverse temperature ranges. E. Size and fabricate and roof systems free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly dimensions, locations of structural members, connections, attachments, openings, cambers, loads, and accessories. C. Indicate wall and roofsystem dimensions, panel layout, general construction details, anchorages and method of anchorage, method or installation and accessories. D. Indicate framing anchor bolt settings, sizes, and locations from datum, and foundation loads. E. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. F. Product Data: Provide data on profiles, component dimensions, and fasteners. G Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation requirements, assembly sequence, and erection requirements. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Accurately record actual locations of concealed utilities. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC - Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer. Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. B Design structural components under direct supervision ofa Professional Structural Enginceir experienced in design ofthis work and licensed in the State of Texas. C. Design Work under direct supervision ofa Professional Structural Engineer experienced in dcsign of this work and licensed in the State of Texas. PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDINGS SECTION 13121 - 2 1 1 11 1 I I � I � I 1.11 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A Conform to applicable code for submission ofdesign calculations, reviewed shop drawings and seal requirements as required for acquiring permit. B. Cooperate with regulatory agency or authority and provide data as requested. 1.12 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this Section, under provisions of Section 01039. 1.13 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.14 WARRANTY A- Provide five year warranty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty: Include coverage for exterior pre -finished surfaces to cover pre -finished color coat against chipping, cracking or crazing, blistering, peeling, chalking, or fading. C. Warranty: Include coverage for weather tightness of building enclosure elements after installation. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS - BUILDING SYSTEM A. Chief Buildings. B. Butler Buildings. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 MATERIALS - FRAMING A. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A36, Grade 50, B. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. C. Plate or Bar Stock: ASTM A529. D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307, galvanized to ASTM A386, Class B. E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325, galvanized to ASTM A153. F. Welding Materials: AWS DIA; type required for materials being welded. G. Primer: SSPC 15, Type 1, Red Oxide. H. Grout: Non--shrinktype, premixedcompound consisting ofnon-metallic aggregate, cement water reducing and plasticizing agents, capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2400 psi in two days and 7000 psi in 28 days. 2.03 MATERIALS - ROOF SYSTEM A. Sheet Steel Stock: ASTM A446 Grade A, galvanized to ASTM A525 G90 designation. B. Insulation: FS HH -1-521, batt glass fiber type, white vinyl„ UL flame spread classification of 25 or less where exposed, roll runner attachment, 2 inches thick. C. Joint Seal Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard type. D. Fasteners: Manufacturces standard type, galvanized to ASTM A386 1.25 oz/sq ft, finish to match adjacentsurfaces when exterior exposed. E. Bituminous Paint: Asphaltic type. F. Sealant: Manufacturer's standard type, non—staining, elastomeric, skinning. G. Metal Mesh: Galvanized steel wire, woven. PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDINGS SECTION 13121 - 3 2.04 FABRICATION - FRAMING A. Fabricate members in accordance with AISC Specification for plate, bar, tube, or rolled structural shapes. B. Anchor Bolts: Formed with bent shank, assembled with template for casting into concrete. 2.05 FABRICATION - ROOF SYSTEMS A. Roofing. Minimum 1 Y, inch metal thickness, standing seam profile, seamed edges C. Girts(Purlins: Rolled formed structural shape to receive siding, roofing shcet. 2.06 FINISHES END OF SECTION PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDINGS SECTION 13121 - 4 A. Framing Members: Clean, prepare, and shop prime. B. Exterior Surfaces of Roof Components and Accessories: Galvanized coated on steel finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that foundation, floor slab, mechanical and electrical utilities, and placed anchors are in correct position. 3.02 ERECTION - FRAMING A. Erect framing in accordance with AISC Specification. B. Provide for erection and wind loads. Provide temporary bracing to maintain structure plumb and in alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Set column base plates with non -shrink grout to full plate bearing. D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect/Ertgineer. E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed. 3.03 ERECTION - ROOFING SYSTEMS A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Exercise care when cutting preftnished material to ensure cuttings do not remain on finish surface. C. Fasten cladding system to structural supports, aligned level and plumb. D. Locate end laps over supports. End laps minimum 2 inches. Place sidelaps over bearing. E. Provide expansion joints where indicated. F. Use concealed fasteners. G. Install insulation and vinyl vapor barrier utilizing for attachment. Place wire mesh under vinyl for support between framing members. H. Install sealant and gaskets to prevent weather penetration. 1. System: Free of rattles, noise due to thermal movement and wind whistles. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 114 inch from level; I/8 inch from plumb. B. Roofing: 1/8 inch from true position. END OF SECTION PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDINGS SECTION 13121 - 4 SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PARTI-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A- Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement other Division 15 Sections. 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Escutcheons. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Equipment nameplate data requirements. 5. Installation requirements common to equipment specification sections. 6. Touchup painting and finishing. B. Pipe and pipe fining materials are specified in Division 15 piping system Sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For dielectric fittings, flexible connectors, mechanical sleeve seals, and identification materials and devices. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-appl ied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20.1 for factory -threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.2 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Seetions for special joining materials not listed below. B. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8. D. Solvent Cements: Manufacturer's standard solvent cements for the following: I. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations: 1. Steel Sheet Metal: 0.0239 -inch minimum thickness, galvanized, round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. 2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. lW LB. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep -pattern type if required to conceal protruding fittings and sleeves. IBASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - I I . ID: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping. 2. OD: Completely cover opening. a. Finish: Polished chrome -plate. 2.4 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS A. General: Manufacturers standard products ofcategories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division 15 Sections, If more than one type is specified for application, selection is Installer's option, but provide one selection for each product category. B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal nameplate with operational data engraved or stamped; permanently fastened to equipment. I Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data. 2. Location: Accessible and visible location. C. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated or, if not otherwise indicated for piping systems, comply with ASME A13.1 for colors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install piping as described below, unless piping Sections specify otherwise. Individual Division 15 piping Sections specify unique piping installation requirements. B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans,schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated, unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. D. Install piping free of sags and bends. E. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited, unless otherwise indicated. F. Install piping tight to slabs,beams,joists,columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal. G. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1 -inch clearance around insulation. H. Locate to to groups of pipes parallel each other, spaced permit valve servicing. 1. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. J. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall board partitions, and suspended ceilings according to the following: K. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum -board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. i. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. ' 2. Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses. 3. Install sleeves large enough to provide 114 -inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: , L. Fire -Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating ofwalls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping materials. M. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in individual piping specification Sections:. I. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 2, Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. 3. Plastic Piping Solvent -Cement Joints: Clean and dryjoining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 2 A. Install equipment to provide maximum possible headroom, if mounting heights art not indicated. B Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to Architect C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces. D. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. E. Install equipment giving right ofway to piping installed at required slope. s 3.3 PAINTING AND FINISHING A. Do not paint piping specialties with factory -applied finish. B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory -painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. 3.4 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to supportand anchor mechanical materials and equipment. END OF SECTION 15050 i 1 IBASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 3 SECTION 15100- VALVES PARTI-GENERAL 1.I RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general duty valves common to several mechanical piping systems. PW B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: Irr 1. Valve tags and charts are specified in Section 15050. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, B. Product Data foreach valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure and temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. Include list indicating valve and +� its application. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. B. Use the following precautions during storage: I. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew -point temperature. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that maybe incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Ball Valves: a. Grinnell Corp. b. NIBCO Inc. C. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc. 2.2 BASIC, COMMON FEATURES A. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated. B. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems arranged to receive insulation. C. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP -45 bypass and drain connections. VALVES 15100-1 D. Threads: AStv1E 81.20.1. E. Solder Joint: ASME 816.18. 2.3 BALL VALVES A. Ball Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller: HISS SP -110, Class 150,3 -piece construction; chrome -plated brass ball, full port; blowout proof; bronze or brass stem; teflon seats and seals; threaded or soldered end connections: 1. Operator: Vinyl-overed steel lever handle. 2. Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance ofvalves. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 8. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. C. Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operation, D, Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. C. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. D. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe. F Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement. 3.3 VALVE END SELECTION A. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections: 1. Copper Tube Size, 2-1f2 Inches and Smaller: Solder ends. 2. Steel Pipe Sizes, 2-1/2 Inches and Smaller: Threaded end. 3.4 APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Domestic Water Systems: Use the following valve types' 1. Ball Valves: Class 150, 600 -psi CWP, with stem extension. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjustor replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists. END OF SECTION 15100 VALVES 15100.2 1 SECTION 15145 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PARTI- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawing and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical systems piping and equipment_ B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for materials for attaching hangers and supports to building structure. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Terminology used in this Section is defined in MSS SP -90. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Listing and Labeling: Provide hangers and supports that are listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Hangers, Supports, and Components: Factory -fabricated according to MSS SP -58. I. Components include galvanized coatings where installed for piping and equipment that will not have a field -applied finish. 2. Pipe attachments include nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection where attachments are in directcontact with copper tubing. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex -head, track bolts and nuts. B. Washers: ASTM F 944, steel, plain, flat washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in the Section specifying the equipment and systems. B. Comply with MSS SP -69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping specification Sections. 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with MSS SP -69. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to property support piping from building structure. B. Arrange for grouping of paral let runs of horizontal piping supported together on field -fabricated, heavy-duty trapeze hangers where possible. C. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP -69. D. Where pipes of various sizes are supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15145-1 E. Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP -69. install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, Manges, guides, strainers, expansionjoints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert to forms. Install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. G. Heavy -Duty Steel Trapezes: Field -fabricate from ASTM A 36 steel shapes selected for loads being supported. H. install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems. 1. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment- J. quipmentJ. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME 831.9 is not exceeded. K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements. I. Clamps: Attachelamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation-, do not exceed pipe Stresses allowed by ASME B31.9. 2. Shields: Install MSS Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields span an arc of 180 degrees and have dimensions in inches not less 17 inches by 18 gauge thick. 3. Insert Material: Length at least as long as the protective shield. 3.3. ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe, 3.4 PAINTING A. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." 1. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing -repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 15145 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15145 - 2 1 SECTION 15170 - MOTORS PARTI-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory -installed and field -installed motors. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Sections for application of motors and reference to specific motor requirements for motor -driven equipment. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 BASIC MOTOR REQUIREMENTS A. Basic requirements apply to mechanical equipment motors, unless otherwise indicated. B. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Polyphase. C. Motors Smaller than IR HP: Single phase. D. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated. E. Enclosure: Open dripproof, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 POLYPHASE MOTORS A. Description: NEW MG 1, medium induction motor. 2.3 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS A. Type: As indicated or selected by manufacturer from one of the following, to suit starting torque and other requirements of specific motor application. 1. Permanent -split capacitor. B. Shaded -Pole Motors: Do not use, unless motors are smaller than 1120 hp. C. Thermal Protection: Where indicated or required, internal protection automatically opens power supply Circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal protection device automatically resets when motor temperature returns to normal range, unless otherwise indicated. D. Bearings: Ball-bearing type for belt -connected motors and outer motors with high radial forces on motor shaft. Sealed, prelubricated sleeve bearings for other single-phase motors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ADJUSTING A. Use adjustable motor mounting bases for belt -driven motors. B. Align pulleys and install belts. END OF SECTION 15170 MOTORS 15170 -1 SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION PARTI-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes pipe, duct, and equipment insulation. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 15 Section "Supports and Anchors" for pipe insulation shields and protection saddles. 1 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Hot Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures of 75 deg F or higher. S. Dual -Temperature Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures that vary from hot to cold. C. Cold Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures less than 75 deg F. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of mechanical insulation identifying k -value, thickness, and accessories. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Conform to the following characteristics for insulation including facings, cements, and adhesives, when tested according to ASTM E 84. Label insulation with appropriate markings of testing laboratory. 1. Interior Insulation: Flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after testing of piping and duct systems. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,. the following: 1. Glass Fiber: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Knauf Fiberglass GmbH. C. Manville.. d. Owens -Coming Fiberglas Corporation, 2.2 GLASS FIBER A. Material: Inorganic glass fibers, bonded with a thermosetting resin. B. Jacket: Ali -purpose, Factory -applied, laminated glass -fiber -reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil having self-sealing lap. MECHANICAL INSULATION t5250-1 I C. Preformed Pipe Insulation: ASTM C 547, Class 1, rigid pipe insulation, jacketed. 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.26 Btu x inch/h x sq. ft. x deg F average maximum at 75 deg F mean temperature. D. Blanket: ASTM C 553, Type 11, Class F-1, jacketed flexible blankets. 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.32 Btu x inch/h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.046 W x mJsq. m x K) average maximum, at 75 deg F (24 deg C) mean temperature. E. Adhesive: Produced under the UL Classification and Follow-up service. 1. Type: Non-flammable, solvent -based. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 180 deg F. 2.3 ADHESIVES A. Lagging Adhesive: MIL -A -3316C, non-flammable adhesive in the following Classes and Grades: I. Class I, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unlaced glass fiber insulation, seating edges of glass fiber insulation, and bonding lagging cloth to unfaced glass fiber insulation. 2. Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass fiber insulation to metal surfaces. 2.4 JACKETS A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, except as otherwise indicated. B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated glass -fiber -reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and aluminum foil. C. PVC Fitting Covers: Factory -fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20 mil thick, high -impact, ultra -violet -resistant PVC. 1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean, dry, and remove foreign materials such as rust, scale, and dirt. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL. A. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required for each mechanical system. B. Select accessories compatible with materials suitable for the service. Select accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack the insulation or jacket in either the wet or dry state. C. Install vapor barriers on insulated pipes, ducts, and equipment having surface operating temperatures below 60 deg F. D. Apply insulation material, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's printed instructions. E. Install insulation with smooth, straight, and even surfaces. insulation vapor barrier. F. Seal joints and seams to maintain vapor barrier on requiring a G. Seal penetrations for hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections in insulation requiring a vapor barrier. H. Seal Ends: Except for flexible elastomeric insulation, taper ends at 45 degree angle and seal with lagging adhesive. Cut ends of flexible clastomeric cellular insulation square and seal with adhesive. I, Apply adhesives and coatings at manufacturer's recommended coverage -per -gallon rate. J. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. K. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment: 1. Metal ducts with duct liner. MECHANICAL rNSULATION 15250-2 Y 1 L] t 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 2. Factory -insulated flexible ducts. 3. Flexible connectors for ducts and pipes. 4. Testing laboratory labels and stamps. 5. Nameplates and data plates. 6. Access panels and doors in air distribution systems. 7. Sanitary drainage and vent piping. 8. Chrome -plated pipes and fittings, except for plumbing fixtures for the disabled. 9. Piping specialties including air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators. 3.3 PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Tightly butt longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond with adhesive. B. Stagger joints on double layers of insulation. C. Apply insulation continuously over fittings, valves, and specialties, except as otherwise indicated. D. Apply insulation with a minimum number of joints. E. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows: 1. Pull jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with buttstrips, at least 3 inches wide, and ofsame material as insulationjacket. Secure with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of butt strip and space 4 inches on center. 1 Longitudinal Seams: Overlap seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches on center. a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation applied to piping systems with surface temperatures at or below 35 deg F. 4. Vapor Barrier Coatings: Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply on seams and joints, over staples, and at ends butt to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings. 5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, Fill and seal voids with vapor barrier coating. 6. Repair damaged insulation jackets, except metal jackets, by applying jacket material around damaged jacket. Adhere, staple, and seal. Extend patch at least 2 inches in both directions beyond damaged insulation jacket and around the entire circumference of the pipe. F. Interior Walls and Partitions Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and partitions, except fire -rated walls and partitions. G. Fire -Rated Walls and Partitions Penetrations: Terminate insulation at penetrations through Fre-rated walls and partitions. Seal insulation ends with vapor barrier coating. Seat around penetration with firestopping or fire-resistant joint sealer. Refer to Division 7 for fuestopping and fire-resistant joint sealers. H. Flanges, Fittings, and Valves - Interior Exposed and Concealed: Coat pipe insulation ends with vapor barrier coating. Apply premolded, precut, or field -fabricated segments of insulation around flanges, unions, valves, and fittings. Make joints tight. Bond with adhesive. I. Use same material and thickness as adjacent pipe insulation. 2. Overlap nesting insulation by 2 inches or 1 -pipe diameter, which ever is greater. 3. Apply materials with adhesive, fill voids with mineral fiber insulating cement. Secure with wire or tape. 4. Insulate elbows and tees smaller than 3 inches pipe size with premolded insulation. I. Hangers and Anchors: Apply insulation continuously through hangers. Install saddles, shields, and inserts as specified in Division 15 Section "Supports and Anchors." For cold surface piping, extend insulation on anchor legs a minimum of 12 inches and taper and seal insulation ends. Inserts and Shields: Cover hanger inserts and shields with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. 3.4 GLASS FIBER PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Bond insulation to pipe with lagging adhesive. B. Seal exposed ends with lagging adhesive. C. Seal seams and joints with vapor barrier compound. 3.5 DUCT INSULATION A. Blanket Insulation: Install tight and smooth. Secure to ducts having long sides or diameters as follows: MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 3 L Smaller Than 24 Inches (6 10 mm): Bonding adhesive applied in 6 inches (150 mm) wide transverse strips on 12 inches (300 mm) centers. 2. 24 Inches (610 mm) and Larger: Anchor pins spaced 12 inches (300 mm) apart each way. Apply bonding adhesive to prevent sagging of the insulation. 3. Overlap joints 3 inches (75 mm). 4. Seal joints, breaks, and punctures with vapor barrier compound. 3.6 JACKETS A. Foil and Paper Jackets (FY); Install jackets drawn tight Install lap or butt steps atjoints with material same as jacket. Secure with adhesive. Install jackets with 1-112 inches laps at longitudinal joints and 3 inch wide butt strips at end joints. 1. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor barrier jackets and exposed insulation with vapor barrier compound. 3.7 APPLICATIONS A. Interior Piping Systems: Unless otherwise indicated, insulate the following piping systems: 1. Domestic cold water, hot water, and hot water return. 2. Condensate drain lines. 3.7 PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULES A. Domestic Cold Water, Hot Water, Hot Water Return, and Condensate Drain Piping.: I inch thick glass fiber insulation with vapor barrier. 3.7 DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULES A. Supply Ductwork, Outside Air Ductwork, and Return Ductwork: 2 inch thick glass fiber insulation with vapor barrier. END OF SECTION 15250 1 MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 - 4 1 SECTION 15330 - FIRE -SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions ofthe Contract, including General and. Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fire -suppression sprinklers, piping, and equipment for the following building systems; 1. Wet -pipe, fire -suppression sprinklers, including piping, valves, specialties, and automatic sprinklers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Working Plans: Documents, including drawings, calculations, and material specifications prepared according to NFPA 13 for obtaining approval from authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design sprinkler system in accordance with NFPA 13 and obtain approval from local authorities having jurisdiction. B. Design sprinkler piping according to the following and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Include 10 percent margin of safety for available water flow and pressure. 2. Include losses through water -service piping, valves, and backflow preventers. 3. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications: Refer to drawings. 4. Minimum Density for Automatic -Sprinkler Piping Design: As follows: a. Light -Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500 -sq. ft. area. 5. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler:: According to NFPA 13 recommendations C. Components and Installation: Capable of producing piping systems with 175 -prig minimum working -pressure rating, unless otherwise indicated. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: I. Pipe and fitting materials and methods of joining for sprinkler piping. 2. Pipe hangers and supports. 3. Valves, including specialty valves, accessories, and devices. 4. Alarm devices. Include electrical data. 5. Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics, mounting, finish, and other pertinent data. B. Fire -Hydrant Flow Test Report: As specified in "Preparation" Article. C. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, Include hydraulic calculations. D. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping' and "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping." E. Maintenance Data: For each type of sprinkler specialty to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division I. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has designed and installed fire -suppression piping similar to that indicated for this FIRE -SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 15330 - t Project, has obtained design approval and inspection approval from authorities having jurisdiction, and is licensed by the State of Texas. B. Engineering Responsibility- Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a responsible managing employee Iiscensed by the State of Texas. Base calculations on results of fire -hydrant flow test. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms whose equipment, specialties, and accessories are listed by product name and manufacturer in UL's"Fire Protection Equipment Directory" and FM's "Fire Protection Approval Guide" and that comply with other requirements indicated. D- Sprinkler Components: Listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. NFPA Standards: Equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing complying with the following: 1. NEPA 13, 'Installation of Sprinkler Systems." 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra matenals described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall -mounting steel cabinet and hinged cover, with space for a minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include the number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and wrench for sprinklers. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that maybe incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Specialty Valves and Devices: a. Central Sprinkler Corp. b. Grinnell Corp. C. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. d. Star Sprinkler Corp. C. Viking Corp. 2. Water -Flow Indicators and Supervisory Switches: a. Grinnell Corp. b. Potter Electric Signal Co. C. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. d. Viking Corp. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. 3. Sprinkler, Drain and Alarm Test Fittings: a. Central Sprinkler Corp. b. Grinnell Corp. C. Victaulic Co. of America. 4. Sprinkler, Branch -Line Test Fittings: a. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc. b. Smith Industries, Inc.; Potter-Rocmer Div. 5. Sprinklers: a. Central Sprinkler Corp. b. Grinnell Corp. C. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. d. Star Sprinkler Corp. C. Viking Corp.. o. Fire-Protection-Seryice Valves: a FIRE -SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 15330-2 1 1 i] 1 11 i71 r a. Central Sprinkler Corp. b. Grinnell Corp. C. Nibco, Inc. d. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc. C. Victaulic Co. of America. 2.2 PIPES AND TUBES A. Ductile -Iron Pipe: AWWA C 115 or AWWA C 151, with cement -mortar lining and seal coat according to AWWA C 104 and ends factory or field, radius -cut grooved according to AWWA 0606. B. Standard -Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, ASTM A 135, or ASTM A 795; Schedule 40 in NPS 6 and smaller, and Schedule 30 in NPS 8 and larger. C. Schedule 30 Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795, with wall thickness less than Schedule 40 and equal to of greater than Schedule 30 or ASTM A 795 and ASME B36. 10M, Schedule 30 wrought -steel pipe. D. Schedule 10 Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795, Schedule 10 in NPS 5 and smaller and NFPA 13 specified wall thickness in NPS 6 to NPS 10. 2.3 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS A. Ductile -Iron Fittings: ASTM A47, malleable -iron or ASTM A 536, ductile -iron casting complying with AWWA pipe size; with ends factory grooved according to AWWA C606. B. Cast -Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1. C. Cast-iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B 16.4. D. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5. E. Steel, Grooved -End Fittings: UL -listed and FM -approved, ASTM A 47, malleable iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron; with dimensions matching steel pipe and ends factory grooved according to AWWA C606. 2.4 J0lN1NG MATERIALS A. Ductile -Iran, Keyed Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, for ductile -iron pipe dimensions. Include ASTM A 536, ductile -iron housing, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts and nuts. B. Ductile -Iron, Flanged Joints: AWWA C115, ductile -iron or gray -iron pipe flanges, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts and nuts. C. Steel, Keyed Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606,for steel -pipe dimensions. Include ASTM A 536, ductile -iron housing, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts and nuts. Include listing for dry -pipe service for couplings for dry piping. 2.5 FIRE -PROTECTION -SERVICE VALVES A. General: UL listed and FM approved, with minimum 175 -prig nonshock working -pressure rating. Valves for grooved -end piping may be fumished with grooved ends instead of type of ends specified. B. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: UL 262; cast -bronze, threaded ends; solid wedge; OS&Y; and rising stem. C. Indicating Valves, NPS 2-1f2 and Smaller. UL 1091; butterfly or ball -type, bronze body with threaded ends; and integral indicating device. 1. Indicator: Electrical 115-V ac, prewired, one or two circuit as required, supervisory switch. D. Gate Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: UL 262, iron body, bronze mounted, taperwedge, OS&Y, and rising stem. Include replaceable, bronze, wedge facing rings and flanged ends. E. Swing Check Valves, N PS 2- 1/2 and Larger: UL 312, cast-iron body and bolted cap, with bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze -disc ring and flanged ends. 2.6 SPECIALTY VALVES FIRE -SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 15330 - 3 A. Alarm Check Valvcs: UL 193, 175 -prig working pressure, designed for horizontal or vertical installation, with cast-iron flanged inlet and outlet, bronze grooved seat with O-ring seals, and single -hinge pin and latch design. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electric sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages, retarding chamber, and fill -line attachment with strainer. 1. Option: Grooved -end connections for use with keyed couplings. 2. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves, and separatc from main drain piping. 3. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping. B. Ball Drip Valves: UL 1726, automatic drain valve, NPS 314, ball check device with threaded ends. A. Automatic Sprinklers: With heat -responsive element complying with the following: I. UL 199. 2, UL 1767, for early suppression, fast -response applications. B, Sprinkler Types and Categories: Nominal 1i2 -inch orifice for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating. C. Sprinkler types, features, and options include the following: i. Pendent sprinklers. 2. Quick -response sprinklers. 3. Upright sprinklers. D. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome -plated, bronze, and painted. E. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed -type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers. 1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome -plated steel, two piece, with I -inch vertical adjustment. F. Sprinkler Guards: Wire -cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler. 2.8 ALARIM DEVICES A. General: Types matching piping and equipment connections. B. Water -Motor -Operated Alarms: UL 753, mechanicaWperation type with pelton-wheel operator with shaft length, hearings, and sleeve to suit wall construction and ID -inch- diameter, cast -aluminum alarm gong with red -enamel factory finish. Include NPS 314 inlet and NPS 1 drain connections. C. Water -Flow Indicators: UL 346; electrical -supervision, vane -type water -flow detector, with 250 -prig pressure rating; and designed for horizontal or vertical installation. Include two single -pole, double -throw, circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125- V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory -set, field -adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed. D. Valve Supervisory Switches: UL 753; electrical; singie-poie, double throw; with normally closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than fully open position. 2.9 PRESSURE GAGES A. Pressure Gages: UL 393, 3-Il2- to 4 -1l2 -inch- diameter dial with dial range of 0 to 250 psig. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Perform fire -hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NEPA 291. Use results for system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article in Part I of this Section. FIRE -SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 15330-4 3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Flanges, unions, and transition and special fittings with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground applications, unless otherwise indicated. B. Sprinkler Feed Mains and Risers: Use the following: 1. NPS 6 and Smaller: Standard -"tight steel pipe with grooved ends. 2. NPS 6 and Smaller- Schedule 10 steel pipe with roll -grooved ends. C. Sprinkler Branch Piping: Use the following: 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Standard -weight steel pipe with threaded ends. 2. NPS 2 and Smaller- Schedule 10 steel pipe with roll -grooved ends. 3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply, 1 _ Fire -Protection -Service Valves: UL listed and FM approved for applications where required by NFPA 13. a. Shutoff Duty: Use gate valves. 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic pipingjoint construction. B. Steel -Piping, Grooved Joints: Use Schedule 40 steel pipe with cut or roll -grooved ends and Schedule 30 or thinner steel pipe with roll - grooved ends; steel, grooved -end fittings; and steel, keyed couplings. Assemblejoints with couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling manufacturer's written instructions. Use gaskets listed for dry -pipe service for dry piping. 3,5 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation. B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical. I. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans. C. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. D. Install Flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1i2 and larger connections. E. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler piping, complete with shutoff valve, sized and located according to NFPA 13. F. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage. G. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check valves. Drain to floor drain or outside building. H. Install alarm devices in piping systems. 1. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials and installation. J. Earthquake Protection: Install piping according to NFPA 13 to protect from earthquake damage. K. Install piping with grooved joints according to manufacturer's wTitten instructions. Construct rigid piping joints, unless otherwise indicated. L. Install pressure gages on riser or fecd main and at each sprinkler test connection. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 114 and with soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing. FIRE•SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 15330- 5 3.6 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Gate Valves: Install fire -protection -service valves supervised -open, located to control sowces of water supply except from fire department connections. Provide permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve. B. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in vertical position for proper direction of flow, including bypass check valve and retard chamber drain - line connection. 3.7 SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS A. General: Use sprinklers according to the following applications: L Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers. 2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Pendent sprinklers. 3. Sprinkler Finishes: Use sprinklers with the following finishes: a. Sprinklers: Chrome -plated. 3.8 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical panels and tiles. 3.9 CONNECTIONS A. Connect water supplies to sprinklers. Include backflow preventers if required by authority having jurisdiction.. B. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection. Drain to floor drain or outside building. C. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm by Division 16. 3.10 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13 and in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler piping according to NFPA 13, "System Acceptance" Chapter. B. Replace piping system components that do not pass test procedures and retest to demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until satisfactory results are obtained. C. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. 3.12 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers. B. Remove and replace sprinklers having paint other than factory finish. 3.13 PROTECTION A. Protect sprinklers from damage until Substantial Completion. 3,14 COMMISSIONING A. Verify that valves, trim, fittings, controls, and accessories are installed and operate correctly. B. Verify that specified tests of piping are complete. C. Verify that damaged sprinklers and sprinklers with paint or coating not specified are replaced with new, correct type. FIRE -SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 15330-6 D Verify that sprinklers are correct types, have correct finishes and temperature ratings, and have guards as required for each application. E. Verify that potable -water supplies have correct types of backflow preventers. F. Fill wet -pipe sprinkler piping with water. G. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. K Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required. 3.15 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate equipment, specialties, and accessories. Review operating and maintenance information. B. Schedule demonstration with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice. END OF SECTION 15336 FIRE -SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 15330-7 SECTION 15411 - WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING I; illow ZIA:1-11 I. i RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes water distribution piping from locations indicated to fixtures and equipment inside building. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for water distribution piping specialties. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Water Samples, Test Results, and Reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made to specified standards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPES AND TUBES A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L, water tube, drawn temper. B. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedules 40. 2.2 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS A. Copper, Solder -Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B 16.22 wrought capper. B. Copper Unions: ASME B 16.18, cast -copper -alloy, hexagonal -stock body with ball-and-socket joint, metal -to -metal seating surfaces, and solder joint, threaded, or solder joint and threaded ends. Include threads conforming to ASME B 1.20.1 on threaded ends. C. Schedule 40, PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2466, 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Solder: ASTM B 32, Alloy Sn95, Sn94, or E; lead free. B. Transition Couplings: Coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to, and with ends compatible with piping to be joined. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. B. Underground, Service Entrance Piping: Do not use flanges or valves underground. Use the following: 1. 2 -Inch NPS and Smaller: PVC, Schedule 40 pipe; PVC, Schedule 40 fittings; and solvent -cemented joints. WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 15411 - 1 C. Aboveground Piping: I . Hard copper tube, Type L; copper, solder -joint fittings; and soldered joints. 3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: I. Shutoff Duty: Use ball valves. 3.3 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING INSTALLATION A. Extend service entrance piping to exterior water service piping in sizes and locations indicated for service entrances into building. B. Install shutoff valve, hose -end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside building at each service entrance pipe C. Install wall penetration system at each service entrance pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for wall penetration systems. 3.4 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install piping level without pitch. 3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction. B. Solvent -Cemented, Thermoplastic Pipe and Fitting Joints: Handle cleaners, primers, and solvent cements according to ASTM F 402. 3.6 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves close to main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, and where indicated. Use ball valves. B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoffvalve on each water supply to equipment, on each supply to plumbing fixtures without supply stops, and where indicated. Use ball valves. 3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. Install the following: 1. Riser clamps, MSS Type 8 or Type 42, for vertical runs. 2. Adjustable steel cicvis hangers, MSS Type I, for individual, straight, horizontal runs 100 feet and less. B. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." C. Support piping and tubing according to MSS SP -69 and manufacturees written instructions. 3.8 CONNECTIONS A. Connect water distribution piping to service entrance piping at shutoff valve, and extend to and connect to the following: 1. Mumbing Fixtures: Connect hot- and cold -water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures." 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 15411 - 2 1 below in presence of authorities having junsdiction. a. Roughing -In. Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing -in after roughing -in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. C. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Do not operate water heaters before Filling with water. ID. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. END OF SECTION 15411 !7 6 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 15411-3 3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction fmd that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. 3.10 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing water piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed, procedure described in AWWA C651 or as described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b- Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Fill system or pan thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours. C. Flush system with clean, potable water until chlorine is no longer in water coming from system after the standing time. d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination shows contamination. B. Prepare and submit reports for purging and disinfecting activities. C. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. 3.1I COMMISSIONING A. Fill water piping_ Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water. B, Perform the following steps before putting into operation: 1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of piping during installation. 5. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 6. Remove filter eamidges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application where used and that cartridges are clean and ready for use. C. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Do not operate water heaters before Filling with water. ID. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. END OF SECTION 15411 !7 6 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 15411-3 SECTION 15420 - DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMEMS A_ Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A_ This Section includes sanitarydrains a and ventpiping,and storm drainage piping inside building and to locations indicated. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for drainage and vent piping system specialties. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Service Entrance Piping: Drainage piping at entry into building between outside building sewer piping and inside drainage piping. B. Drainage and Vent Piping: Piping inside building that conveys wastewater and vapors from fixtures and equipment throughout the building. C. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic and other piping materials: 1. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride. 1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following minimum working -pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Systems: 10 -foot head of water. 2. Storm Drainage Systems: 10 -foot head of water. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Test Results and Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" Article. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made to specified standards. B. Comply with ASME 831.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. C. Complywith NSF 14,"Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; "NSF -drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF -tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and "NSF - sewer" for plastic sewer piping. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPES AND TUBES A_ General: Applications of the following pipe and tube materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. B. Hubless, Cast -Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A 888 or CISP1301. C. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2665, Schedule 40. D. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper. DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING 15420-1 2.2 PIPE AND TUBE FrrTINGS A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube fitting materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. B- Threaded -Fitting, End Connections: ASME B1.20.1. C. Copper, Soldcr-Joint Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23 cast copper or ASME B16.29 wrought copper. D. Hubless, Cast -Iron, Soil -Pipe Fittings: CISPI 301. E. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311 drain, waste, and vent pipe patterns. F. PVC Plastic, Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409 drainage pattern, with ends as required for application. �il�] .I .CHi�►:�iti�:in�7 A. General: Applications of the following pipingjoining materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article. B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for commonly used joining materials. C, Hubless, Cast -Iron, Soil -Piping Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly ofinetal housing corrosion -resistant fasteners, and ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve or gasket with integral, center pipe stop. Include the following: I. Heavy -Duty, Stainless -Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel housing or shield; and stainless-steel clamps. Include gasket. a. Clamp Width: 3 inches (75 mm) wide with 4 clamps, for piping 1-1l2- to 4 -inch NPS. D. Solder: ASTM B 32, Alloy Sn95, Sn94, or E; lead free, E. Copper, Keyed Couplings: Copper -tube dimensions and design similar to AWWA C606. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Aboveground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following: I. I-1/2-to4-lachNPS: Hubless,cast-iron soil pipe, hubless, cast- iron, so il-pipe fittings; and one of the following hubless, cast-iron, soil -piping couplings: a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 301, stainless steel. B. Underground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following: 1. PVC plastic pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. 3.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING INSTALLATION A. Extend building sanitary drain piping and connect to sanitary sewer piping in sizes and locations indicated for service entrances into building. Install cleanout and extension to grade at connections of building sanitary drains with building sanitary sewers. 3.3 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation ofCast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 1 B. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long -sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short - sweep 114 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long -tum, double Y -branch and 1/8 -bend fittings if fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not make change indirection of flow greater than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if different sizes of piping are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. C. Lay buried building drain piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING 15420 - 2 r� D. Install drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Horizontal, Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 2. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack. E. Install engineered, sanitary drainage and vent systems in locations indicated and as follows: I. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction. F. Install PVC plastic drainage piping according to ASTM D 2665. 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic pipingjoint construction. B. Cast-fron, Soil -Piping Joints: Makejoints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 1. Hubless Joints'. Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp. C. PVC Piping Joints: Join drainage piping according to ASTM D 2665, 3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. Install the following: 1. Riser clamps, MSS Type 8 or Type 42, for vertical runs. 2. Adjustable steel clevis hangers, MSS Type 1, for individual, straight, horizontal runs 100 feet and less. B- Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." C. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP -69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 CONNECTIONS r A. Connect drainage piping to service entrance piping, and extend to and connect to the following: L Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 2. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect drainage and vent piping as follows: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. During installation, notify authorities havingjurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction_ a. Roughing -fn Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing -in after roughing -in and before 16 setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. 3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. 4, Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Test drainage and vent piping according to procedures ofauthorities havingjurisdiction or, in absence of published procedure, as follows: t, 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved. 3. Roughing -In Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing -in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10 feet of head. Water level must not drop from 15 minutes before inspection starts through completion of inspection. Inspect joints for leaks. HIM".OF:[P1 1►1 �1*/ �I►i t� � l i l�[*>i bJ��tIItl 4. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results arc obtained. 5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. Protect drauis during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and dtbns and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. 1 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING 15420 - 4 VW SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PARTI-GENERAL err 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS r.." A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes plumbing specialties for the following: 1. Water distribution systems. 2. Soil, waste, and vent systems. 3. Storm drainage systems. B. Related Sections include the following: Wilt I. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for piping joining materials, joint construction, basic installation requirements, and labeling and identifying requirements; and escutcheons, dielectric fittings, sleeves, and sleeve seals that are not in this Section. 2. Division 15 Section "Valves" for general -duty ball, butterfly, check, gate, and globe valves. 3. Division 15 Section "Water Distribution Piping" for water -supply piping and connections. 4. Division 15 Section "Drainage and Vent Piping" for drainage and vent piping and connections. ' 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide components and installation capable ofproducing piping systems with following minimum working -pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated: I. Water Distribution Piping: 125 psig. 2. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10 -foot head of water. 3. Storm Drainage Piping: I0 -foot head of water. 11 +aw 1.4 SUBMITTALS NA. Product Data: For each plumbing specialty indicated. Include rated capacities of selected equipment and shipping, installed, and operating weights. Indicate materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components; and piping and wiring connections for the following plumbing specialty products: rrittt I. Water hammer arresters. 2. Clcanouts. 3. Floor drains. 4. Vent caps, vent terminals, and roof flashing assemblies. 5. Roof drains. 6. Sleeve penetration systems. B. Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" Article. C. Maintenance Data: For specialties to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following: i, I. Trap seal primer valves and systems. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, dimensional requirements, and characteristics of plumbing specialties and arc based on the specific types and models indicated. Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions." B. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on plumbing specialties made to specified standards. C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated plumbing specialties specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. I. Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - I D. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and MSW[ation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but arc not limited to, the following: I. Water Hammer Arresters: a. Amtrol, Inc. It. Iosam Co. C. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. d. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. C. tum Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Water Hammer Arresters: ASME Al 12.26. l M, ASSE 1010, or PDI -WH 2O1, bellows or piston type with pressurized cushioning chamber. Sizes are based on water -supply fixture units, ASME Al12.26.IM sizes A through F and PDI -WH 201 sizes A through F. B. Deep -Seal Traps: Cast iron or bronze, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping, cleanout where indicated, and trap seal primer valve connection where indicated - 1. 2 -Inch NPS: 4 -inch- minimum water seal. 2. 2-12 Inch NPS and Larger: 5 -inch- minimum water seal. C. Floor -Drain Inlet Fittings: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap seal primer valve connection. D. Stack Flashing Fittings: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe. PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.1 PLUMBING SPECIALTY INSTALLATION A. General: Install plumbing specialty components, connections, and devices according to manufacturers written instructions. B Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping as indicated, and where not indicated, according to the following: L Size same as drainage piping up to 4 -inch NPS. Use 4 -inch NPS for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated, ' 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. C. Install cleanout deck plates, of types indicated, with top flush with finished floor, for floor cleanouts for piping below floors. ' D- install cleanout wall access covers, oftypes indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall, for cleanouts located in concealed piping. E. Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through floors with waterproof membrane. F. Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing according to manufacturer's written instructions. G. Install frost -proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through root Maintain I -inch clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate. H. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor or as indicated. Size outlets as indicated. I. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. J. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated. K. Install floor -drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430-2 11 u 1 1 1 membranes where penetrated. L. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. M. Fasten wall -hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached to building substrate if supports are specified and to building wall construction if no support is indicated, N. Fasten recessed, wall -mounting plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls. O. Secure supplies to supports or substrate. P. Install individual stop valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball valve if specific valve is not indicated. Q. Install water -supply stop valves in accessible locations. R. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated. S. Locate drainage piping as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures and drains. T. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattem escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. U. Include wood -blocking reinforcement for recessed and wall -mounting plumbing specialties. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division l5 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Install piping connections betwecn plumbing specialties and piping specified in other Division 15 Sections. 2. Install piping connections indicated between appliances and equipment specified in other Sections, connect directly to plumbing piping systems - 3. Install piping connections indicated as indirect wastes from appliances and equipment specified in other Sections, to spill over receptors connected to plumbing piping systems. B. Install hoses between plumbing specialties and appliances as required for connections. C. Supply Runouts to Plumbing Specialties: Install cold -water -supply piping of sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Drainage Runouts to Plumbing Specialties: Install drainage and vent piping, with approved trap, of sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Fabricate flashing manufactured from single piece. B. Bum joints of lead sheets where required. C. Solder joints of copper sheets where required. D. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors with waterproof membrane. 1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe. 2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve. E. Set flashing on floors in solid coating of bituminous cement. F. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device. 3.4 COMMISSIONING A. Before startup, perform the following checks: 1. System tests are complete. 2. Damaged and defective specialties and accessories have been replaced or repaired. 3. Clear space is provided for servicing specialties. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 3 B. Before operating systems, perform the following steps I . Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open general -duty valves to fully open position. 3. Remove and clean strainers. 4. Verify that drainage and vent piping are clear of obstructions. Flush with water until clear. C. Startup Procedures: Follow manufacturers written instructions. If no procedures are prescribed by manufacturer, proceed as follows 1. Energize circuits for electrically operated units. Start and run units through complete sequence of operations. D. Adjust operation and correct deficiencies discovered during commissioning. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Startup Services: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to perform startup services and train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below: L Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup of and servicing interceptors. 2. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup of and servicing grease recovery units. 3. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." 4. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division I Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." 5. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' advance notice. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 4 SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FLXTURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions ofthe Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and trim, faucets, other fittings, and related components. B. Rclated Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 15 Section "Valves" for general -duty valves used as supply stops. 2. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for backflow preventers and other specialties not specified in this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Accessible: Plumbing fixture, building, facility, or portion thereofthat can be approached, entered, and used by physically handicapped, disabled, and elderly people. B, Fitting: Device [hatcontrolsflow ofwaterinto orout ofplumbingfixture. Finingsspecifredinthis Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, traps and waste pipes. Pipe fittings, tube fittings, and general -duty valves are included where indicated. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each plumbing fixture category and type specified. Include selected fixture, trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow -control rates. C. Maintenance data for plumbing fixtures and components to include in the operation and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category from one source and by a single manufacturer. Exception: Where fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for this category. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements ofCABO Al 1T 1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90- 480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; regarding plumbing fixtures for physically handicapped people. C. Energy Policy Act Requirements: Comply with requirements of Public Law 102.486, "Energy Policy Act," regarding water flow rate and water consumption of plumbing fixtures. D. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures and components speciftcd in this Section that are listed and labeled. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. E. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible. F. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, dimensional requirements, and characteristics of plumbing fixtures and are based on specific types and models indicated. Other manufacturers' fixtures with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division I Section "Substitutions." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver plumbing fixtures in manufacturers protective packing, crating, and covering. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440-1 B. Store plumbing fixtures on elevated platforms in dry location. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Coordinate roughing -in and fatal fixture locations and verify that plumbing fixtures can be insts3led to comply with original design and referenced standards. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.l PLUMBING FIXTURE STANDARDS A. Comply with applicable standards below and other requirements specified. 1. Electric Water Coolers: ARI 1010 and UL 399. 2. Stainless -Steel Fixtures Other than Service Sinks: ASME Al 12.19.3M. 3. Vitreous -China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M. 4. Water -Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASS 1037_ 2.2 LAVATORY/SINK FAUCET STANDARDS A. Comply with ASME A 112.18.1 M and other requirements specified for lavatory, sink, and similar -type -fixture faucet fittings. Include hot - and cold -water indicators; 2.5-gpm- maximum flow rate; and polished, chrome -plated finish; except where otherwise indicated. Coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes and outlet with spout and fixture receptor. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS FITTING STANDARDS A. Comply with ASME Al 12.18. IM and other requirements specified for fittings, other than faucets. Include polished, chrome -plated finish, except where otherwise indicated. Coordinate fittings with other components and connectors. 1. Brass and Copper, Supplies and Tubular Brass: ASME Al 12.18.1M. 2. Manual -Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENT STANDARDS A. Comply with applicable standards below and other requirements specified for components for plumbing fixtures, equipment, and appliances. 1. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 2. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5. 3. Supply and Drain Insulation Kits: CABO Al 17.1. 4. Supports: ASME A112.6.1M. 2.5 FITTINGS A. Fittings for Plumbing Fixtures: Refer 10 plumbing fixture schedules at the end of this Section for materials for supplies, supply stops, supply risers, traps, and other fittings. B. Fittings for Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Fittings include the following; 1. Supply Inlets: Brass pipe or copper tube, size required for final connection. 2. Supply Stops: Chrome -plated brass, angle or straight; compression, wheel -handle type; same size as supply inlet and with outlet matching supply riser. 3. Supply Risers: 3!8 -inch NPS rigid brass tube with 114 -inch NPS offset, knob -end tailpiece. Use chrome -plated tube for exposed applications. 4. Traps: Tubular brass with 0.045 -inch wall thickness, slip -joint inlet, cleanout, wall flange, escutcheons, and size to match equipment. Use chrome -plated tube for exposed applications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 2 A. Examine roughing -in for potable, cold -water supply piping systems; soil, waste, and vent piping systems; and supports. Verify that locations and sizes of piping and locations and tvpes of supports match those indicated, before installing and connecting fixtures. Use manufacturers roughing -in data when roughing -in data are not indicated. B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed. C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 3.2 APPLICATIONS A. Include supports for plumbing fixtures according to the following: 1. Chair Camers: For wall -hanging lavatories, sinks, drinking fountains, and electric water coolers. 2. Heavy -Duty Chair Camers: For accessible unnals, lavatories, and other fixtures where indicated. 3.3 PLUMBING FlIURE INSTALLATION A. Assemble plumbing Fixtures and trim, fittings, faucets, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions. B, Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers' written instructions, roughing -in drawings, and referenced standards. C. Install floor -mounted, floor -outlet water closets with closet Flanges and gasket seals. D. Install toilet seats on water closets. E. Install walt-hanging, back -outlet urinals with gasket seals. F. Install tanks for accessible, tank -type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of compartment. G. Fasten wall -hanging plumbing fixtures securely tosupports attachedto building substrate when supports are specified, and to buildingwall construction where no support is indicated. H. Fasten floor -mourned fixtures to substrate. Fasten fixtures having holes for securing fixture to wall construction, to reinforcement built into walls. I. Fasten recessed, wall -mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls. J. Fasten wall -mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls. K. Fasten counter -mounting plumbing fixtures to casework. L. Secure supplies to supports or substrate within pipe space behind fixture. M. Install individual stop valve in each water supply to fixture. Use ball valve where specific stop valve is not specified. N. Install water -supply stop valves in accessible locations. 0. Install faucet, laminar -flow fittings with specified flow rates and pattems in faucet spouts when faucets are not available with required rates and patiems. Include adapters when required. P. Install fixture supplies at stop valves. Q. Install traps on fixture outlets. R. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and cciling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep -pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. S. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary -type, 1 -part, mildew -resistant, silicone. Match sealant color to fixture color, 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement ofpiping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: I . Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing equipment specified in other Division 15 Sections. PLUMBING FI)C-fURES 15440-3 1 B. Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Refer to plumbing fixture schedules at the end of this Section for fitting sizes and connection requirements for each plumbing fixture. C. Supply and Waste Connections to Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Connect equipment with supply inlets, supply stops, supply risers, and traps specified in this Section. Use fitting sizes required to match connected equipment. Connect fittings to plumbing piping. D. Ground equipment. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. Where manufactumes torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. E. Arrange for electric -power connections to fixtures and devices that require power. Electric power is specified in Division 16 Sections. ' 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify that installed fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed. B. Check that fixtures are complete with tnm, faucets, fittings, and other specified components. C. Inspect installed fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized and demonstrate proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls. B. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, electric water coolers, and faucets having controls, to produce proper flow and stream. C. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops. D. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Include the following: t. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and spouts. 2. Remove sediment and debris from drains. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings. B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities. 3.8 FIXTURE SCHEDULE. See Drawings. END OF SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440-4 11 1 SECTION 15462 - FUEL -FIRED WATER HEATERS f`7.XVd1W41QLa:7_q 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Gas water heaters. 2. Water heater accessories. B. Related Section: Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" contains requirements that relate to this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division l Specification Sections. B. Product Data including rated capacities of selected models, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, and accessories. Indicate dimensions, finishes and coatings, required clearances, methods of assembly of components, and piping and wiring connections. Cr Maintenance data for water heaters to include in operation and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include startup instructions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. AGA Standards: Comply with AGA standards and bear AGA certification label. B. NFPA Standard: Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code," for electrical components. C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated water heater controls and components specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled As defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100. D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, dimensional requirements, and characteristics of water heaters and accessories and are based on specific types and models indicated. Other manufacturers' water heaters and accessories with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions." is- 1.5 WARRANTY A. General Warranty' The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other Provisions of Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace water heaters and accessories that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, tanks, coils, heat exchangers, and burners. This warranty is in addition to, and nota limitation of, other rights Owner may have against Contractor under Contract Documents. C. Warranty Period: 5 years after date of Substantial Completion - PART 2 - PRODUCTS ompletion_ PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that maybe incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Commercial, Storage, Atmospheric, Gas Water Heaters: a. Rheem Mfg, Co.; Rheem Water Heater Div. 1 FUEL -FIRED WATER HEATERS 15462-1 b. Smith: A.O. Smith 'Water Products Co. C. State Industries, Inc. 2.2 WATER HEATERS, GENERAL A. Specified manufacturer's standard components and features are acceptable where specific product requirements are not indicated. B. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat. except for units where other arrangement is indicated or temperature is regulated by flow - control fitting. C. Safety Control: Automatic, high -temperature -limit cutoffdevice or system on commercial units and where indicated. Include automatic low- water cutoff devtcc or system on commercial units where indicated. D. Interior Finish: Matenals that comply with requirements ofapplicable NSF, AWWA, or FDA and EPA regulatory standards for tasteless and odorless, potable -water -tank linings. E. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank. include tappings for piping connections, relief valves, pressure gage, thermometer, blow down, vent, and controls as required and others as indicated. Attach tappings to tank before testing and labeling. Include tappings and connections as follows: I. 2 -Inch NPS and Smaller: Threaded ends. 2. 2 -12 -Inch NPS and Larger: Flanged ends. F. Insulation: Fiberglass, polyurethane foam, or manufacrurer's standard that is suitable for operating temperature and required insulating value. Include insulation material that surrounds entire tank except connections and controls. G. Jacket: Steel, with baked -on enamel finish, except where otherwise specified. H. Anode Rods: Factory installed, magnesium. 2.3 COMMERCIAL, STORAGE, ATMOSPHERIC, GAS WATER HEATERS A. Description: ANSI Z2 L 10.3, commercial, storage, atmospheric, gas water heater: with capacity more than 40 gal. and natural-gas input more than 75,000 Btuh. B. Storage Tank Construction: Steel with 150-psig working -pressure rating. C. Burner: Manufacturer's standard atmospheric, for natural-gas fuel. D. Gas Shutoff Valve: ANSI Z21.15, manually operated. Furnish for installation in piping. E, Pressure Regulator: ANSI Z21.18, factory or field installed, for gas appliances. Provide regulators with pressure rating, capacity, and pressure differential required for water heater and gas supply. F. Automatic Ignition: ANSI 211.20, automatic gas -ignition system and components. G. Automatic Valve: ANSI 221.21, appliance, automatic gas valve. H. Automatic Damper: ANSI Z21-66, gas -feed -appliance, automatic -vent -damper device. 1. Draft Hood: Manufacturer's standard draft diverter; comply with ANSI Z21.12. J. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3 and ANSI Z21.22. Include relieving capacity at least as great as beat input and pressure setting less than water heater working-priessure rating. Select relief valve with sensing element that extends into tank. 1. Option: Separate temperature and pressure relief valves are acceptable instead of combination relief valve. K. Vacuum Relief Valve: Comply with ASNIE PTC 25.3. Furnish for installation in piping. Exception: Omit where water heater has integral vacuum relieving device. 2.4 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION A. General: Install water heaters on concrete bases. Set and connect units according to manufacturers written instructions. Install units plumb, level, and firmly anchored in locations indicated. Maintain manufacturers recommended clearances. install so controls and devices are accessible for service. B. Anchor water heaters and storage tanks to substrate. FUEL -FIRED WATER HEATERS 15462 - 2 C. Install and connect gas water heaters according to NFPA 54. I. Install gas pressure regulators on gas-bumer inlets. D. Install pressure reliefvalves in hat -water -outlet piping for water heaters without storage. Extend retief valve outlet with water piping in continuous downward pitch and discharge to closest floor drain. E. Install vacuum relief valves in cold -water -inlet piping. F. Install vacuum relief valves in water heaters and hot-water storage tanks that have copper lining. G. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose -end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division IS Section "Plumbing Specialties" for drain valves. H. Install inlet and outlet piping manifolds for multiple water heaters. Fabricate, modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through water heaters. Include throttling valves in outlet manifolds. 1. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. J. Arrange for field -applied insulation on equipment and piping not furnished with factory -applied insulation. 2.5 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division l5 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Connect hot- and cold -water piping to units with shutoff valves and unions. Connect hot-water circulating piping to unit with shutoff valve, check valve, and union. 2. Connect gas piping to gas burner with drip leg, tee, shutoffvalve, and union; minimum size same as inlet connection. Gas piping is specified in Division 15 Section "Natural Gas Piping Systems." 3. Make connections with dielectric fittings where piping is made of dissimilar metals. Dielectric fittings are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." B. Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16 Sections. Arrange wiring to allow unit servicing. C. Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, according to manufacturers published torque -tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 4866. D. Gas, Water Heater Vent Connections: Connect io vent system. Include draft hoods and diverters where required. Use vents same size as or larger than water heater outlets, but not smaller than indicated, except when smaller vent size has been calculated according to National Fuel Gas Code. Comply with gas utility requirements for sizing. Gas vents are specified in Division 15 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks." 2.6 COMMISSIONING A. Perform the following final checks before startup: 1. Fill water heaters with water. 2. Check that piping system tests are complete. 3. Check for piping connection leaks. 4. Check for adequate combustion air. 5. Check for clear vents and devices. 6. Check for clear relief valve inlets, outlets, and drain piping. 7. Check operation of pumps and circulators. 8. Test operation of safety controls, relief valves, and devices. B. Perform the following startup procedures: I. Energize electric circuits. 2. Adjust operating controls. 3. Adjust hot -water -outlet temperature settings. END OF SECTION 15462 FUEL -FIRED WATER HEATERS 15462 - 3 I L SECTION 15496 - NATURAL. GAS PIPING PARTI-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 1.2 SUMMARY 1 1 e A. This Section includes piping, specialties, and accessories for natural gas systems within building and to point indicated. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Low -Pressure Natural Gas Piping: Operating pressure of 0.5 prig or less. B. Medium -Pressure Natural Gas Piping: Operating pressure greater than 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa), but not greater than 2 psig (13.8 kPa). C. High -Pressure Natural Gas Piping: Operating pressure greater than 2 psig (13.8 kPa), but not greater than 5 psig (34.5 kPa). D. Gas Service: Pipe from gas main or other source togas point of delivery for building being served. Piping includes gas service piping, gas valve, service pressure regulator, meter bar or meter support, and gas meter. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division l Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of natural gas specialty and special -duty valve. Include pressure rating, rated capacity, and settings of selected models. C. Test reports specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3. D. Maintenance data for natural gas specialties and special -duty valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division I Section "Contract Closeout." 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code," for gas piping materials and components; installations, and inspecting, testing, and purging. B. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code," for electrical connections between wiring and electrically operated control devices. C. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on equipment made to specified standards. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Notify each user when gas supply will be fumed off. B. Leave gas piping systems in safe condition when interruptions in work occur during repairs or alterations to existing gas piping systems. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: S ubject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: I. Gas Stops, 2 -Inch NPS and Smaller: a. Hammond Valve Corp. NATURAL GAS PIPING 15496-1 b. McDonald: A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co. C. Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc. 2. Gas Valves, 2 -Inch NPS and Smaller- a. Huber. J.M. Huber Corp., Flow Control Div. b. McDonald: A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co. C, Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc. d. Nordstrom Valves, Inc. 3. Gas Pressure Regulators: a Equimeter, Inc. b. Maxitrol Co. 2.2 PIPES AND TUBES A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, electric -resistance +welded or Type S, seamless, Grade B; Schedule 40: black. B. PE Pipe: ASTM D 2513, SDR 1 1. 2.3 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS A. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with threaded ends conforming to ASME 81.20.1. B. Unions: ASME B 16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass -to -iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends conforming to ASME B 1.20.1. C. Cast -Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 125 and 250. D. Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel, butt -welding type. E. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5. F. PE Fittings: ASTM D 2683, socket type or ASTM D 3261, butt type with dimensions matching ASTM D 2513, SDR 11, PE pipe. G. Transition Fittings: Type, material, and end connections to match piping being joined. 2.4 JOINING MATERIALS A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas. B. Gasket Rtaterial. Thickness, material, and type suitable for natural gas. 2.5 VALVES A. Manual Valves: Conform to standards listed or, where appropriate, to ANSI 221.15. B. Gas Valves, 2 -Inch NPS and Smaller: ASME B 16.33, 125 psig WOG, cast-iron body, bronze plug, straightaway pattern, square head, tapered -plug type, with threaded ends conforming to ASME BL20.1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off gas to premises or section of piping. Perform leakage test as specified in "Field Quality Control" Article to determine that all equipment is turned off in affected piping section. B. Comply with NFPA 54 Paragraph "Prevention of Accidental Ignition." 3.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING A. Extend natural gas piping and connect to gas distribution system (gas service) piping in location and site indicated for gas service entrance to building. NATURAL GAS PIPING 15496 - 2 r, I . Include gas distribution system piping to point indicated. 3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. General: Flanges, unions, transition and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher than system pressure rating may be used in applications below, except where otherwise indicated, B. Aboveground Piping; Use the following: I. 2 -Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: Steel pipe, malleable -iron fittings, and threaadedjoints. 2. 2 -112 -Inch NPS (DN65) and Larger: Steel pipe, butt -welding -type fittings, and weldedjoints. Joints for connection to service regulators, service meters, and valves with flanged connections may be flanged. Joints for connection to service regulators, service meters, and valves with threaded connections 2-1F2- to 4 -inch NPS (DN65 to DNI00) may he threaded. C. Underground Piping: Use PE pipe, PE fittings, and heat -fusion joints. 3.4 VALVE APPLICATIONS Illp A. Use gas stops for shutoff to appliances with 2 -inch NPS or smaller low-pressure gas supply. B. Use gas valves of sizes indicated for gas service piping, meters, mains, and where indicated. 3.6 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves in accessible locations, protected from damage. Tag valves with metal tag indicating piping supplied. it: 1. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for valve tags. B. Install pressure relief or pressure -limiting devices so they can be readily operated to determine if valve is free; test to determine pressure at which they will operate; and examine for leakage when in closed position. M � 3.7 'HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. 3.8 CONNECTIONS NATURAL GAS PIPING 15496 - 3 3.5 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" For basic piping installation requirements. B. Install buried gas distribution piping at least 36 inches (400 mm). C. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include outlets of gas meters. Locate where readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate would be subject to freezing. I, Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use minimum -length nipple of pipe tj r diameters, but not less than 3 inches long, and same size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for removal of plug or cap. D. Install gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent slope upward toward risers. E- Connect branch piping from top of horizontal piping. F. Install unions in pipes 2 -inch NPS and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices. G. Install dielectric fittings (unions and flanges) with ferrous and brass or bronze end connections, separated by insulating material, where piping of dissimilar metals is joined. H. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of piping expansion and contraction. Install expansionjoints, expansion loops, and pipe guides as indicated. 1. Install underground, plastic, gas distribution piping according to ASTM D 2774, 3.6 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves in accessible locations, protected from damage. Tag valves with metal tag indicating piping supplied. it: 1. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for valve tags. B. Install pressure relief or pressure -limiting devices so they can be readily operated to determine if valve is free; test to determine pressure at which they will operate; and examine for leakage when in closed position. M � 3.7 'HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. 3.8 CONNECTIONS NATURAL GAS PIPING 15496 - 3 A. Install gas piping next to equipment and appliances using gas to allow service and maintenance. B. Connect gas piping to equipment and appliances using gas with shutoff valves and unions. Install gas valve upstream from and within 72 inches of each appliance using W. Install union or flanged connection downstream from valve. C. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom forming drip, as close as practical to inlet for appliance using gas. D. Electrical Connections: Wiring is specified in Division 16 Sections. 3.9 'FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect, test, and purge piping according toNFPA 54, Part 4 "Gas Piping Inspection, Testing, and Purging' and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory results are obtained. C. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. D. Verify capacities and pressure ratings of gas meters, regulators, valves, and specialties. E. Verify that specified piping tests are complete. 3,10 ADJUSTING A. Adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and safety devices. END OF SECTION 15496 NATURAL GAS PIPING 15496 - 4 SECTION 15530 - REFRIGERANT PIPING PARTI- GENERAL r— 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS LA. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 J 1 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes re5igerant piping used for air-conditioning applications, including pipes, tubing, fittings, and specialties; special -duty valves; and refrigerants. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and identifying refrigerant piping. 2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Insulation" for pipe insulation. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASMECompliance: Qual i fy brazing and welding processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section Ix "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes: 1. ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping." 2. ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration." C. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are UL listed and labeled. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may beincorporated into the Work include, but arc not limited to, the following: I, Refrigerant Valves and Specialties: a. Henry Valve Company. b. Parker -Hannifin Corp.; Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Division. C. Sporlan Valve Company. 2.2 PIPES AND TUBES A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR, drawn temper. B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR, annealed temper. 2.3 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS A. Copper Fittings: ASME B 16.22, wrought -copper streamlined pattern. 2.4 JOINING MATERIALS A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-I (Silver). 2.5 VALVES REFRIGERANT PIPING 15530-1 A. Diaphragm Packless Valves: 500-psig working pressure and 275 deg F working temperature, globe or angle pattern, forged -brass or bronze body and bonnet, phosphor bronze and stainless-steel diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel, stainless-steel spring, nylon seat disc, with solder -end connections. B. Packed -Angle Valves: 500-psig working pressure and 275 deg F working temperature, forged -brass or bronze body, forged -brass seal caps with copper gasket, back seating, rising stem and seat, molded stem packing, with solder -end connections.. 2.6 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Permanent Filter -Dryer. 350-psig maximum operating pressure, 225 deg F maximum operating temperature, steel shell, and wrought -copper fittings for solder -end connections; molded -felt core surrounded by desiccant. 2.7 REFRIGERANT A. ASHRAE 34, R-22. Monochlorodifluoromethane, PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing -in for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of refrigerant piping. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLICATIONS A. Aboveground, within Building: TYpe ACR drawn -copper tubing. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15. B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." C. Install piping in short and direct arrangement, with minimum number ofjoints, elbows, and fittings. D. Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and service of compressor and other equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. E. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers, or between pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full-thickness insulation. F. Insulate suction lines. 1. Do not install insulation until system testing has been completed and all leaks have been eliminated. G. Use fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. H. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted, unless expressly indicated. 3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. General: Hangers, supports, and anchors are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." Provide according to-ASME 831.5 and MSS SP -69. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Inspect and test refrigerant piping according to ASME B31.5, Chapter VI. [. Pressure test with nitrogen to 200 psig. Perform final tests at 27-psig vacuum and 200 psig using halide torch or electronic leak detector. Test to no leakage. B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. REFRIGERANT PIPING 15530-2 C. Repair leaks using new materials; retest. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat requirements. 3.7 COMMISSIONING A. Charge system using the following procedures: 1. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump. 2. Maintain vacuum on system for minimum of 5 hours after closing valve between vacuum pump and system. 3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig. 4. Complete charging of system. Provide full -operating charge. END OF SECTION 15530 REFRIGERANT PIPING 15530-3 SECTION 15575 - BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS PARTt- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Flue vents. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A, Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing brcechings, chimneys, and stacks similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Comply with NFPA 211 for components and installation. C. Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" for fabricated breechings. D. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "labeled": As defined in NFPA 211. E. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain all Type B vent system components from a single manufacturer. 60 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: ' B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2.2 TYPE B.GAS VENTS A. Description: Double-wall gas vents, conforming to NFPA 211. Type B. Inner pipe of sheet aluminum, outer pipe ofgalvanized-steel sheet, each with the following minimum thicknesses: 1. Round, 6 -Inch Inside Diameter and Smaller: 0.012 -inch inner pipe, 0.01$7 -inch outer pipe. B. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft hood connectors, metal cap with bird barrier, adjustable roof flashing, storm collar, support assembly, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners, fabricated of similar materials and designs as vent pipe straight sections. yr„ PART 3 - EXECUTION i3.1 INSTALLATION OF DOUBLE-WALL CONNECTORS, BREECHINGS, AND VENTS BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 15575 - 1 1. Type B Gas Vents: a. Hart & Cooley, Inc. b. Selkirk Metalbestos. C. Simpson Dura-Vent. d. Van -Packer Co. 2.2 TYPE B.GAS VENTS A. Description: Double-wall gas vents, conforming to NFPA 211. Type B. Inner pipe of sheet aluminum, outer pipe ofgalvanized-steel sheet, each with the following minimum thicknesses: 1. Round, 6 -Inch Inside Diameter and Smaller: 0.012 -inch inner pipe, 0.01$7 -inch outer pipe. B. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft hood connectors, metal cap with bird barrier, adjustable roof flashing, storm collar, support assembly, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners, fabricated of similar materials and designs as vent pipe straight sections. yr„ PART 3 - EXECUTION i3.1 INSTALLATION OF DOUBLE-WALL CONNECTORS, BREECHINGS, AND VENTS BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 15575 - 1 A install gas vents as indicated, according to manufacturer's written installation instructions. Locate to comply with stipulated minimum clearances from combustibles. H. Support vents at intervals recommended by the manufacturer to support the weight ofthc vent and all accessories, without exceeding loading of appliances. 3.2 CLEANING A. Aftcr completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes, including chips, scratches, and abrasions. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Temporary Closure: Provide at ends of 6reechings and chimneys that are not completed or connected to equipment. END OF SECTION 15575 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 15575-2 IR SECTION 15610 - FURNACES I PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes furnaces and accessories complete with controls. trR B. This Section includes furnaces and accessories with the following additional components: 1. Direct -expansion cooling coils. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 15 Section "Motors" for general motor requirements. 2. Division 15 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks" for vents for oil -fired furnaces and conventional gas-fired furnaces. 3. Division 15 Section "Condensing Units" for condensing units used with cooling coils provided in furnaces. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division l Specification Sections. B. Product Datafor each furnace including rated capacities ofselmled models, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, and accessories. Include plan and elevation views of units, minimum clearances, and data on ratings and capacities. C. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating between manufacturer -installed and field- installed wiring. D. Maintenance data for each furnace to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division I 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that are listed and labeled by UL where available. R Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1410.7. 1.5 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent, with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Furnaces: Submit a written warranty signed by manufacturer agreeing to replace components within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers failure due to normal conditions of use. I. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 5 years after date of installation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS ' 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A_ Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that maybe incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: FURNACES 15610- 1 B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: I. Furnaces: a. Lennox Industries, Inc. b. Trane Co. (The). C. United Technologies Corp., Carrier Corp. Div. 2.2 FURNACES, GENERAL A. Description: Factory assembled, piped, wired, and tested. B. Configuration: Vertical. C. Cabinet: Stec[ with foil -faced, glass -fiber, interior insulation. Lift -out panels expose burners and all other items requiring access for maintenance. Unit mounted filter racks. D. Finish of External Casings and Cabinets: Baked enamel over corrosion -resistant -treated surface. E. Fan: Centrifugal, factory balanced, resilient mounted. 2.3 GAS-FIRED FURNACES, CONDENSING A. Comply with AGA Z21.47, "Gas -Fired Central Furnaces"; and NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code." 1. AGA Approval: Bear label of American Gas Association. 2. Type of Gas: Natural. 3. Type of Gas: Propane. B. Efficiency: 92 percent AFUE, minimum. C. Heat Exchanger: Aluminized -steel welded construction with aluminum -finned, stainless-steel tube condensing coil. D. Heat Exchanger: Cast-iron combustion chamber with aluminized -and stainless-steel tai [pipe and decoupler; alum inum-finned, stain less -steel tube coil; resiliently mounted. E. Burner Controls: Solid state; control gas valve and ignition. I. Gas Valve: 100 percent safety gas shutoff; 24-V combining pressure regulation and manual shutoff, 2. Ignition: Electronic pilot ignition, with electric spark igniter. F. Automatic Controls: Solid-state board delays fan start and fan shutdown. 2.4 CONTROLS A. Fumace Controls: Include components required for satisfactory operation of furnaces and auxiliary equipment in all seasons. B. Control Transformer: 24 VAC output, factory installed, and wired in furnace. C. Thermostat: 24 VAC, solid-state, programmable, microprocessor -based wall mounting unitwith automatic switching from heating to cooling, preferential rate control, multiple temperature presets selectable byday and time, and battery back-up protection ofprogmm settings against power failure. D. Wire and Cable: Specified in Division 15 Section. 2.5 AIR FILTERS AND CLEANERS A. Filters: Disposable, fiberglass type. 2.6 COOLING FEATURES A. Evaporator Coil: Conform to ARI 210/240, "Unitary Air Conditioning and Air Source Heat Pump Equipment." Match size with furnace. Match remote condensing unit specified in Division 15 Section "Condensing Units" with type, capacity, pressure -drop ratings, restricted distributor, or expansion valve. Include condensate drain pan with accessible drain outlet. B. Evaporator Coil Enclosure: As required to suit furnace and cooling coil. Steel cabinet with access panel and flanges for integral mounting FURNACES 15610-2 at or on fumaco cabinet. C. Refrigerant Line Kits: Annealed -copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized, and scaled, with insulated suction line and flared fittings at evaporator end; no fitting at condenser end: length as required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install furnaces and accessories. according to manufacturers written instructions. B. Install and connect gas-fired furnaces and associated fuel and vent features and systems according to NFPA 54, applicable local codes and regulations, and manufacturer's published installation instructions. I. Connect gas piping according to Division 15 Section "Natural Gas Piping Systems." 2. Connect vents according to Division 15 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks." 3. Connect condensate drain pans using copper tubing, ASTM B 88, Type M with streamline drainage fittings and soldered joints. 4. Provide 4" deep auxiliary drain pan under entire evaporator coil. C. Suspended Units: Suspend from structure using threaded rods, spring hangers, and building attachments. Secure rods to unit hanger attachments. Adjust hangers so unit is plumb and level. D. Controls: Install thermostats at mounting height of 60 inches above floor. E. Control Wiring: Install control wiring as specified in Division 16. F. Connect ducts according to Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts." 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Set controls, burner, and other adjustments for optimum heating performance and efficiency. Adjust heat distribution features, including shutters, dampers, and relays, to provide optimum heating performance and system efficiency. B. After completing system installation, inspect furnaces and associated components. Repair scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. Clean unit internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 COMMISSIONING A. Startup Services: Provide startup service, as specified below. 1. Start each furnace and operate controls. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3. Test functions, operations, control sequences, and protective features. Adjust to ensure operation is as specified. B. Correct deficiencies identified by tents and observations and retest until specified requirements are met. END OF SECTION 15610 FURNACES 15610-3 ANN P" SECTION 15620 - FUEL -FIRED HEATERS PART] -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions ofthe Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following fuel -fired heater types: I. Gas-fired unit heaters. �. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 15 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks" for vents for heaters. r.. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each heater including weights, dimensions, metal gages, and data on features and components. Include plan and elevation e,. views of units, minimum clearances, and data on ratings and capacities. C. Shop Drawings detailing layout and installation of heaters including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work. D. Coordination Drawings including floor plans and sections drawn accurately to scale. Show heater layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type ofsupport, and weight on each support. Indicate ry and certify field measurements. E. Maintenance data for heaters to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that are listed and labeled by UL where available. 1.5 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner ofotherrights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Manufacturers Special Warranty on Heaters: Submit a written warranty signed by manufacturer agreeing to replace components within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers failure due to normal conditions of use. I. Special Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 5 years after date of installation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A, Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: ' 1. Unit Heaters, Gas, Propeller Fan: a. Modine Mfg. Co. ' b. Sterling Gas -Fired Heating Equipment Div. 1 FUEL -FIRED HEATERS SECTION 15620 - 1 2.2 GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATERS, ENERGY EFFICIENT A- Comply with AGA 283.8, "Gas Unit Heaters.' 1, AGA Approval: Bear label of American Gas Association. 2. Type of Gas: Natural. B. Assembly and Wiring: Heaters factory assembled, piped, wired, and tested for 120 VAC. C. Housing: Steel, with integral motorized vent exhauster and inserts for suspension mounting rods. 1. External Casings and Cabinets: Baked enamel over corrosion -resistant -treated surface. D. Heat Exchanger: Aluminized steel. E. Burners: aluminized steel. F. Power Venter: 120 VAC with stainless-steel shaft. G. Unit Fan Type: Propeller fan, factory balanced, resilient mounted, with aluminum blades and steel fan -blade guard. H. Automatic Gas Control: 2 -stage, 24 VAC valve. I. Control Transformer: integrally mounted. 120 VAC/24 VAC. 2. Ignition: Electronically controlled spark with flame sensor. 1. Discharge Louvers: Independently adjustable horizontal blades. J. Accessories: Furnish the following accessories for field assembly: 1. Summer fan switch. 2.3 TEMPERATURE CONTROL A. Wires and cables are specified in Division 16 Section. B. Thermostat: Two-stage, 24 VAC, for 75° discharge temperature. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install heaters according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install and connect gas-fired heaters and associated fuel and vent features and systems, installed and connected according to NFPA 54, applicable local codes and regulations, and manufacturers printed installation instructions. C. Suspended Units: Suspend from substrate using threaded rods, spring hangers, and building attachments. Secure rods to unit hanger attachments. Adjust hangers so unit is plumb and level. D. Substrate Mounted Units: Provide supports connected to substrate. Secure units to supports. E. Controls: Wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 Section. F. Identify furnaces and connections according to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Specific connection requirements are as follows: 1. install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. 2. Gas Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 15 Section "Natural Gas Piping Systems." Connect gas piping togas train inlet; provide union with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service. Provide AGA -approved flexible units. FUEL -FIRED HEATERS SECTION 15620 - 2 1 IB. Connect vents according to Division 15 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks." 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust burner and other unit components for optimum heating performance and efficiency. Adjust heat distribution features, including louvers, vanes, shutters, dampers, and reflectors, to provide optimum heat distribution for objects, personnel, and spaces served. B. After completing system utstallation, inspect heatm and associated components. Repair scratches and mars offmish to match original finish. Clean unit internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. 3.4 COMMISSIONING A. Startup Services: Provide startup service, as specified below. 1. Start units and operate controls and safeties. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3. Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met. I END OF SECTION 15620 � -1 � I IFUEL -FIRED HEATERS SEC'T'ION 15620 - 3 SECTION 15671 - CONDENSING UNITS PARTI- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division t Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Air-cooled condensing units. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Refrigerant Piping" for valves and accessories for piping connections to units. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; dimettsions; required clearances, methods for assembling componenu; famished speciaities; acccssories; and installation and startup instructions for each model indicated. B. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate between manufacturer -installed and field-insta[led wiring. C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. D. Maintenance Data: For each condensing unit to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. I. Include a parts list for each condensing unit, control, and accessory; troubleshooting maintenance guide; and servicing and preventive maintenance procedures and schedule. E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate and label refrigeration system according to ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration." B. Comply with UL 303, "Refrigeration and Air -Conditioning Condensing and Compressor Units." 1.5 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner ofother rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall he in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: A written warranty, executed by Contractor and signed by manufacturer, agreeing to replace components that fail in materials and workmanship within the specified warranty period, provided manufacturer's written instructions for installation, operation, and maintenance have been followed. 1. Warranty Period: Manufacturers standard, but not less than 5 years from date of Substantial Completion, PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide condensing units by one of the following: 1. Condensing Units, Air Cooled, I to 5 Tons: a. Carrier Corp.; Carrier Air Conditioning Div. ICONDENSING UMTS 15671 -1 b. Lennox International, Inc.; Lennox Industries, Inc. Div. C. Trane Co. (The); North American Commercial Group. 2.2 CONDENSING UNITS, AIR COOLED, I TO 5 TONS A. Description: Factory assembled and tested, air cooled; consisting of compressors, condenser coils, fans, motors, refrigerant reservoirs, and operating controls. B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed and isolated for vibration. C. Condenser: Copper -rube, aluminum -fin coil, with liquid subcooler. D. Condenser Fan: Direct -drive, aluminum propeller fan; with permanently lubricated fan motor with thermal-0verload protection. E. Accessories include the following: I. Crankcase heater. 2. Automatic reset timer to prevent compressor rapid cycle. F. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel; with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Mount service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Verification of Performance: Rate condensing units according to ARI 210!240. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install condensing units according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Install units level and plumb, Termly anchored in locations indicated; maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. C. Install ground -mounted units on 4 -inch- thick, concrete base, 4 inches larger than condensing unit on each side. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to units quick -connect fittings. Install tubing so it does not interfere with access to unit, install furnished accessories. B. Connect refrigerant piping to air-cooled condensing units; maintain required access to unit. 3.3 CLEANING A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Clean units to remove dirt and construction debris and repair damaged finishes. 3.4 COMMISSIONING A. Verify that units are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents. B. Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or binding. C. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 15671 CONDENSING UNITS 15671 -2 1 1 1 SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Genera] and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes rectangular and round metal ducts and plenums for heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning systems. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound -control devices, duct -mounted access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. 2. Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles." 3. Division 15 Section "Testing Adjusting, and Balancing" for air balancing and final adjusting of manual -volume dampers. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Ductsystemdesign,asindicated,hasbeenusedtoselectandsizeair-moving and -distribution equipment andothercomponents ofair system. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure. 1.4 SUBMffFALS A. Product Data: For duct liner and sealing materials. B. Record Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcement, support, and installed accessories and devices. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock -forming quality; ASTM A 6531A 653M, G90 coating designation. mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view_ B. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized, sheet metal ducts, compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts. 2.2 DUCT LINER A. General: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard." B. Materials: ASTM C 1071 with coated surface exposed to airstream to prevent erosion of glass fibers. �l 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Thermal Conductivity (k -Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature. 3. Fire -Hazard Classification: Maximum flame -spread rating of 25 and smoke -developed rating of 50, when tested according to ASTM C 411. 4. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and ASTM C 916. 5. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in duct. 6. Dcnsity:3lbs. 2.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel or round, threaded steel rod. .i METAL DUCTS 15815 - 1 Straps and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible" for sheet steel width and thickness and for steel rod diameters. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. 2A RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction with galvanized, shat steel, according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexible." Comply with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie -rod applications, and )oint types and intervals. 1. Lengths: Fabricate rectanguWducts inlengths appropriatetorein forcementand rigidity class requircdfor press urcciassification. 2. Materials: Free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, and discoloration. B. Static -Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts to the following: 1. Supply Ducts: 1 -inch wg. 2. Return Ducts: l -inch wg, negative pressure. 3. Exhaust Ducts: 1 -inch wg, negative pressure. C. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of unbraced panel area, unless ducts are lined. 2.5 SHOP APPLICATION OF LIMIER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness ofduct liner with 100 percent coverage of adhesive at liner contact surface area. Multiple layers of insulation to achieve indicated thickness are prohibited. B. Apply adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing. C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive. D. Fold and compress liner in comers of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted -edge overlapping. E. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches transversely around perimeter; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally - F. Terminate liner with duct buildouts installed inducts to attach dampers, turning vane assemblies, and other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional, when used, secure buildouts to duct wall with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds. Terminate liner at fire dampers at connection to fire -damper sleeve. G. Liner shall be applied to supply air, return air, and outside air ducts. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.I DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. B. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated. C. install ducts with fewest possible joints. D. install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections. E. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs. F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. G. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. H. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke -control dampers, lighting layouts, and similar finished work. I. Non -Fire -Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partition and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as duct. Overlap opening on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. METAL DUCTS 15815 - 2 r� J. Fire -Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ductsP� s through interior pitions and exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and firestopping scaiant Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials r and installation methods are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping." 3.2 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING A. General: Seal duct scams and joints accordingto the duct pressure class indicated and as described in SMACNA°s "HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible.' B. Seal transverse joints as noted for type "C" seal. 3.3 HANGING AND SUPPORTING A_ Install metal duct with support systems indicated in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible." B. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Connect equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories." B. For branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections, comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible." 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust volume -control dampers in ducts, outlets, and inlets to achieve design airflow. 3.6 CLEANING A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect the system and remove dust and debris. END OF SECTION 15815 METAL DUCTS 15815-3 i 1 A ri SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES PARTI- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Manual -volume dampers. 2. Fire dampers. 3. Turning vanes. 4. Duct -mounted access doors. 5. Flexible ducts. 6. Flexible connectors. B, Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles." 2. Division 16 Section "Fire Alarm Systems" for duct -mounted fire and smoke detectors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Manual -volume dampers. 2. Fire dampers. 3. Duct -mounted access doors and panels. 4. Flexible ducts. 5. Flexible Connections PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock -forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653K G90 coating designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view_ 2.2 MANUAL -VOLUME DAMPERS A. General: Fabricated with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for stability.Inc ludelocking device toholds ingle-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class. B. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single -blade, opposed -blade design, standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. C. Damper Hardware: Zinc -plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3132 -inch- thick zinc -plated steel, and a 1/4- inch hexagon locking nut. 2.3 FIRE DAMPERS A. General: Labeled to UL 555, B. Fire Rating: One and one-half hours. C. Frame: SMACNA Type B with blades out of airstream; fabricated with roll -formed, 0,03.1 -inch- thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking comers. D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field -installed galvanized, sheet steel. DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-1 E. Blades: Roll -farmed, interlocking, galvanized, sheet steel. F. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated. 2.4 TURNING VANES A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's '14VAC Duct Construction Standards --Metal and Flexibie." 2.5 DUCT -MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS A. General: Fabricate doors suitable for duct pressure class. B. Frame: Galvanized, sheet steel, with bend -over tabs and foam gaskets. C. Door: Double-wall, galvanized, sheet metal construction with insulation 511 and thickness, and number of hinges and locks as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where indicated. Include l -by-I -inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches. D. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber. E. Insulation: 1 -inch- thick, Fibrous -glass or polystyrene -foam board. 2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. General: Flame -retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1. B. Standard Metal -Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 3-12 inches wide. C. Conventional, Indoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with polychloroprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf)inch in the warp, and 360 ibf1mch in the filling. 2.7 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. General Comply with UL 181, Class 1. B. Flexible Ducts, Insulated- Factory -fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket enclosing I -12 -inch- thick, glass -fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner. I. Reinforcement: Steel -wire helix encapsulated in inner liner. 2. Outer Jacket: Glass -reinforced, silver Mylar. 3, Inner Liner: Polyethylene film. C. Pressure Rating: 6 -inch wg positive, 12 -inch wg negative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details shown in SMACNA's "[MVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts. B. Install volume dampers in lined duct; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner. C. Install fire and smoke dampers according to manufacturees UL -approved instructions. D. Install duct access panels for access to both sides of duct coils. Install duct access panels downstream from volume dampers, fire dampers, turning vanes, and equipment. 1. install duct access panels to allow access to interior of ducts for cleaning, inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units. 2. install access panels on side of duct where adequate clearance is available. 3.2 ADJUSTING DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 - 2 A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings. B. Adjust fire dampers for proper action. C. Final positioning of manual -volume dampers is specified in Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing," END OF SECTION 15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820-3 ISECTION 15853 - POWER VENTILATORS IPART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Centrifugal roof ventilators. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations. 13. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99. C. Fan Unit Schedule: The following information is described in an equipment schedule on the Drawings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data including rated capacities of each unit„ furnished specialties, accessories, and the following: 1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and electrical accessories. 4. Material gages and finishes. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. C. Maintenance data for power ventilators to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division I and in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements." 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that are listed and labeled by UL where available. B. AMCA Compliance: Provide products that meet performance requirements and are licensed to use the AMCA Seal. C. UL Standard: Provide power ventilators that comply with UL 705. Y1.6 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING ^I A. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members. Y f� B. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work. include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Centrifugal Roof Ventilators: a. Cook (Loren) Co. IPOWER VENTILATORS 15853 - 1 b. Greenheck Fan Corp. 2.2 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS A. Description: Belt -driven or direct -drive centrifugal fans, as indicated, consistingofhousing,wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories. B. Housing: Removable, spun -aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle, square, one-piece, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone. C. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward -inclined blades. D. Belt -Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing, with the following features: L Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel drive shaft keyed to wheel hub. 2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self -aligning ball bearings. 3.Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable -pitch motor pulley. 4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust air stream. E. Accessories: The following items are required as indicated: I. Disconnect Switch: NOnfUSLble type, with thermal -overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit. 2. Bird Screens: Removable 112 -inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire. 3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel -blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base, factory set to close when fan stops. 4. RoofCurbs: Galvanized steel, mitered and welded comers; 2 -inch- thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 2 -inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base. a. Configuration: Sclf-flashing without a cant strip, with mounting flange. b. Overall Height: 14 inches. 2.3 MOTORS A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory -installed motors. B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B. C. Enclosure Type: The following features are required: L Open dnpproof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation. 2.4 FACTORY FINISHES A. Aluminum Parts: No Finish required. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required as indicated: 1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods forCalculating Fan Sound. Ratings From Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans.' Label fans with the AMCA Seal. 2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install power ventilators according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Install units with clearartces for service and maintenance. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. POWER VENTILATORS 15853-2 B. Adjust belt tension. 3.3 CLEANING A_ After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debns, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions. B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. 3.4 COMMISSIONING A. Final Checks before Starrup: Perform the following operations and checks before startup: 1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections for ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal -overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects. 3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section, 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts. 5. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in the fully open position. 8_ Starting procedures for fans are as follows: 1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan to indicated. RPM. 2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage. C. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions END OF SECTION 15853 POWER VENTILATORS 15853-3 SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PARTI-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions ofthc Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall -mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories' for fire dampers and volume -control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following: 1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate construction finish, and mounting details. 2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static -pressure drop, and noise ratings for each type of air outlet and inlet. 3. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. 4. Assembly Drawing: For each type of air outlet and inlet; indicate materials and methods of assembly of components. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A- Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers, registers, and grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems indicated. Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division I Section "Substitutions." PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled on Drawings. All grilles, registers, and diffusers shall be factory finished in OFF-WHITE. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLAT;ON A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards. B. Ceiling -Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay -in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of the panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. 3.3 CLEANING A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces to remove buts, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have damaged finishes. DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855-1 END OF SECnONI 15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855 - 2 ISECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART 1 -GENERAL A. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions ofthe Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. END OF SECTION 15990 AW � C TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990-1 B. SCOPE A. This Section ofthe specifications comprises the furnishing ofall labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the testing, balancing and adjusting of various systems and portions thereof to produce proper flows of air, correct settings of regulation devices, and other end results as more fully described hereinafter. B. Upon complection of the installation and start up of the mechanical equipment, check, adjust, and balance systemic components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space to the building, C. Prepare and submit to the Architect complete reports on the balance and operation of the system. D. Make inspections in the building during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were made and at those times make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of the systemic components, to produce the ... proper conditions in each conditioned space. E, In all fan systems, the air quantities shown on the plans shall be varied as required to secure a maximum temperature variation oft degrees within each separately controlled zone. F. Before final acceptance is made, furnish the following data: I. A listing of the measured air quantities at each outlet. 2. Air quantities at each exhaust air handling device. 3. Static pressure readings entering and leaving each supply, and exhaust fan, and other components of the system. These readings shall be related to fan curves in terms of CFM handled, 4. Motor current readings at each fan. The voltages at the time of the reading shall be listed. G. The above data shall be neatly entered on appropriate forts together with any typed supplements required to completely document all results. Written explanations ofanyabnormal conditions shall be included. All this shall be assembled into a suitable brochure and a total of4 copies shall be provided. H. When opposite season modifications are made, additional data sheets indicating newsettings, readings, etc., shall be prepared and submitted in quadruplicate. 1. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every b months or more frequently if required by the instrument manufacturer. C. INSTRUCTIONS A. During the test periods instruct the building operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of all equipment. B. Deliver to the Owner 3 complete instructions manuals covering the maintenance and operation ofthe system components. Provide complete data on all equipment, including for each item a parts list, and the name and address of the vendor where replacement parts can be purchased. C. Include, three (3) bound copies of the Testing & Balance Report "TAB." END OF SECTION 15990 AW � C TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990-1 «ttt■tttttttttttt� J1111111101111 SECTION 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. B. Furnish alllabor,materials,service, equipment and appliances required to complete the installation ofthecomplete electrical system in accordance with the specifications and contract drawings. C. Electrical Division Index: Section 16010 - Basic Electrical Requirements Section 16110 - Raceways a.. Section 16123 - Conductors Section 16130 - Boxes and Fittings Section 16133 - Cabinets and Enclosures Section 16141 - Wiring Devices Section 16160 - Panclboards Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding Section 16441 - Enclosed Switches Section 16444 - Fuses Section 16480 - Motor Controls Section 16500 - Lighting Section 16721 - Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System Section 16741 - Telephone System Section 16902 - Electrical Controls 1.02 WORK INCLUDED: A. This Contractor shall furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete all electrical and related work as shown on the drawings and/or herein specified as follows: I. Installation of underground primary and secondary services as shown on the drawings. 2. From starting point connect all panelboards, meters, power outlets, convenience outlets, switches and controls. 3. Conduits, junction boxes, wall outlets for telephone system. 4. Complete and balanced Fire Alarm system. 5. Conduits, pull wires, junction for Owner fumished equipment. 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATOR AGENCIES AND STANDARDS: A. Regulatory Agencies: Installations, materials, equipment and workmanship shall conform to the applicable provisions ofthe Air Force Manual 88-15, the National Electrical Code (NEC), the National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), and the terms and conditions of the electrical utility and other authorities having lawfulj urisd iction pertaining to the work required. All modifications required by these codes, rules, regulations and authorities shall be made by the Contractor without additional charge to the Owner. B. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL): All materials, appliances, equipment or devices shall conform to the applicable standards of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. The label of, or listing by, UL is required. C. Standards: Where referenced in these specifications or on the drawings, the publications and standards of the following organizations shall apply: Federal Specifications, Military Specifications, American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM), Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE), Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 1.04 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. The following publications of the issues listed below, but referred to thereafter by basic designation only, form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the references therein. Use latest edition of publication at time of bid. 1.05 SUBMITTALS: A. Material List: As soon as possible after contract award and before material is ordered, the Contractor shall submit for approval a list of all proposed material and equipment, indicating manufacturer's name and general description. B. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval in accordance with the requirements contained in the SPECIAL PROVISIONS, aminimum of six (6) copies of all shop drawings after the material list has been approved and prior to ordering. Show complete outlines, dimensions, electrical services, control diagrams, electrical characteristics of special nature or critical to the installation, and pertinent data required for installation. Indicate in the transmittal that submittal has been reviewed and accepted and all contract deviations identified. In addition to, but not limited to, specific references or requests, submit shop drawings for the following applicable items: Switchboards, Panelboards, Lighting Fixtures, Transformers, Alarm Systems, PrimaryCable, Emergency Battery Units, Fire Alarm and Security Systems, Underfloor Duct. 1 IBASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 16010 -1 PART 2 2.01 2.02 Electrical Controls: Refer to Section 16402 - Electrical Controls, for additional submittal requirements. PRODUCTS EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS: A. The electrical requirements for equipment specified or indicated on the drawings are based on information available at the time of design. If equipment famished for installation has electrical requirements other than indicated on the electrical drawings, the Contractor shall make all adjustments to wire and conduit size, controls, overcurrent protection and installation as required to accommodate the equipment supplied, without additional charge to the Owner. The complete responsibility and costs for such adjustments shall be assigned to the respective section of this specification under which the equipment is furnished. MATERIALS: A. All similar materials and equipment shall be the product of the same manufacturer. B. Where no specific material, apparatus, or appliance is mentioned, any first-class product made by a reputable manufacturer may be used, providing it conforms to the contract requirements and meets the approval of the Engineer. C. Materials and equipment shall be the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such material and shall be the manufacturer's current and standard design. D. Equipment affected by altitude shall perform satisfactorily the function intended at an altitude of the project site. E. Materials and Equipment shall conform to the respective publications and other requirements specified below. Other materials and equipment shall be as specified elsewhere herein and as shown on the drawings, and shall be the products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL: 3.02 3.03 3.04 Fabrication, erection and installation of the complete electrical system shall be done in a first class workmanlike manner by qualified personnel experienced in such work and shall proceed in an orderly manner so as not to hold up the progress of the project. The Electrical Contractor shall check all areas and surfaces where electrical equipment or material is to be installed, removed or relocated and report any unsatisfactory conditions before starting work. Commencement of work signifies this Contractor's acceptance of existing conditions. TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHTING: Furnish and install all temporary electrical facilities required for construction and safety operations. No part of the permanent electrical systems or the existing electrical system may be used for temporary service unless approved by the Engineer. Provide separate electrical metering_ PERFORMANCE TESTS: A. Thoroughly test all fixtures, services, and all circuits for proper operating condition and freedom from grounds and short circuits before acceptance is requested. All equipment, appliances, and devices shall be operated under load conditions. B. After the interior -wiring system installation is complete and at such time as the Engineer may direct, conduct operating tests for approval. When requested, test all the wire, cable, devices, and equipment after installation, to assure that all material continues to possess all the original characteristics as required by governing codes and standards listed in these specifications. C. Prtorto acceptance or beneficial occupancy, establish nominal building power loads and record voltage readings at all panelboards. Based on these readings make final adjustments oftap changers on all transformers in the building electrical system to comply with specifications and equipment installed. D. Perform such other tests as required by other sections of these specifications or as requested to prove acceptability. E. Furnish all instruments and labor for testing. The Owner will furnish the necessary electric power. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUALS: Instructions: Without additional charge to the Owner, furnish competent instruction to the Engineer in the care, adjustment and operation of all parts of the electrical equipment and systems. Manuals: Upon completion ofthe work, prepare and deliver to the Owner three (3) sets of complete operating and maintenance manuals for the systems and major equipment installed. Include catalog data, shop drawings, wiring diagrams, performance curves and rating data, spare parts lists, and manufacturer's operating and maintenance data. Other: The above requirements are in addition to specific instructions and manuals specified for individual systems or equipment BASIC ELECTRICAL. REQUIREMENTS SECTION 16010 - 2 3.05 3.06 3.07 3.08 IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS: A. Mark each individual motor controller, disconnect switch, transformer, and remote control device to identify each item with its respective service. Marking may be stenciled on the enclosure or adjacent surface in utility areas. Provide nameplates in finished area. B. Provide nameplates with engraved lettering not less than 3/8 inch high where specified or noted. In general, use white core laminated plastic, attached with screws. Embossed plastic adhesive tape is not acceptable. Flush mounted devices may have identification engraved in the device plate. C. Identify panelboards, motor control centers, switchboards, and cabinets by nameplates with descriptions indicated on the drawings together with indication of location of the feeder overcurrent protection. Install on inside of hinged doors of panelboards and cabinets. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING: A. Perform excavation, backfillingand repaving required forwork underthis Division in accordancewith DIVISION2, SITE WORK. In general, backfill and tamp with compaction at least equal to that of the surrounding area. RECORD DRAWINGS: A. Provide record drawings showing the "as -built" condition of all electrical work. Information shall include but not be limited to indicating: 1. All floor outlets. 2. Underfloor duct and all connections to duct system, 3. All conduit runs including size installed. 4. All stub -up locations of conduits in floor routed up columns or walls. 5. Locations and sizes of all junction and pull boxes. B. This drawing shall be a mylar sepia of the power plans. WORKMANSHIP: A. All work shall be executed in a workmanlike manner and shall present a neat and mechanical appearance upon completion. All mechanics shall be capable experienced electricians. B. C. D. E. Panels and cutout boxes shall be properly supported from the building construction. Boxes shall beset plumb and at height best suited for adequate operation. Wiring troughs and barriers shall be as required by the National Electric Code as amended to date. Symbols on drawings are approximately correct, but care shall be taken that all fixture outlets are symmetrical on spaces, ceiling panels, bays or rooms, and all switch outlets are on the strike side of doors. Outlets may be varied slightly in location either horizontally or vertically by the Owner before installation. Outlets for special equipment shall be located and verified on the job before final rough -in is made. Unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed, locate outlet boxes as follows: (Dimensions are from bottom of box to floor.) Switches- '-0" Convenience Outlets ---1'-4" or as noted Telephone Outlets --- ---1'-4" or as noted Thermostats 5'-0" Panelboards — 6-0" from top of floor Wallspeakers _8'-0" Clocks and Clock Outlets 8'-0" or as noted Buzzers — 8'-0" Homs ---- 10'-0" or as noted Bells —8'-0" or as noted Power Outlets ---- ----I'-4" or as noted Call in Switches --------- — 4'-8" or as noted All work shall be concealed, and panels, boxes, etc., shall be flush type, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. All conduits and wiring shall be run from overhead unless otherwise noted. If walls do not extend to ceilings, run conduit in slabs. Conduit in shop areas may be run exposed, threaded d" roof joist. All flush outlet boxes shall be set so that edge of cover comes flush with finished surface. Outlet boxes shall be of a suitable size and construction to serve the purpose properly. There shall be no more knockouts opened in any outlet box than are actually required. Outlet boxes shall be provided in all cases with proper supports for fixtures. All wires shall be polarized. No joints or taps in feeders will be permitted under any condition. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 16010 - 3 N. Where conduits enter boxes they shall be secured in place by galvanized locknuts and bushings. Conduit ends shall be carefully plugged during construction. O. Conduits, except those which are vertical for their entire length, and except conduits connecting ceiling outlets together, shall have a drag consisting of a number of tight filling rubber washers drawn through before wires are pulled in. 1 END OF SECTION BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 16010 - 4 K. Joints in branch circuits shall occur only where such circuits divide, and shall then consist ofone ( l) through circuit, to which shall be spliced the branch from this circuit. L. Wire and cable connectors shall be solderless, mechanical type. Connectors for conductors #8 AWG and smaller shall be Buchanan Electrical Products copper squceze-on type with molded rubber or vinyl cap, Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Co. Seotchlock, or Ideal Industries Super -Nut spring connector with molded vinyl cap. M. Conduits shall be ofsuch size and shall be so installed that the required conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive stain. Powdered soapstone only maybe used as a lubricant where necessary. Sizes ofcondu its shall be in accordance with National Code tables. Flexible metal conduit maybe used for final connections to motors, etc,, but shall not be over 48" in total length from outlet box to motor. Waterproofflexible conduit maybe used in exterior locations. Connectors for conductors largerthan #8 AWG shall be mechanical bolted type, insulated with clamp -on molded covers or vinyl plastic tape. The manufacturer shall be O.Z. Electrical Manufacturing Co., or Bumdy Engineering Company. Flexible conduit smaller than' h" diameter shall not be permitted to be used. N. Where conduits enter boxes they shall be secured in place by galvanized locknuts and bushings. Conduit ends shall be carefully plugged during construction. O. Conduits, except those which are vertical for their entire length, and except conduits connecting ceiling outlets together, shall have a drag consisting of a number of tight filling rubber washers drawn through before wires are pulled in. 1 END OF SECTION BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 16010 - 4 RACEWAYS SECTION 16110 -1 SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. General Provision of the Contract, including General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Division 1 General Requirements apply. C" 1.02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS: Section 16010 -Basic Electrical Requirements Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUITS: A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick-wall, zinc-coated on the outside and either zinc-coated or coated with an approved corrosion-resistant coating on the inside. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid, threaded, lightweight steel zinc-coated on the outside and either zinc-coated or coated with an approved corrosion-resistant coating on the inside. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Mild steel, zinc-coated on the outside and either zinc-coated or coated with an approved corrosion-resistant coating on the inside. Usage shall be as restricted by NEC. D. Flexible Conduit: Commercial greenfield, galvanized steel, with a separate grounding bond wire installed in the conduit in addition to other wires. E. Liquid-Tight Flexible Conduit: Flexible galvanized steel tubing with extruded liquid-tight PVC outer jacket and a continuous copper bonding conductor wound spirally between the convolutions. Where a separate grounding conductor is installed in the conduit, bonding conductor in the conductor in the convolutions may be omitted. F. PVC Conduit: PVC Schedule 40 with Rigid Steel 90 degree bends may be utilized in lieu of Rigid Steel Conduits under 6 G. inches concrete stab or if encased in 4 inches of concrete on all sides. Conduit Size: Minimum conduit size 1/2 inch except where specifically approved for equipment connections. Sizes be shall as noted on the drawings and where not noted sizes shall be as required by the NEC. H. All products shall be new and of current manufacture. No aluminum conduit shall be permitted. 2.02 CONDUIT FITTINGS: A. B. Rigid Steel Conduit, IMC, and EMT Fittings: Iron or steel only. Cast fittings will not be allowed. Flexible Conduit Fittings (Commercial Greenfield): Either steel or malleable iron only, with insulated throats, and shall be of one of the following types: 1. Wedge and screw type with angular wedge fitting between the convolutions of the conduit. 2. Squeeze or clamp type with bearing surface contoured to wrap around the conduit and clamped by one or more screws. C. 3. Steel, multiple point type, for threading into internal wall o the conduit convolutions. Liquid-Tight Flexible Conduit Fittings: With threaded cone, a steel, nylon or grounding equal plastic compression ring and a gland for tightening. Gland shall be either steel or malleable iron only with insulated throats and male thread and lockout or male bushing with or without "O" ring seal. Each connector shall provide a low resistance ground connection between the flexible conduit and the outlet box, conduit or other equipment to which it is connected. D. Connectors and Couplings; Compression type threadless fittings for rigid steel conduit or IMC permitted. Set screw type fittings for rigid aluminum conduit not permitted. Steel set screw connectors and couplings permitted for special conditions when approved. EMT couplings and connectors either steel or malleable iron only, "Concrete-tight" or "Rain-tight', and either the gland and ring compression type or the stainless steel multiple point locking type. Connectors to have insulated throats, EMT fittings using set screws or indentations of a means of attachment not permitted. E. Bushings: Insulated type, designed to prevent abrasion of wires without impairing the continuity of the conduit grounding system, for rigid steel conduit, IMC, and rigid aluminum conduit larger than Y: inch size. F. Expansion Fittings; Each conduit that is buried in or rigidly secured to the building construction on opposite sides of a building expansion joint and each long tun of exposed conduit that may be subject to excessive stresses shall be provided with an RACEWAYS SECTION 16110 -1 expansion fitting. Expansion fittings shall be hot -dipped galvanized malleable iron with factory installed packing and a grounding ring. Sealing Fittings: Threaded, zinc or cadmium coated, cast or malleable iron type for steel conduits and threaded cast aluminum type for aluminum conduits. Fittings used to prevent passage of water vapor shall be of the continuous drain type, PART EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUIT INSTALLATION: A Conduit Systems: Rigid steel conduit, IMC, or EMT unless otherwise specified. Aluminum conduit is not permitted. B. EMT: Not permitted underground nor embedded in concrete. C, Flexible Conduits: Use flexible conduit for lights, motor or equipment connections and then only to the extent of minimum lengths required for connections. Install flexible conduit connections at all resilient -mounted equipment. Provide liquid -tight flexible conduit in exterior, wet or damp locations and for connections to wet -pipe mechanical systems. All flexible conduit in kitchen, food preparation, walk-ins, and dishwashing locations shall be liquid -tight. D. Conduit in Concrete: Rigid steel conduit, or rigid non-metallic conduit may be embedded in concrete providing the outside diameter does not exceed one-third the thickness of the concrete slab, wall, or beam, is located entirely within the center third of the member, and lateral spacing of conduits is not less than three diameters. E. Steel Conduit in Ground: Rigid steel conduit, that is not completely encased in concrete but is in contact with ground or on a vapor barrier, shall be wrapped in Scotchap 51 half -lapped, or shall have an additional outside factory coating of polyvinyl chloride with a minimum coat thickness of 2- mils. Other PVC of Phenolic -resin -epoxy coating material which is equally flexible and chemically resistant may be used providing approval by the Engineer is approved prior to installation. F. Exposed Conduits: Install exposed conduit systems parallel to or at right angles to the lines of the building. Right angle bends in exposed runs shall be made with standard elbows, screw jointed conduit fittings or conduit bent to radii not less than those of standard elbows. G. Concealed Conduits: Install conduit systems concealed where possible unless otherwise noted. Conduit systems may be exposed in unfinished utility areas, ceiling cavities, and where specifically approved by the Engineer. Install concealed conduit systems in as direct lines as possible. H. Exterior Underground Conduit: Galvanized -rigid steel conduit, wrapped as above, shall be used for all circuits outside the building slab. Conduit shall be buried a minimum of 2'-6" below finished grade. Concrete encased PVC conduit may be used for all conductors except the service entrance secondary. 1. Conduit Bends: In any conduit or EMT run the number of quarter bends or equivalent between terminations at cabinets or boxes shall not exceed four (4) bends for conduits up to 1-1A inch, three (3) bends for 1-1/2 to 2-112 inch conduits, and two (2) bends for 3- to 4 -inch conduits. Conduits run between cabinets or boxes shall not exceed 100 feet for straight runs nor 100 feet for runs with maximum number of bends. Bends in telephone feeder conduits shall be long -radius. !. Conduit Openings: Protect all vertical runs of conduits or EMT terminating in the bottoms of boxes or cabinets, etc., from the entrance of foreign material prior to installation of conductors. K. Sealing Fittings: Install where required by the NEC, where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, and where otherwise indicated. L Sleeves for Conduit: Install sleeves for conduit where shown or as required. Conduit sleeves not used shall be plugged with recessed type plugs. Sleeve all conduit passing through walls. Sleeves that are used shall be caulked tight with lead yearn, 3,02 CONDUIT SUPPORTS: A. Supports: Provide supports for horizontal steel conduits and EMT as required by the National Electrical Code, including runs above suspended ceilings. In suspended ceiling construction, only lighting system branch circuit raceways shall be fastened to the ceiling supports. No supports shall be permitted from metal roof decks. B. Straps: Install one -hole pipe straps on conduits I-112 inch or smaller. Install individual pipe hangers for conduits larger than 1- 1/2 inch. Spring steel fasteners with hanger rods may be used in dry locations in lieu of pipe straps. C. Trapezes: Install multiple (trapeze pipe hangers where two or more horizontal conduits or EMT run parallel and at the same elevation. Secure each conduit or EMT to the horizontal hanger member by a U -bolt, one -hole strap or other specially designed and approved fastener. D. Hanger Rods: Install 3/16 inch diameter or larger steel rods for trapezes, spring steel fasteners, clips and clamps. Wire or perforated strapping shall not be used for the support of any conduit, EMT or light fixtures in open ceiling areas. E. Fastening; Fasten pipe straps and hanger rods to concrete by means of inserts or expansion bolts, to brickwork by means of expansion bolts, and to hollow masonry by means of toggle bolts. Wooden plugs and shields shall not be used. Power -driven fasteners may be used to attach pipe straps and hanger rods to concrete where approved by the Engineer. RACEWAYS SECTION 16110 - 2 F. All conduits not embedded in concrete shall be firmly secured by means of pipe clamps, hangers, etc., equal to Caddy Fasteners of ERICO Products, Inc. Wire wrapped around conduits and supporting members will not be acceptable.. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION: A. Contractor shall furnish as -built drawings showing routing and/or terminations of all conduit and boxes run into floor and from underfloor into wall or above ceiling terminations. 3.04 CLOSING OF OPENINGS: A. Wherever slots, sleeves or other openings are provided in floors or walls for the passage of conduits or other forms of raceway, including bus ducts, such openings, if unused, or the spaces left in such openings, shall be filled or closed in a manner approved by the Engineer, END OF SECTION RACEWAYS SECTION 16110 - 3 SECTION 16123 CONDUCTORS PART[ GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. 1.02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS Section 16010 - Basic Electrical Requirements Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding PART PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRES AND CABLES (600 VOLTS) A. Conform to the applicable UL and IPCEA Standards for the use intended. Copper conductors with 600 volt insulation. Stranded conductors for No. 8 AWG and larger. Aluminum conductors shall not be permitted. B. Insulation: Type THHN insulation minimum unless otherwise specified or noted on the drawings. Type THW minimum or Type XHHW filled cross-linked polyethylene 90 deg. C thermosetting insulation for conductors No. 8 or larger. 90 deg. C minimum insulation within fixture wireways of fluorescent fixtures, Type RF -2 or TF commercial fixture wire, No. 16 AWG may be used for Class 2 remote control and signal circuits. C. Size: No. 12 AWG minimum unless otherwise specified or noted on the drawings. Not less than NEC requirements for the system to be installed. Conductors for trench circuits of 120 volts, or more than 100 feet long from panel to load center, shall be No. 10 AWG. Class 1 remote control and signal circuit conductors shall not be less than No. 14 AWG. Class 2 low energy remote control and signal circuit conductors shall be not less than No. 16 AWG. If Contractor furnishes other than specified equipment, it shall be his responsibility to furnish proper size conduit and conductors as required without additional cost to the Owner. D. Conductors shall be color coded as follows: 120/208V 2771480 V Phase A Black Brown Phase B Red Yellow Phase C Blue Orange Neutral White White Ground Green Green Connect all conductors of the same color to the same phase conductor, Conductors No. 12 and 10 shall be solid color compound for the entire length. Conductor sizes larger than No. 10 may be color coded at each termination and in each box or enclosure with 6 inches of half -lapped 314 inch pressure -sensitive, plastic tape of respective colors in lieu of solid color compound. 2.02 COMMUNICATION AND ELECTRONIC CABLE A. Foil shielded twisted pair cable shall be stranded equal to Belden "Belfoil", sized as required. B. Unless otherwise noted, co -axial cable shall be Belden RG -59, 20 AWG. C. As required orspecified in the section of these specifications specifying the equipmea Cable shall be continuous from backboards or panels to outlets or other termination points without splices. 2.03 VERTICAL CABLE SUPPORTS A. Split wedge type supports which clamp each individual conductor and tightens due to weight of the cable shall be used for cables without metallic sheath. Basket weave type supports shall be used for cables with metallic sheath. 2.04 CONNECTORS AND LUGS A. For Copper Conductors No. 6 and smaller: 3M Scotch -Lok or T&B Sta-Kon compression or indent type connectors with integral or separate insulating caps. B. For Copper Conductors Larger than No. 6: Solderless, indent, hcx screw, or bolt -type pressure connectors, properly taped or insulated. 2.05 TAPE A. Plastic tape, 8.5 mils minimum thickness, 1,000,000 megohms minimum insulation resistance, oil -resistant vinyl backing, oil - resistant acrylic adhesive, incapable of supporting combustion per ASTM D-568 Test Method B. CONDUCTORS SECTION 16123 - I PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WIRE AND CABLE TESTS (600 VOLTS) A. Measure the insulating resistance ofservice entrance conductors, feeder circuit conductors, and service ground. Measurements shall be taken between conductors and between conductors and ground. Reswttutce shall be 1,000,000 ohms or more when tested at 500 volts by megger without branch circuit loads. Tests and procedures shall meet the approval of the Engineer, and shall be in accordance with the applicable IPCEA Standards for the wires and cables to be installed. Furnish all instruments, equipment and personnel required for testing, and conduct tests in presence of the Engineer. Submit written reports of the tests and results shall be furnished to the Engineer. 3.02 SPLICES (600 VOLTS AND UNDER) A. Permitted only at outlets or accessible enclosures. Conductor lengths shall be continuous from termination to termination without splices unless approved by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 1 CONDUCTORS SECTION 16123 - 2 J SECTION 16130 BOXES AND FITTINGS PARTI GENERAL f� 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. 1.02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS Section 16010 - Basic Electrical Requirements Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding PART PRODUCTS 2.01 OUTLET BOXES A. Construction: Zinc -coated or cadmium plated sheet steel boxes of class to satisfy the condition at each outlet except where unilet or condulet bodies are required. Knockout type with knockouts removed only where necessary to accommodate the conduit entering. Square cornered, straight sided gang boxes, 4 inch octagon concrete rings and 4 inch octagon hung ceiling boxes with bars may be folded type: one-piece deep drawn type for all other boxes. B. Size: To accommodate the required number and sizes ofconduits, wires and splices in accordance with NEC requirements, but not smaller than size shown or specified. Standard concrete type boxes not to exceed 6 inches deep except where necessary to permit entrance of conduits into sides of boxes without interference with reinforcing bars. Special purpose boxes shall be sized for the device or application intended. C. Fixture Studs: 318 inch malleable -iron fixture stud in outlet boxes for ceiling lighting fixtures and interior bracket lighting fixtures, other than lamp receptacles and drop cards. D, Exposed: Screw -joint type, with gasketed weatherproof covers in locations exposed to the weather. E. Tile Boxes: Rectangular in shape with square corners and straight sides for receptacles and switches mounted in furniture cabinets or in glazed tile, concrete block, marble, brick stone or wood walls. Install without plaster rings. F. Wall -Mounted Switch, Receptacle and S ignal Boxes: Unless otherwise noted or specified, not less than 4 inches square by 2-1 Is inches deep for s ignal devices, 4-11/16 inches by 2-1 /8 inches deep for two devices and multigang boxes for more than two devices. Boxes for switches and receptacles on unfinished walls may be screw joint type with covers to fit the devices. G. Wall -Mounted Telephone Outlet Boxes: 4-1 I/16 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep, unless otherwise noted on the drawings H. Light Fixture Boxes: 4 inch diameter by I- V2 inch deep minimum for ceiling and interior bracket fixtures with concealed conduits. Plaster covers for bracket fixtures to have 3 inch diameter openings. Screw joint boxes with canopy seat for ceiling and interior bracket fixtures with exposed conduits. 1. Grounding Terminal: Provide a grounding terminal in each box containing a green equipment ground conductor, for serving motors, lighting fixtures, or receptacles. Grounding terminal shall be green -colored washer -in -hand machine screw or grounding bushing. 2.02 PULL BOXES A. Minimum NEC requirements unless larger box is noted. Pull boxes with internal volume not more than 150 cubic inches shall be as specified for outlet boxes with blank covers. Pull boxes with internal volume over 150 cubic inches shall be as specified for cabinets except covers shall be same thickness as box and shall have corrosion -resistant screws or bolt attachments. 2.03 FLOOR BOXES A, Heavy-duty, cast, adjustable type suitable for the device or application indicated, unless noted. Provide carpet flanges in carpeted area. Each telephone outlet shall consist of a horizontal cast aluminumhousing with aone inch bushed side opening. Outletsshall have provisions to accommodate a ten wire telephone terminal block. Gaskets shall be used to insure proper installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 OUTLET BOXES A. Installation: Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, outlet boxes shall be flush mounted and the front edges of the boxes or plaster covers shall be flush with the finished wall or ceiling line, or, if installed in walls and ceilings of incombustible construction, not more than 114 inch back of same. Mount boxes with the long axes of devices vertical, unless otherwise specified. Boxes in plastered walls and ceilings shall be provided with piaster covers. A multiple of box extensions and/or covers will not be BOXES AND FITTINGS SECTION 16130 -1 3.62 3.03 3.04 3.05 permitted. Install in a rigid and satisfactory manner with suitable metal bar hangers, box cleats, adjustable box hangers, etc. Use wood screws on wood, expansion shields on masonry and machine screws on steel work. B. Mounting Heights: The mounting heightofawall-mounted outlet box shall be construed to mean the height from the finished floor to the horizontal center line of the cover plate. On exposed tile, block, or brick construction mount outlet boxes at the nearest bed joint in the mounting height indicated. Verify with Architect C. Wall -Mounted Switch, Receptacle and Signal Outlets: On columns, pilasters, etc., mount so the centers of the columns are clear for future installation of partitions. Install outlet boxes near doors or windows close to the trim. Install outlet boxes near the doors on the lock sides as shown on architectural drawings, unless other locations are approved by the Architect. PULL BOXES A. Provide additional pull boxes wherever necessary to meet requirements for maximum lengths of conduit runs and maximum numbers of bends as specified under Conduit and Fittings. FLOOR BOXES A. Install level with top covers adjusted flush with finished floor or floor tile. FIXTURE CONNECTIONS A. Recessed or surface light fixtures in lay -in or accessible ceilings shall be connected with minimum 12 inch flexible metallic conduit, 4 to 6 feet long, with grounding provided. Flexible conduit shall not be used as the ground. IDENTIFICATION A. Identify all exposed junction and pull boxes according to the system and voltage carried by means of painted -0n stencils or labels, with legible letters and contrasting colors and without abbreviations. In general, use yellow color. Painting shall be in accordance with Division 9 - Finishes. END OF SECTION BOXES AND FTI'I INGS SECTION 16130 - 2 SECTION 16133 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES PARTI GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. 1.02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS Section 16010 - Basic Electrical Requirements Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding PART PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Sheet steel except those exposed to wet or rain conditions which shall be raintight unless otherwise noted. Cabinets without through feeder wiring shall be arranged to provide a wiring gutter not less than 4 inches wide for branch circuit panelboards served by feeders up to 4I0. Panelboards served by feeders in excess of 4/0 up to and including 750 MCM, shall be provided with tip, bottom and side gutters 8 inches wide. Cabinets shall be of standard make and shall be equal in all respects to those bearing the Underwriters' Laboratories label. Cabinets, including boxes, shall be made of galvanized steel. All outside surfaces of trim and doors shall be given a factory finish coat of No. 61 ANSI gray paint, or approved manufactures's standard. Cabinets for communications systems shall have 518 inch exterior grade, one -face B -grade or equal plywood backboard inside with maximum height and width. 2.02 FRONTS A. One-piece sheet steel frame and a hinged door with catch and lock for flush cabinets. Telephone and signal cabinets for surface mounting shall be equipped with a door hinged directly to cabinet. One-piece sheet steel 314 inch flange around all edges shaped to cover edge of box. Fronts may be secured to box by means of Flathead screws with captive nuts or clamps. 2.03 DOORS A. Doors shall close against a rabbet placed all around the inside edge of the frame, with a close fitting joint between door and frame. The doors shall be fitted with substantial flush hinges placed not over 24 inches apart, nor more than 6 inches from ends of doors, fastened permanently to the door and frame with round -headed rivets or spot welds, or with concealed flush piano hinges. Fastening screws of fronts shall be set not over 24 inches apart. Doors over 48 inches in height shall be equipped with a vault handle and a three-point catch. 2.04 LOCKS A. Furnish each cabinet with a combination catch and flat key lock. The telephone, electrical and signal cabinet locks shall be fitted to separate keying for each system. Furnish two keys for each cabinet. 2.05 GROUND BAR A. Each cabinet for a pane [board shall be provided with a copper interior ground bar suitably braced or bolted to the cabinet wall. The equipment ground bar shall be equivalent in current carrying capacity to the incoming feeder ground conductor and shall have approved pressure connector terminations for the associated feeders, branch circuits, etc. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CABINETS A. Cables installed in the wiring gutters of cabinets shall be neatly bundled, routed, and supported. Minimum bending radii as recommended by the cable manufacturer shall not be reduced. Lighting and power cabinets shall be installed with tops 6 feet 6 inches above floor and bottoms not less than 12 inches above floor. END OF SECTION CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES SECTION 16133 -1 SECTION 1614€ WIRING DEVICES PARTI GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. 1.02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS Section 16010 - Basic Electrical Requirements Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding PART PRODUCTS 2.01 SNAP SWITCHES A. Unless otherwise specified, each snap switch (flush tumbler -toggle) shall be of the A.C. general use type for mounting in a single - gang spacing, fully rated 20 amperes minimum on inductive and resistive loads at 120/277 volts, conforming to minimum requirements of the latest revision of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., UL 20 Fifth Edition Standard snap Switches and further requirements herein specified. Specification grade, heavy duty, single -pole, 3 -way oro-way,ofthemaintained, momentary, orlock type as indicated on the drawings. Switches shall operate in any position and shall be fully enclosed cup type with entire body of molded phenolic, urea or melamine with cover of molded phenolic, urea or melamine. Fibre, paper or similar insulating material shall not be used for body or cover. Ivory color handles unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Silver or silver alloy contacts. A.C. 120/277 volt general use snap switches shall be capable of withstanding tests as outlined in NEMA Publication WD I -1965, and shall be as follows unless otherwise noted: 20A 1201277 AC Hubbell I P 1221-1 2P 1222-1 3 -way 1223-1 4 -way 1224-1 3 -position 2 cct maintained) 385-1 3 -position 2 cct momentary 1557-1 Lighted handle pilot light 1221 -PL 2.02 RECEPTACLES A. General: Configuration and requirements for all connector or outlet receptacles shall be in accordance with NEMA Publication WDI-1965, Part 3 and Pan 10. Fire-resistant, non-absorptive, hot -welded, phenolic composition or equal bodies and bases with metal plaster cars (integral with the supporting member). Single or duplex as shown or noted on drawings, Ivory color unless otherwise noted on the drawings, Double grip contacts for each prong. B. Grounding Type: All receptacle shall be grounding type with a green colored hexagonal equipment ground screw of adequate size to accommodate an insulated g.Toundingjumper (based on Table 250-95 ofthe NEC with minimum size No. 14AWG). Grounding terminals of all receptacles shall be internally connected to the receptacle mourning yoke. C. Unless otherwise noted, receptacles shall be as follows: 1 2.03 J L HUBBELL 20A - t 25 V AC 2P 3W 5362.1 30A - 208V AC 2P 3W 7250 50A - 250V AC 3P 3W (Range) 7962 D Weatherproof receptacles shall consist of duplex receptacle as specified above, mounted in a box with a gasketed, weathcrproof, cast metal cover plate and cap over each receptacle opening. The cap shall be permanently attached to the cover plate by a short length of bead chain or shall he of the spring hinged flap type. E. Isolated grounding receptacles shall be the same NEMA configuration as 20A 125 volt receptacle except that the grounding pole shall be isolated from the mounting strap and be colored orange similar to Hubbell d 1G525I or IG4262. Ground these devices by means of a separate green equipment grounding conductor. F- Special: Receptacles for special applications shall be as indicated on the drawings. For kitchen equipment furnished under another section of the specifications, complete with cord set. This Contractor shall verify exact requirements and furnish a matching receptacle where indicated. PLUG CAPS A. Except for duplex receptacles, one matching plug cap shall be provided for each receptacle. No plug caps are required for duplex N2lIii1�L� 1:�(�J7I��+��Itilf�C�]�ir7)E�l�l receptacles. Provide watertight, male plug caps in damp locations or where exposed to weather. 2-04 DEVICE PLATES A. General: Provide device plates for each switch, receptacle, signal and telephone outlet, and special purpose outlet. Provide multi- gangoutlet plates for multi -gang boxes. Plates on finished walls shall be of stainless steel. Screws shall be metal with counter- sunk heads, in a color to match the finish of the plate. B. Exposed: Plates for exposed screw jointed fittings shall match the fittings with edges of plates flush with edges of fittings. Heavy cadmium plated steel with gasket. Plates for cast type boxes at locations subject to wct or rain conditions shall be of the cast, vapor - tight type. Provide hinged lift covers for devices. C. Communication: Plates for telephone and intercommunication have a''/: inch bushed opening in the center. D. Plates for special purpose outlets shall be of a design suitable for the particular application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3,01 DEVICE PLATES A. Install with alignment tolerance of 1116th inch and all edges in continuous contact with wall surfaces. END OF SECTION WIRING DEVICES SECTION 16141 -2 SECTION 16160 PANELBOARDS PARTI GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Conform with applicable provision of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. 1.02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS Section 16010 - Basic Electrical Requirements Section 16480 - Motor Controls 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete shop drawings with outline dimensions, descriptive literature, and complete descnption of the frame size, trip setting, class, and interrupting rating of all overcurrent devices. Identify available spaces. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Dead front, safety type, with voltage ratings as scheduled. Panelboards shall be of the type required for the short circuit and duty ratings indicated on the drawings or specified. Panelboards shall be as manufactured by General Electric, Cutlet -Hammer, ITE, Square D, or Westinghouse, and shall be circuit breaker as scheduled. 2.02 CABINETS AND FRONTS ,�. A. The panelboard bus assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of steel to be as specified in UL Standard 50 for cabinets. Wiring gutter space shall be in accordance with UL Standard 67 For panelboards. The box shall be fabricated from galvanized steel or equivalent rust resistant steel. Each front shall include a door and have a flush, cylinder tumbler -type lock with catch and spring-loaded stainless steel door pull. All panelboard locks shall be keyed alike. Fronts shall have adjustable indicating trip clamps which shall be completely concealed when the doors are closed. Doors shall be mounted with completely concealed steel hinges. Fronts shall not be removable with door in the locked position. Column width fronts shall have exposed hinges and be screw cover type. A circuit directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. "~ All locks shall be keyed alike. 2.03 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Circuit breakers shall be bolt -on thermal -magnetic, molded case circuit breakers. Breakers shall be 1, 2 or 3 -pole with an integral crossbar to assure simultaneous opening of all poles in multipole circuit breakers. Breakers shall have an overcenter, trip -free, toggle -type operating mechanism with quick -make, quick -break action and positive handle indication. Handles shall have "ON", "OFF" and "TRIPPED" positions. In addition, trip indication shall include a VISI -TRIP indicator appearing in the window of the breaker case. Bolt -0n circuit breakers shall be able to be installed in the panelboard without requiring additional mounting hardware. Circuit breakers shall be listed in accordance with UL Standard 489 and shall be rated 240 volts AC maximum with continuous current ratings as noted on the plans. Interrupting ratings shall be 65,000 rms symmetrical amperes maximum at 240 Y. volts AC maximum. Single pole, 15 and 20 ampere circuit breakers intended to switch fluorescent lighting loads on a regular basis shall carry the SWI) marking. See panel schedules on the plans for ratings. 2.04 BUSSING ASSEMBLY AND TEMPERATURE RISE A. Partelboard bus structure and main lugs or main circuit breaker shall have current ratings as shown on the panelboard schedule. Such ratings shall be established by heat rise tests, conducted in accordance with UL Standard 67. Bus structure shall be insulated. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be the "distributed phase" or phase sequence type and shall accept either plug -on (NQO) or bolt -0n (NQOB) circuit breakers. All current carrying parts of the bus structure shall be plated copper. 2.05 INTEGRATED EQUIPMENT SHORT CIRCUIT RATING A. Each panelboard,asacomplcteunit, shall haveashortcircuitcurrentritingequaltoorgreaterthanthe integrated equipmentrating shown on the panelboard schedule or on the plans. This rating shall be established by testing with the overcurrent devices mounted in the panelboard. The short circuit tests on the overcurrent devices and on the panclboard structure shall be made simultaneously by connecting the fault to each overcurrent device with the panelboard connected to its rated voltage source. Method oftesting shall be per Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 67. The source shall be capable of supplying specified panelboard short circuit current or greater. Testing of panelboard overcurrent devices for short circuit rating only while individually mounted is not acceptable. Also, testing of the bus structure by applying a fixed fault to the bus structure alone is not acceptable. Pane lboards shall be marked with their maximum short circuit current rating at the supply voltage and shall be UL listed. 2.06 SPACE ONLY A. Where "space only" is noted on the drawings, provide necessary connectors, mounting brackets, etc., for the future insertion of overcurrent device. IPANELBOARDS SECTION 16160 -1 2.07 DIRECTORIES A. Provide circuit directories on the inside face of the door. Directories shall be typed to indicate load served by each circuit. Directory card shall be mounted in holder and covered with clear plastic cover. Provide additional copies in O&M Manuals. 2.08 LABELS A. Labels for identifying the breakers shall be engraved laminated plastic strips attached by screws, or phenolic buttons or small window -frame type. Adhesive stick -on labels alone will not be acceptable. 2.09 UL LISTING A. Panelboards shall be listed by underwriters Laboratories and bear the label. When required, panelboards shall be suitable for use as service equipment. Panelboards shall be Square D type NQO (plug -on), NQOB (bolt -on). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CIRCUITING A. Special care shall be taken so that circuits are connected to the panels in such an arrangement as to insure, insofar as possible, that loads on the different phases at the panel are balanced. END OF SECTION PANELBOARDS SECTION 16160 - 2 ar SECTION 16170 GROUNDING AND BONDING -W PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. 1.02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS Section 16010 -Basic Electrical Requirements Section 16110 - Raceways Section 16160 - Panelboards PART2 PRODUCTS +rw 2.01 GENERAL A. Materials, equipment and devices related to the grounding system are specified under other sections of these specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install two separate grounding systems; a service grounding system and an equipment grounding system. The service equipment, conduit systems, supports, cabinets, equipment and neutral conductor shall he grounded in accordance with the minimum code requirements and as further indicated on the drawings or specified. Connect the two grounding systems together only at the main service equipment and to the secondary terminals or transformers creating separately derived distribution systems, such as dry -type transformers. 3.02 SERVICE GROUNDING SYSTEM A. General: The service grounding system is provided forthe A.C. service neutral ground. Current return conductors, such as neutrals ofthe service entrance, feeder circuits, and branch circuits, shall not be used for equipment grounding. Care must be exercised to insure that neutral bars are not bonded to the enclosures of panelboards, motor control centers, or switchboards, which are not part ofthe main service equipment. Except for separately derived systems, the neutral conductors shall be grounded only in the main service equipment. B. Common Ground Point: Establish one common ground point in the main service equipment by interconnecting the insulated neutral bus (or bar), the uninsulated equipment ground bus (or bar), and service grounding electrode conductor. C. Neutral Disconnecting Means: Install a neutral disconnecting means in the main service equipment for disconnecting and isolating the neutral bus from the common ground. This disconnecting means maybe disconnecting links in the interconnection between the insulated neutral and the uninsulated equipment ground. D. Neutral Bars: Provide an insulated neutral bar, separate from the uninsulated equipment ground bar, in all switchboards, panelboards, transformers, motor control centers, starters, disconnect switches, cabinets, etc., which have neutral connections. 3.03 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING SYSTEM A. General: Provide a complete equipment grounding system in accordance with the minimum code requirements and as further indicated on the drawings or specified. The equipment ground (green conductor) consists of metallic connections to ground of noncurrent- carrying metal parts of the wiring system or apparatus connected to the system. The primary purpose of equipment grounding is to provide greater safety by limiting the electrical potential between noncurrent -carrying parts of the system, and to provide a low impedance path to ground for possible ground fault currents. B. Common Ground Point: Establish one common ground point as specified elsewhere in this section of the specifications for interconnection of the equipment grounding system and the service grounding electrode conductor. C. Service Equipment Enclosure: Bond the enclosure ofthe main service equipment in the uninsulated equipment ground bus (or bar) with a conductor or bar sized for 25% of the largest service overeurrent device. D. Ground Bar: Provide an uninsulated equipment ground bar, separate from any insulated neutral bar, in all switchboards, panelboards, transformers, motor control centers, starters, disconnect switches, cabinets, etc., for grounding the enclosure and for connecting other equipment ground conductors. The ground bar shall bean integrally mounted and braced bus bar in switchboards, or a separately mounted bar adequately braced or bolted to the enclosure of other types of equipment. The ground bar shall be adequately braced or bolted to the enclosure after thoroughly cleaning both surfaces to assurc good contact. Provide solderless pressure connectors for all conductor terminations. Number and size of pressure connectors on equipment grounding bars as required for the termination ofequipment grounding conductors. In addition to the active circuits, provide pressure connectors for all three phase spares and spaces. IGROUNDING AND BONDING SECTION 16170 - 1 E. Conduits: Where metallic conduits terminate without mechanical connection to a metallic housing ofelectrical equipment by means of lock nut and bushings provide ground bushing connected with a bare copper conductor to the ground bar in the electrical equipment. Metallic conduits containing ground wiring only shall be bonded to the ground wire at both conduit entrance and exit. Install grounding conductor in each non-metallic conduit or duct except those used for telephone, sound or low -voltage signals, and in all flexible conduit that does not have a built-in ground conductor. Bond the conductor at both ends in the equipment grounding system. F. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Provide a separate green insulated equipment grounding conductor for each single or three phase feeder and each branch circuit with a three phase protective device. Provide a separate green insulated equipment grounding conductor for a single phase branch circuit where indicated on the drawings. Install the required grounding conductor in the common conduit or raceway with the related phase and/or neutral conductors and connect to the box or cabinet grounding terminal. Where there are parallel feeders installed in more than one raceway, each raceway shall have a green insulated equipment ground conductor. G. Devices: Install a minimum No. 12 green insulated equipment bonding conductor from a grounding terminal in the respective outlet or junction box to the green ground terminal of all receptacles and through flexible conduit to all light fixture housings. H. Motors: Install a separate green insulated equipment grounding conductor from the equipment ground bar in the motor control center or separate starter through the conduit and flexible conduit to the ground terminal in the connection box mounted on the motor. Install the grounding conductor in the common conduit or raceway with the related circuit conductors. 3.04 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Two service ground electrodes shall be utilized. One shall be the main cold water metallic water piping system., and the other shall be a made electrode consisting of not less than 20 feet of bare copper conductor encased along the bottom of concrete foundation footing which is indirect contact with the earth (NEC 250-5 I c). Make the connections to the cold water pipe inside the building at the point of entrance. The grounding electrodes for separately derived systems shall be approved for the application. 3.05 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. The grounding conductors for both service ground electrodes shall be insulated or bare copper, sized in accordance with NEC 250- 94, including the conductor for the made electrode. The conductors shall be continuous withoutjoint or splice, and shall be installed in conduit with the conduit bonded to the conductor at each end. Install the conductor to permit the shortest and most direct path, and terminate in the main service equipment on the common ground point. Equipment grounding conductors shall be green insulated conductors equivalent to the insulation on the associated phase conductor, but not less than Type TW. The equipment grounding conductor or straps shall be sized in accordance with NEC. Where one feeder service serves a series of panelboards or transformers, the equipment grounding conductor shall be continuous without splices. Grounding conductors shall not be installed through metal- sheathed holes. All connections shall be available for inspection and maintenance. 3.06 GROUND CONNECTIONS A. Clean surfaces thoroughly before applying ground lugs or clamps. If surface is coated, the coating must be removed down to the bare metal. After the coating has been removed, apply a non -corrosive approved compound to cleaned surface and install lugs or clamps. Where galvanizing is removed from metal, it shall be painted or touched up with "Galvanox". 3.07 TESTS A. Test the completed grounding system with an ohmmeter at the service ground bar and submit a written report to the Engineer for approval. The service shall not be energized if the test shows more than 5 ohms, unless approved by the Engineer. END OF SECTION I GROUNDING AND BONDING SECTION 16170 - 2 SECTION 16441 ENCLOSED SWITCHES PARTI GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. 1.02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS Section 16010 - Basic Electrical Requirements Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DISCONNECTING MEANS: A. Safety Type Disconnecting Switches Heavy duty, quick -make, quick -break type, voltage rating as required forapplication. Number of poles and ampacity as noted or required by code. All switches used on motor circuits shall have adequate horsepower rating in accordance with Table III of Federal Specification W -A-865. Safety switches employed as motor disconnect devices shall be of the fusible type only where two or more motors, or other loads, are connected to the same branch circuit_ Non -fusible for single motors. Fuse clips suitable for Buss current limiting fuses. Short circuit rating sufficient to withstand the available fault current or let -through current before the fuse melts without damage or change in rating. NEMA I enclosures for dry locations. NEMA 12 enclosures for wet locations or where exposed to weather unless otherwise noted. B. Separately Enclosed Motor Snap Switches: Motor snap switches shall be used for motor disconnect means, controller, and motor overcurrent protection for 120 volt, 1f2 H.P. and smaller, as indicated. These devices shall be horsepower rated and shall contain motor running overcurrent protection. 2.02 FUSES A. General: Dual element, time delay type, based on heavy service, Buss unless otherwise noted or required for the installation. B. Current Limiting Fuses: Provide where indicated on the drawings. Feeder protection in conjunction with fused switches, instal] NEMA Class RK5 fuses sized 125% of load current or as required for coordination. Current limiting high -interrupting capacity fuses coordinated with molded case circuit breakers shall be furnished by the circuit breaker manufacturer. C. Coordination: Coordinate the low voltage fuses required for the project to provide basic selective protection and proprriyc(>ordinate with the other associated protective equipment. D. All fuses shall be of the same manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DISCONNECTING MEANS A. Install in each location indicated on the drawings. 3.02 SPARE FUSES A. Furnish one complete set of each size of currant limiting fuse installed for circuit breaker protection, and each size fuse in excess of 30 amperes. Also one spare set of each size high voltage fuses installed. END OF SECTION ENCLOSED SWITCHES SECTION 16441 -1 PART l 1.01 1.02 1.03 1.04 1.05 liIi7 SECTION 16444 FUSES GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS A- The general provisions of the Contract and the requirements of Section 16 apply to the work specified in this Section. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A_ Provide all electrical distribution equipment, fuses, motor control equipment and accessones required to distribute electrical power to all motors, outlets and systems requiring power. CODES A. All work must be performed in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electric Code and all other applicable, standards, Codes and laws. Where the requirements of the Contract Documents exceed Code requirements, comply with the Contract Documents. STANDARDS A. All equipment shall be manufactured in the U, S. A. in accordance with applicable NEMA and NEC Standards and shall bear a nationally recognized testing agency label. SUBSTITUTIONS A, Substitutions shall comply with requirements of Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements. The names of manufacturers and model numbers have been used in the Contract Documents to establish types of equipment and standards of quality. If only one manufacturer is named for a specific item of equipment, then the specified manufacturer will be the only acceptable one. Where more than one manufacturer is named for a specific item, only one of the specified manufacturers will be considered for approval. Where only one manufacturer is mentioned with the phrase "or approved equal", the Contractor may submit an alternate manufacturer as outlined in the Division l General Requirements or the Supplementary Conditions. No attempt has been made to determine if each manufacturer listed for a particular item of equipment will produce material that will comply with all requirements. A submittal shall contain sufficient information to prove compliance with the Contract Documents. (In the case of current limiting equipment (fuses, etc.), should an alternate be proposed by the electrical contractor for equipment by a manufacturer other than those specifically declared herein; the contractor shall submit a written request, along with a complete and detailed short circuit and selective coordination study to the engineer for evaluation at least 10 working days prior to bid opening. Failure to submit the necessary information to the engineer in time shall not be acceptable and the originally specified equipment shall be provided. If the engineer's review shall deem the alternate submittal acceptable, the engineer shall issue a formal written addendum prior to bid opening. FUSES (600 VOLT AND BELOW) A. General: Provide fuses in all devices requiring fuses ofthe types and ampere ratings required. Fuses shall have the proper voltage rating, coordinated with the voltage at the point of application_ All fuses shall be of the high interrupting capacity, current limiting type, and be listed and labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories. All fuses shall be of the same manufacturer. Types - 1. 600 Amps and Below: Dual -element construction (current limiting, time -delay and high interrupting capacity) providing thermal protection for both fuse and fuseholder. Interrupting rating shall be 300,000 amperes RMS symmetrical and peak let-thru current and energy let-thru values shall not exceed the values established by Underwriters' Laboratories Standard for Class RK -1 fuses. Fuses shall be "LOW -PEAK YELLOW" in color and shall be BUSSMANN LOW -PEAK Dual -Element Fuses, types LPN-RK(amp)SP/LPS-RK(amp)SP or LP1(amp)SP. The fuses shall have separate overload and short-circuit elements. The fuses shall incorporate a spring activated thermal overload element having a 284 degree Fahrenheit melting point alloy and shall be independent of the short-circuit clearing chamber. "LOW -PEAK YELLOWT"" NOTICE labels to alert the end user of the engineered level of protection of the electrical equipment, shall be field installed by the electrical contractor. They shall be marked with the proper fuse rating, per the specifications, and placed in a conspicuous location on the enclosure. Above 600 Amps: Time -delay type; shall hold500% of rated current for a minimum of 4 seconds and clear 20 times rated current in .01 seconds or less. Interrupting ratings shall be 300,000 amperes RMS symmetrical and peak Set-thru current and energy let-thru values shall not exceed the values stablished by Underwriters' Laboratories for Class L fuses, Fuses shall be "LOW -PEAK YELLOW'"' in color and shall be BUSSMANN LOW -PEAK type KRP-C(amp)SP. The fuses shall employ "O" rings as positive seals betwecn the end bells and the glass melamine fuse barrel. The fuse links shall be pure silver links (99.9% pure), to limit the short circuit current let -through values to low levels and comply with NEC Sections requiring component protection. The terminals shall be peened. "LOW -PEAK YELLOW` NOTICE labels to alert the end user of the engineered level of protection of the electrical equipment, shall be field installed by the electrical contractor. They shall be marked with the proper fuse rating, per the specifications, and placed in a conspicuous location on the enclosure. C. Special Applications: 1. Motor Circuits - All individual motor circuits with full load ampere ratings (FLA) of 480 amperes or less shall be protected by BUSSMANN LOW -PEAK Dual -Element Time -Delay Fuses, types LPN-RK(amp)SP/LPS- FUSES SECTION 16444 - 1 RK(amp)SP or LP!(amp)SP. The following guidelines apply for motors protected by property sized overload relays: fuses for motors with a marked service factor not less that 1.15 shall be installed in ratings of 125% of motor full load current (or next size larger if 125% does not correspond to a fuse size) except where high ambient temperatures prevail, or where the motor drives a heavy revolving part which cannot be brought up to full speed quickly, such as large faros. Under such conditions the fuse may be 150% to 175% of the motor full load current. Larger H.P. motors shall be protected by BUSSMANN LOW -PEAK Time -Delay KRP-C(amp)SP Fuses of the ratings shown on the drawings. For all other motors, (such as 1.0 service factor motors) fuses shall be sized in ratings of 115% of the motor full load current (or next size larger if 115% does not correspond to a fuse size) except as noted above, The following guidelines apply where fuses are used as the only overload protection for the motor: for motors with a 1.15 service factor or more, fuses should be sized at 125% of motor full load current or next size smaller if 125% does not correspond to a fuse size. For all other motors, fuses should be sized at 115% of motor full load current (or next size smaller, if 115% does not correspond to a fuse size). The fuses shall be UL Class RK 1, or 3, Dual -Element Time -Delay. Fuses shall be `LOW -PEAK YELLOW'" in color. "LOW -PEAK YELLOW""" NOTICE labels to alert the end user of the engineered level of protection of the electrical equipment, shall be field installed by the electrical contractor. They shall be marked with the proper fuse rating, per the specifications, and placed in a conspicuous location on the enclosure. Motor Controllers - NEMA and IEC Style motor controllers shall be protected by BUSSMANN LOW -PEAK Dual - Element, Time -Delay Fuses to provide Type 2 coordination for the controller. This level of protection shall allow no damage to the controller, under low and high level fault conditions, as required by IEC Publication 947-4. For IEC Style controllers, the fuses shall be installed in ratings to coordinate with the overload relays, such that the relaylfuse curves crossover at 7-10 times the IEC contactor current rating. The fuses shall be LPS-RK(amp)SP, LPN-RK(amp)SP, or LP](amp)SP. Fuses shall be "LOW -PEAK YELLOWY'" in color. "LOW -PEAK YELLOWY" NOTICE labels to alert the end user of the engineered level of protection of the electrical equipment, shall be field installed by the electrical contractor. They shall be marked with the proper fuse rating, per the specifications, and placed in a conspicuous location on the enclosure. Circuit breaker panels shall be protected by BUSSMANN LOW -PEAK Fuses LPN-RK(amp)SP, LPS-RK(amp)SP, LPJ(amp)SP, or KRP-C(amp)SP Time -Delay Fuses as shown on the drawings. The fuses shall be UL Class RK1, Class ! or Class L. "LOW -PEAK YELLOW' NOTICE labels to alert the end user of the engineered level of protection of the electrical equipment, shall be field installed by the electrical contractor. They shall be marked with the proper fuse rating, per the specifications, and placed in a conspicuous location on the enclosure. Fluorescent fixtures shall be protected by BUSSMANN Fuses GLR or GMF with Holder HLR. The fixtures shall have individual protection on the line side of the ballast. A fuse and holder shall be mounted within or as part of the fixture. Size and type of fuse to be recommended by the ballast manufacturer. All other ballast -controlled lighting fixtures shall be protected by BUSSMANN Fuses type KTK or FNQ with Holders HEB, HPF, or HPS. They shall have individual protection on the line side of the ballast. Fuse and holder shall be mounted in a location convenient for changing fuses. Holder shall be mounted in protected location or be an in-line waterproof holder(HEB). Size and type of fuse to be recommended by the ballast manufacturer or as indicated on plans. D. Installation: Fuses shall be shipped separately. Any fuses shipped installed in equipment, shall be replaced by the electrical contractor with new fuses as specified above prior to energization at no additional expense to owner. All fuses shall be stored it moisture free packaging at job site and shall be installed immediately prior to energization of the circuit in which it is applied. E, Spares: Spare fuses shall be provided in the amount of 10% of each type and size installed, but in no case, shall less than three spares of a specific size and type be supplied. Deliver to the Owner at the time of acceptance of the project, neatly encased in a properly labeled spare fuse cabinet Bussmann type SFC. F. Manufacturer: Bussmann or approved equal. G. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings and or brochures for all fuses and holders. All submittals must be bound in binder or book forst with a table of contents listing all items in that specific submittal. PART PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION FUSES SECTION 16444 - 2 SECTION 16480 MOTOR CONTROLS u.v PARTI GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A, Conform with applicable provision of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. 1.02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS Section 16010 -Basic Electrical Requirements Section 16160 - Panelboards Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding Section 16902 - Electrical Controls FART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Starters shall be as furnished by the equipment supplier and as specified under another division of the specifications unless modified by details or control diagrams on the drawings, or indicated to be supplied as part of a motor control center or panel. B. Starters in panelboards shall be 3 phase, 250 volt, full voltage, magnetic across the line, with overload relays in each leg. Starters il shall have auxiliary contacts as required and reset button in face of housing, 2,02 CONTROLS A. Control -circuit conductors shall be grounded in accordance with NEC and shall be arranged so that an accidental ground will not start the motor. Energy forcontrol circuits and indicating lights shall be 120 volts provided, where necessary, by individual dry -type control transformer of adequate capacity located within or adjacent to the starter. Automatic control devices such as thermostats, float or pressure switches may control the starting and stopping of motors directly, provided the devices used arc designed for that purpose and have an adequate horsepower rating. 2.03 POWER FACTOR CORRECTING CAPACITIES: A. Provide for motors 5 horsepower and larger, excluding reciprocating heat pumps. Correction to be provided to nominal 95% power factor. Contractor shall test and verify that corrected power factor does not attain unity under a fully loaded condition. B. Capacitors shall be enclosed bushing type NEMA I enclosure located at, and switched with, motor. Capacitors shall be 3 phase, 250V, non -inflammable liquid filled General Electric Type "EDT" in sizes required for the installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL >� A. Connect each motor to a motor starter of proper design to meet the requirements of the motor and drive, all as furnished by the equipment supplier. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install and connect in accordance with related work specified in other sections of these specifications and standard industry practice. Each motor shall be checked for correct rotation. END OF SECTION t 1 II 1 MOTOR CONTROLS SECTION 16480 -1 SECTION 16500 LIGHTING PART] GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and Gcnemi Requirements. 1.02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS Section 16010 - Basic Electrical Requirements Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval complete shop drawings, catalog cuts, special installation instructions, photometric data, and descriptive literature. When fixtures are proposed for substitution and prior approval has not been issued, the submittal for approval shall include catalog cuts of both the specified and proposed fixtures. Catalog numbers shown on the Fixture Schedule are indicative of the general type desired and are not intended to restrict selection to fixtures of any manufacturer. Fixtures of similar designs and equivalent light distribution and brightness characteristics and of equal finish and quality will be acceptable if approved by the Engineer. All Fixtures shall be of the type approved by Underwriters' Laboratories. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.41 GENERAL A. Furnish all lighting fixtures throughout ofthe type indicated on the drawings, complete with lamps, sockets, wiring, fitters, hangers, plaster rings, etc., as required. 2.02 LAMPS A. Fluorescent: 36W F36/T12 Cool White unless noted. B. Incandescent: Inside frosted; extended service, 130 volt. C. High Intensity Discharge: Phosphorcoated, Base up Burning unless noted, Type T self -extinguishing. Universal burning lamps will not be accepted. D. Manufacturers: General Electric, Phillips, or Sylvania. 2.03 BALLASTS A. Fluorescent: UL approved, high power factor with ETLcertified CBM label, suitable for 120V operation as required. Sound rating of "A" for interior installations. Provide premium Class P protected ballasts with built-in thermally actuated automatic reclosing device. Manufacturers shall certify in writing that the ballast hotspot shall not exceed 90 deg. F. ambient temperature. Ballasts shall be energy savings type. Provide two (2) bolt attachment of ballasts. B. High Intensity Discharge: One lamp type as required for the application. Ballast for exterior H.1. D. lamps shall be rated far -20 deg. F. C. Manufacturers: Advance Mark M, General Electric Maxi Miser I. 2.04 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES A. All fixtures, ballasts and supports shall be quiet in operation. Louvers, shields, reflectors and all sections of the channel structure shall be securely held in position. Fixtures shall not be mounted in such a way that ballast hum will be amplified or transmitted into work areas. 2.05 FINISH A. Bonderized or equal treatment on all steel parts prior to applying finish. Metal parts shall bealuminum, brass, copper, bronze, or steel, with powder paint white enamel finish unless otherwise noted on the drawings. 2,06 FLUORESCENT LAMPHOLDERS A. Designed so lamps will be held firmly in place, electrically and mechanically, permitting easy insertion or removal of lamps. Provide corrosion resistant treated lamp pin contacts. 2.07 CEILING TRIM A. Furnish proper ceiling frames for ceiling material in which recessed fixtures are to be installed. Verify prior to ordering. LIGHTING SECTION 16500 -1 2.08 2.09 2.10 LENS A. When an acrylic lens or diffuser is specified, it shall be of 1000/oacrylic meeting American Society for Testing Matenals specifications for Methacrylate Molding and Extrusion Compounds(ASTM D788-63). Plastic diffusing panels, luminous sides panels and other luminous plastic members of fixtures shall be made of not less than 0.156 inch Pattern 19 thick prismatic clean acrylic material. Plastic shall be non-flammable or shall have a flame spread rate of not more than 3.2 inches per minute for a V� inch width of the material. The plastic shall show no yellowing apparent to the naked rye either when subjected to the accelerated weathering test in accordance with ASTM D -795-14T (500 hours exposure, using type S- i lamp) or after prolonged exposure to a fluorescent lamp source under conditions identical with those existing in the fixture in which it is to be used. The plastic shall be non -electrostatic or the finished parts shall be treated with an anti -static wax. HOUSING A. Not less than 20 gauge steel with powder paint white enamel finish applied over corrosion -resistant primer unless otherwise specifically approved. EMERGENCY LIGHT BATTERY PACKS A. Lighting fixtures so indicated on the drawings shall be provided with emergency lighting feature. Components shall consist of a sealed nickel -cadmium battery and a solid state invertor, charger and switch system. The components shall be self-contained within the fixture and be factory installed. The rechargeable battery shall operate two lamps at an emergency level for a minimum of 90 minutes. The fixture shall be U,L. listed. System shall have a 5 year unconditional guarantee. Units on switched circuits shall be wired such that the fixture can be switched off without causing the emergency battery to operate. Units shall be integral to the lighting fixture. Units shall be Bodine B-50 or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 3.02 3.03 3.04 3.05 3.06 3.07 SUPPORTS A. Support ceiling fixtures by anchorage to the ceiling only where the ceiling is concrete or masonry units. Provide mounting angles on trapeze where required to support light fixtures between structural members. No lighting fixtures, conduit or outlet boxes shall be supported from the building sheet metal deck. Where iay-in construction is used, fixtures shall be on the lay -in type. Coordinate supports for lay -in fixtures with Ceiling Contractor. LOW DENSITY CEILING A. Special attention is directed to the code restriction against mounting fluorescent fixtures on combustible low-density cellulose fiberboard (NEC 410-76(6)). If fixtures are to be installed that are not UL approved for this condition, a suitable mounting arrangement shall be developed which meets the approval of the Engineer. CEILING TRIM AND MEANS OF SUPPORT A. The ceiling trim and means of support of recessed fixtures shall be coordinated with the type of ceiling to be installed to insure proper installation. BLOCKING A. Protect housings of recessed lighting fixtures during installation of internal blocking or framing to prevent distortion of sides or dislocation of threaded lugs which upon completion must be in perfect alignment and match the corresponding holes in frames or rims so that holding screws can be installed freely without forcing and remain so they can be easily removed when servicing. Threads to receive holding screws shall be chased after plating and finishing to insure easy installation and removal of knurled beaded screws by thumb pressure. LAMP GUARDS A. Provide safety guard clips on open type fluorescent fixtures to prevent lamps from falling. CLEAN-UP A. At final inspection, the fixtures and lighting equipment shall be in first class operating order, in perfect condition as to finish, free from defects, completely Tamped, clears and free from dust, plaster or paint spots, and complete with the required glassware, reflectors, side panels, louvers or other components necessary to complete the fixtures. LAMPS A. Install new lamps in all lighting fixtures seven (7) days before building acceptance or beneficial occupancy, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. END OF SECTION LIGHTING SECTION 16500 - 2 SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM PARTI GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Special Conditions. 1.02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS: Swian 16010 - Basic Electrical Requirements. Section 16110 - Raceways Section 16123 - Conductors Section 16130 - Boxes and Fittings Section 16133 - Cabinets and Enclosures Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding Section 16441 - Enclosed Switches 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Complete shop drawings, wiring diagrams, catalog cuts, installation instructions and drawings, and descriptive literature. Three copiesofcompleteoperatingandmaintenancemanualsofthedevices,assemblies, and the completed system. Thesemanuals shall include complete one -line diagrams showing all stations, detectors, etc. All submittals required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01340. 1.04 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: A. The following publications of the issues listed below, but referred to thereafter by basic designation only, form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the references thereto. Use latest edition of publication a time of bid. 1. Factory Mutual System Publication: Factory Mutual Approval Guide 2, National Fire Protection Association Standards: No. 70 National Electrical Code No. 72A Local Protective System No. 72D Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems No. 72E Auto Fire Detectors 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Publication: Fire Protection Equipment List 1.05 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. The work included under this section consists of furnishing of all materials and equipment and in the performing of all labor and service necessary to the complete installation of the fire alarm system including all related systems and accessories for the school, all as indicated on the drawings and herein specified. B. The equipment shall be completely installed, properly interconnected, and shall be placed in working order. The name of the manufacturer and the serial numbers, shall appear on all major components. Locks for all cabinets shall be keyed alike. The system shall be of the non -coded type. The system shall be electrically supervised in conformance with Article 240 of Standard No. 72D of the National Fire Protective Association. The operation ofany automatic fire detection device or manual station shall result in the continuous ringing of all fire alarm bells in the building, and the automatic transmission of a coded signal to the central alarm station by commercial telephone lines. C. The work shall be complete in all respects and shall include all devices and appurtenances which are normal for the systems intended. Each and every system shall be turned over to the Owner in a balanced, tested and first class operating condition. D. All interlocking wiring required by the system operation sequencing herein specified between the various electrical systems shall be performed under this section of the specifications. All wiring shall be run in conduit as shown on the drawings. E. The Fire Alarm System equipment shall be as manufactured by the Gamewell Company and constitutes the type and quality of the equipment to be furnished. F. Materials and equipment shall be first grade, standard, current products of the manufacturer and shall be suitable for the IFIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM SECTION 16721 -1 performance of their separate functions. Where two or more pieces ofequipment performing the same function are required, they shall be exact duplicates produced by the same manufacturer. All materials and equipment shall conform to the requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., or the Factory Mutual system for fire alarm systems of the type indicated. The Contractor shall submit proof that the items furnished under this specification conform to such requirements. The Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., label or seal, or listing in the Fire Protection Equipment List will be acceptable as sufficient evidence that the items conform to the IFIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM SECTION 16721 -1 PART 2 2.01 2.02 2.03 requirements of the Underwriters Laboratones, Inc. The Factory Mutual label or seal, or listing in the Factory Mutual Approval Guide, will be acceptable as sufficient evidence that she items conform to the requirements of the Factory Mutual System. 5. Governing Requirements: The installation shall conform in all respects to the National Fire Protection Association Standard No. 72A, 72B, 72C and 72D, except as modified herein or on the drawings. The equipment furnished shall be in compliance with the type system now in use on the installation (premise). H. Drawings and Manuals: Upon completion of the installation and prior to final inspection, the Contractor shall furnish four (4) copies of"as-built" drawings. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish four (4) copies of a manual for the complete instructions of the operation, inspection, testing, and maintenance of tate system, including wiring diagrams. PRODUCTS GENERAL A. All matenals and components shall be the product of a nationally reputable manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of fire alarm systems and shall be the manufacturer's latest approved design. B. The system shall include all wiring, conduit, pull boxes, terminal cabinets, outlet and mounting boxes, central control equipment, bells, detectors, annunciator panels, fire alarm stations, and all other accessones and miscellaneous items required. C. Basic materials and methods shall be as specified in other sections of these specifications. D. The Contractor shall fumish and install a non -coded, limited energy type fire alarm system known as 404, manufactured by Gamewell, or equal. EQUIPMENT A. The following equipment shall be installed as a part of the Master Fire Alarm Control: I. I -M-1755-8 Master control unit with 28932-8 chassis and front panel. 1-M-1746-3 Battery cabinet and regulator with 67933 batteries as required I -M-1747 March Time Module B. Furnish and install pull stations as indicated on the plans, Gamewell M46-23 mounted in Space Age GM -008 flush enclosures or equal. C. Indicating devices shall be flush mounted, as indicated on the plants, Gamewell 66974 Back Box, 66849-24 volt Hom, and 67039 AV Panel, or equal. D Smoke detectors shall be of the photo electric type and shall comply with UL 268. They shall be mounted at no greater than 30 feet on centers or as indicated on the drawings. E_ Heat detectors shall be combination fixed temperature and rate of rise detectors. Rate of rise shall be 15 degree F. per minute and a freed temperature of 190 degrees. SYSTEM OPERATION A. Actuation of any alarm initiating device shall sound all alarm indicating devices continuously until the system has been manually silenced by an ALARM OFF switch or until the initiating device and control unit have been restored to the normal condition. During an alarm condition the associated supervised zone lamp shall be illuminated on the control unit. The system shall also be capable of operating a local energy Master Box, automatically transmitting fire information to the fire department. The Control Unit shall perform auxiliary control functions on a common or zoned basis as required. All alarm initiating circuits, alarm indicating circuits, and the Master Box trip circuit shall be supervised against the occurrence of a break or a ground fault condition in the field wiring. These conditions shall cause a trouble buzzer to sound in the control unit until manually silenced by the buzzer silencing switch. Tripping of the smoke supply circuit breaker or a burned out zone lamp will also energize the trouble buzzer. The trouble circuit shall be arranged for ring -back operation to prevent switch disarrangement during normal supervisory conditions. The system shall also have the capability of indicating the specific alarm initiatingzoneinthe trouble condition. All exit lights shall flash during alarm. B. Primary operating power for the system is obtained from one side of a 120/240 Volt, 60 Hz, single phase, 3 -wire system. C. The control unit shall provide eight zones for alarm initiating devices, two fused 24VDC circuits for alarm indicating devices, a local energy Master Box trip circuit, a battery charging circuit, a trouble buzzer, an overcurrent protected 24VDC circuit for smoke detector power, isolated normally open accessory alarm contacts from each zone, and separate isolated single pole double throw contacts for both common alarm and trouble conditions. D. The control unit shall provide a means to supervise a remote lamp annunciator. An open filament or break in any annunciator line shall cause a trouble signal in the control unit. E. Mounted on the control unit door shall be supervised zone lamps, a system trouble lamp and an AC supervisory lamp. All circuit FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM SECTION 16721 - 2 t 1 components within the control unit, except the power transformer, and terminal block for AC connections shall be mounted on a printed circuit card. All relays shall be plug-in type with plastic dust covers. Receptacles shall be provided for plugging in an optional voltmeter and milliammeter. Receptacles shall be provided for plugging in an optional milliammeter for indicating circuit supervisory current. F. The alarm initiating circuits shall be of the low voltage, limited energy type arranged for operation from normally open contact devices connected with end -0F -line diodes which will transmit signals to the control unit with a single open or ground fault on the circuit. Each initiating circuit shall operated with 30 ohm loop resistance and the circuit wires, including the associated zones lamps, shall be supervised. G_ The battery charging circuit shall consist of a fixed high rate, and an adjustable trickle rate. The high rate shall be fixed at 0.5 ampere. H. The standby power system shall utilize nickel cadmium batteries or sealed lead -acid and a voltage regulator, and shall be capable of powering the system for as long as 60 hours as indicated by NFPA pamphlet 72B and C. I. Six switches shall be provided within the control unit as follows: 1. A MASTER BOX switch - when operated to the OFF position will prevent the Master Box from being tripped during testing of the system. The system trouble circuit shall be energized while the switch is in the OFF position. 2. An ALARM switch -when operated to the OFF position shall disconnect power to the alarm indicating device circuits. The system trouble circuit will be energized while the switch is in the OFF position. 3. A BAT switch - when operated to the Hi RATE position shall cause the standby battery to charge at approximately a 0.5 ampere rate. The system trouble circuit shall be energized while the switch is in the HI RATE. positron. 4. A BUZZ switch shall be provided for silencing the trouble buzzer whenever the system trouble circuit is energized. After correction of all the conditions which cause energization of the trouble circuit the trouble buzzer shall resound until the BUZZ switch is retumed to the NORM position. 5. A RESET switch shall reset the system and smoke detectors after an alarm. The system shall lock in until reset. 6. A TEST switch shall be provided to check continuity ofeach initiating device circuit by lighting the associated zone lamp. This switch shall serve as a lamp test. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The fire alarm system shall be provided where indicated on the drawings, and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer`s recommendations and approved shop drawings. B. Operation of any manual station or automatic device shall: 1. Activate all audible/visual alarm devices to March Time Sequence, horn and light units in corridors as well as "keying" the tone generator into the sound system amplifiers, and to all loudspeakers. 2. An auxiliary relay shall activate to the March Time Sequence to flash alarm lamps at speaker locations. 3. Light appropriate zone indicator lamp on the front of the fire alarm control panel. 4. Activate four (4) auxiliary contacts for auxiliary control functions. C. Audible and visual trouble indicators shall activate in the event of system disarrangement due to open or ground conditions in any of the circuits. 3.02 WIRING A. The Contractor shall famish and install, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, all wiring, conduit and outlet boxes required for the erection and operation of a complete electric Time and Program System as described herein and as shown on Architect's drawings. B- All wiring shall be of the same approved type as used for electric light power wirings, and shall meet all the requirements of national, state and local electric codes. The size of the different wires shall be those specified by the manufacturer. All wires shall be tagged at all junction points, and shall test free from grounds or crosses between conductors. 3.03 TESTS A_ After installation of the system is completed, and at such time as directed by the Architect, the Contractor shall conduct a complete system operating test for approval. The test shall demonstrate that the system meets the operating requirements ofthis Specification, that individual conductors of all circuits are free of grounds, shorts, and breaks and that no grounds exist between any piece of equipment in the control unit and cabinet. This test shall include the complete cycling of all fire alarms and shall prove out all interlock wiring. FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM SECTION 16721 - 3 3.04 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS A. Spare parts shall be directly interchangeable with the corresponding components as famished in the installed systems. Spare parts and accessories shall be suitably packaged and identified by nameplate, stamping or tagging. Provide the following spare parts and accessories: 1 - spare fuse for each fused circuit in the system. 10 - spare lamps for each lamp type famished in the installed system. l - set of any special tools required. 3.03 GUARANTEE A. The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment and wiring free from inherent mechanical or electrical defects for one (1) year from date of installation. & The manufacturer shall fum ish gratis to the Owner a one (l) year contract effective from date of installation, for maintenance and ' inspection service of the manufauurer's equipment with a minimum of two (2) inspections during the contract year. Ia:IsZ�]�Yx�lCil,l FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM SECTION 16721 - 4 �I 1 h I I J � I � I SECTION 16741 TELEPHONE SYSTEM PARTI GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A_ Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. 1.02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS Section 16010 - Basic Electrical Requirements Section 16110 - Raceways Section 16130 - Boxes and Fittings Section 16141 - Wiring Devices Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding 1.03 TELEPHONE SYSTEM, GENERALLY A. The telephone system shall be as indicated on the drawings and specified, with underground service entrance to the main telephone equipment cabinet. Conduit feeders connect from the main telephone equipment board to the terminal boards or cabinets located throughout the project. Conduit branches connect the telephone outlets to the terminal boards. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Cabinets, outlet boxes, device plates, conduits, pull wires, etc., shall be as indicated on the drawings and specified elsewhere in these specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUIT A. Sizes shall be as indicated in the drawings. Not more than two (2) 90 degree bends or their equivalent allowed between any two adjacent points. Use long -radius bends on service entrance and feeder conduits. Additional pull or junction boxes shall be installed to comply with these limitations whether or not indicated. Inside radii of bends in conduits of one inch size or larger shall be not less than ten times the normal diameter. System shall be installed in conduit throughout. 3.02 PULL WIRES A. Install 414 AWG zinc coated steel pull wire in each empty conduit run. 3.03 GROUND A. install No. 6 ground wire in 112 inch conduit from all telephone equipment to the ground rod, unless otherwise noted. 3.04 CONDUIT STUBS A. Stub feeder conduits to the left side of the terminal cabinet and branch conduits to the right side of the terminal cabinet, unless otherwise noted. 3.05 DUPLEX RECEPTACLES A. Locate duplex receptacles below the terminal cabinet, unless otherwise noted. 3.06 COORDINATION A. Details, exact locations and arrangement of the telephone facilities shall be coordinated with and as recommended and approved by the Engineer. This includes the location and orientation of lights, receptacles, service entrance conduits, and conduit stubs in the equipment room. END OF SECTION TELEPHONE SYSTEM SECTION 16741 -1 SECTION 16902 ELECTRICAL CONTROLS PART1-GENERAL ram 1.01 REQUIREMENTS: A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. 1.02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS: Section 16010 - Basic Electrical Requirements Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding Section 16480 - Motor Controls 1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. All disconnect means, electrical control, protective, and signal devices for equipment to be installed under this contract shall be furnished, installed, connected, and left in operating condition under this section of these specifications, with the following exceptions: 1. Items scheduled, noted, or shown on the drawings, or specified in the specifications to be furnished and/or installed under other sections of these specifications. 2. Apparatus furnished with, mounted on, and connected integral with equipment furnished under other sections of these specifications, 3. If the substitution of equipment, devices, or systems results in changes to the contract drawings, specifications, and/or changes to the installation requirements not covered by contract change -orders, the complete responsibility and costs shall be assigned to the respective section of these specifications under which the equipment is furnished, and shall be installed and electrically connected under this section of the specifications. 11 r PART 2 -PRODUCTS No 2.01 GENERAL: A. The materials, equipment, and devices related to the electrical systems controls are specified under other sections of these specifications. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 CHANGES DURING CONSTRUCTION: q� A. The complete responsibility and costs for revisions during construction to the approved control diagrams and the resultant changes to the installation requirements not covered by the contract change -orders shall be assigned to the respective section ofthis specification under which the equipment is furnished. 3.02 CONTROL WIRING: A. All control wiring shall be color coded and marked in each box and at each termination with Brady wrap-around labels or suitable tags approved by the Engineer. The schematic control diagrams shown on the contract drawings are for the convenience of the Contractor and may not be complete in all details of control wiring for the equipment purchased for installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION: A. No control work shall be performed until the revised control diagram prints have been re -issued to the Contractor, unless written permission is obtained from the Engineer. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL CONTROLS SECTION 16902 - I